ZyXEL Communications VMG1312B10C Wireless N VDSL2 4-ports Gateway with USB Wireless N VDSL2 4-ports Gateway without USB User Manual

ZyXEL Communications Corporation Wireless N VDSL2 4-ports Gateway with USB Wireless N VDSL2 4-ports Gateway without USB

User manual

Download: ZyXEL Communications VMG1312B10C Wireless N VDSL2 4-ports Gateway with USB Wireless N VDSL2 4-ports Gateway without USB User Manual
Mirror Download [FCC.gov]ZyXEL Communications VMG1312B10C Wireless N VDSL2 4-ports Gateway with USB Wireless N VDSL2 4-ports Gateway without USB User Manual
Document ID2431428
Application IDwBSAGaUZvDYL80tWn6W6xw==
Document DescriptionUser manual
Short Term ConfidentialNo
Permanent ConfidentialNo
SupercedeNo
Document TypeUser Manual
Display FormatAdobe Acrobat PDF - pdf
Filesize342.56kB (4281993 bits)
Date Submitted2014-10-30 00:00:00
Date Available2014-10-30 00:00:00
Creation Date2017-10-20 17:28:25
Producing SoftwareGPL Ghostscript 9.18
Document Lastmod2017-10-20 17:28:25
Document TitleUser manual
Document CreatorFrameMaker 9.0

VM G1 3 1 2 - B1 0 C
Wireless N VDSL2 4-port Gateway with USB
Version 1.00
Edition 1, 10/2014
Quick Start Guide
Use r ’s Gu ide
D e fa u lt Login D e t a ils
LAN IP Address
http://192.168.1.1
Login
www.zyxel.com
Password
admin
1234
Copyright © 2014 ZyXEL Communications Corporation
IMPORTANT!
READ CAREFULLY BEFORE USE.
KEEP THIS GUIDE FOR FUTURE REFERENCE.
Screenshots and graphics in this book may differ slightly from your product due to differences in
your product firmware or your computer operating system. Every effort has been made to ensure
that the information in this manual is accurate.
Related Documentation
• Quick Start Guide
The Quick Start Guide shows how to connect the Device and get up and running right away.
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
Contents Overview
Contents Overview
User’s Guide .......................................................................................................................................15
Introducing the Device ............................................................................................................................17
The Web Configurator .............................................................................................................................23
Quick Start ...............................................................................................................................................31
Technical Reference ..........................................................................................................................33
Network Map and Status Screens ...........................................................................................................35
Broadband ...............................................................................................................................................39
Wireless ..................................................................................................................................................65
Home Networking ..................................................................................................................................101
Routing ..................................................................................................................................................125
Quality of Service (QoS) .......................................................................................................................131
Network Address Translation (NAT) ......................................................................................................149
Dynamic DNS Setup .............................................................................................................................167
Interface Group .....................................................................................................................................171
USB Service ..........................................................................................................................................177
Firewall ..................................................................................................................................................183
MAC Filter .............................................................................................................................................193
Parental Control ....................................................................................................................................195
Scheduler Rule ......................................................................................................................................199
Certificates ............................................................................................................................................201
VPN .......................................................................................................................................................209
Log .......................................................................................................................................................221
Traffic Status ........................................................................................................................................225
ARP Table .............................................................................................................................................229
Routing Table ........................................................................................................................................231
IGMP Status .........................................................................................................................................233
xDSL Statistics ......................................................................................................................................235
3G Statistics .........................................................................................................................................239
User Account .........................................................................................................................................241
Remote Management ............................................................................................................................243
TR-069 Client ........................................................................................................................................245
TR-064 ..................................................................................................................................................247
Time Settings ........................................................................................................................................249
E-mail Notification .................................................................................................................................253
Logs Setting .........................................................................................................................................255
Firmware Upgrade ................................................................................................................................259
Configuration .........................................................................................................................................261
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
Contents Overview
Diagnostic .............................................................................................................................................265
Troubleshooting ....................................................................................................................................271
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Contents Overview ..............................................................................................................................3
Table of Contents .................................................................................................................................5
Part I: User’s Guide ......................................................................................... 15
Chapter 1
Introducing the Device .......................................................................................................................17
1.1 Overview ...........................................................................................................................................17
1.2 Ways to Manage the Device .............................................................................................................17
1.3 Good Habits for Managing the Device ..............................................................................................17
1.4 Applications for the Device ...............................................................................................................18
1.4.1 Internet Access ........................................................................................................................18
1.4.2 Device’s USB Support .............................................................................................................19
1.5 LEDs (Lights) ....................................................................................................................................20
1.6 The RESET Button ............................................................................................................................20
1.7 Wireless Access ................................................................................................................................21
1.7.1 Using the WLAN/WPS Button .................................................................................................21
Chapter 2
The Web Configurator ........................................................................................................................23
2.1 Overview ...........................................................................................................................................23
2.1.1 Accessing the Web Configurator .............................................................................................23
2.2 Web Configurator Layout ..................................................................................................................25
2.2.1 Title Bar ...................................................................................................................................25
2.2.2 Main Window ...........................................................................................................................26
2.2.3 Navigation Panel .....................................................................................................................27
Chapter 3
Quick Start...........................................................................................................................................31
3.1 Overview ...........................................................................................................................................31
3.2 Quick Start Setup ..............................................................................................................................31
Part II: Technical Reference............................................................................ 33
Chapter 4
Network Map and Status Screens .....................................................................................................35
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
Table of Contents
4.1 Overview ...........................................................................................................................................35
4.2 The Network Map Screen .................................................................................................................35
4.3 The Status Screen .............................................................................................................................36
Chapter 5
Broadband...........................................................................................................................................39
5.1 Overview ...........................................................................................................................................39
5.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ............................................................................................39
5.1.2 What You Need to Know ..........................................................................................................40
5.1.3 Before You Begin .....................................................................................................................42
5.2 The Broadband Screen .....................................................................................................................42
5.2.1 Add/Edit Internet Connection ...................................................................................................44
5.3 The 3G Backup Screen .....................................................................................................................51
5.4 The Advanced Screen .......................................................................................................................55
5.5 The 8021x Screen .............................................................................................................................56
5.5.1 Edit 802.1X Settings ................................................................................................................57
5.6 The Ethernet WAN Screen ................................................................................................................57
5.7 Technical Reference ..........................................................................................................................58
Chapter 6
Wireless ...............................................................................................................................................65
6.1 Overview ...........................................................................................................................................65
6.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ............................................................................................65
6.1.2 What You Need to Know ..........................................................................................................66
6.2 The General Screen .........................................................................................................................66
6.2.1 No Security ..............................................................................................................................69
6.2.2 Basic (WEP Encryption) ..........................................................................................................70
6.2.3 Basic (802.1X) .........................................................................................................................71
6.2.4 More Secure (WPA(2)-PSK) ....................................................................................................73
6.2.5 WPA(2) Authentication .............................................................................................................74
6.3 The More AP Screen .........................................................................................................................75
6.3.1 Edit More AP ..........................................................................................................................77
6.4 MAC Authentication ..........................................................................................................................78
6.5 The WPS Screen ..............................................................................................................................79
6.6 The WMM Screen .............................................................................................................................81
6.7 The WDS Screen ..............................................................................................................................82
6.7.1 WDS Scan ...............................................................................................................................83
6.8 The Others Screen ............................................................................................................................84
6.9 The Channel Status Screen ..............................................................................................................86
6.10 Technical Reference ........................................................................................................................86
6.10.1 Wireless Network Overview ...................................................................................................86
6.10.2 Additional Wireless Terms .....................................................................................................88
6.10.3 Wireless Security Overview ...................................................................................................88
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
Table of Contents
6.10.4 Signal Problems ....................................................................................................................91
6.10.5 BSS .......................................................................................................................................91
6.10.6 MBSSID .................................................................................................................................91
6.10.7 Preamble Type ......................................................................................................................92
6.10.8 Wireless Distribution System (WDS) .....................................................................................92
6.10.9 WiFi Protected Setup (WPS) .................................................................................................93
Chapter 7
Home Networking .............................................................................................................................101
7.1 Overview .........................................................................................................................................101
7.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ..........................................................................................101
7.1.2 What You Need To Know .......................................................................................................102
7.1.3 Before You Begin ...................................................................................................................103
7.2 The LAN Setup Screen ...................................................................................................................103
7.3 The Static DHCP Screen .................................................................................................................107
7.4 The UPnP Screen ...........................................................................................................................108
7.5 Installing UPnP in Windows Example .............................................................................................109
7.6 Using UPnP in Windows XP Example ............................................................................................ 112
7.7 The Additional Subnet Screen ........................................................................................................ 118
7.8 The STB Vendor ID Screen ............................................................................................................. 119
7.9 The LAN VLAN Screen ...................................................................................................................120
7.10 Technical Reference ......................................................................................................................120
7.10.1 LANs, WANs and the Device ...............................................................................................121
7.10.2 DHCP Setup ........................................................................................................................121
7.10.3 DNS Server Addresses .......................................................................................................121
7.10.4 LAN TCP/IP .........................................................................................................................122
Chapter 8
Routing ..............................................................................................................................................125
8.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................................125
8.2 The Routing Screen ........................................................................................................................126
8.2.1 Add/Edit Static Route .............................................................................................................127
8.3 The Policy Forwarding Screen ........................................................................................................127
8.3.1 Add/Edit Policy Forwarding ...................................................................................................129
8.4 RIP
..............................................................................................................................................129
8.4.1 The RIP Screen .....................................................................................................................130
Chapter 9
Quality of Service (QoS)...................................................................................................................131
9.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................................131
9.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ..........................................................................................131
9.2 What You Need to Know .................................................................................................................132
9.3 The Quality of Service General Screen ..........................................................................................133
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
Table of Contents
9.4 The Queue Setup Screen ...............................................................................................................134
9.4.1 Adding a QoS Queue ...........................................................................................................136
9.5 The Class Setup Screen .................................................................................................................136
9.5.1 Add/Edit QoS Class ..............................................................................................................138
9.6 The QoS Policer Setup Screen .......................................................................................................141
9.6.1 Add/Edit a QoS Policer .........................................................................................................142
9.7 The QoS Monitor Screen ...............................................................................................................143
9.8 Technical Reference ........................................................................................................................144
Chapter 10
Network Address Translation (NAT)................................................................................................149
10.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................149
10.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ........................................................................................149
10.1.2 What You Need To Know .....................................................................................................149
10.2 The Port Forwarding Screen ........................................................................................................150
10.2.1 Add/Edit Port Forwarding ...................................................................................................152
10.3 The Applications Screen ...............................................................................................................153
10.3.1 Add New Application ...........................................................................................................154
10.4 The Port Triggering Screen ...........................................................................................................155
10.4.1 Add/Edit Port Triggering Rule .............................................................................................157
10.5 The DMZ Screen ...........................................................................................................................158
10.6 The ALG Screen ...........................................................................................................................158
10.7 The Address Mapping Screen .......................................................................................................159
10.7.1 Add/Edit Address Mapping Rule ..........................................................................................160
10.8 Technical Reference ......................................................................................................................161
10.8.1 NAT Definitions ....................................................................................................................161
10.8.2 What NAT Does ...................................................................................................................162
10.8.3 How NAT Works ..................................................................................................................163
10.8.4 NAT Application ...................................................................................................................164
Chapter 11
Dynamic DNS Setup .........................................................................................................................167
11.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................167
11.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ........................................................................................167
11.1.2 What You Need To Know .....................................................................................................168
11.2 The DNS Entry Screen ..................................................................................................................168
11.2.1 Add/Edit DNS Entry .............................................................................................................169
11.3 The Dynamic DNS Screen ............................................................................................................169
Chapter 12
Interface Group .................................................................................................................................171
12.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................171
12.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ........................................................................................171
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
Table of Contents
12.2 The Interface Group Screen ..........................................................................................................171
12.2.1 Interface Group Configuration .............................................................................................172
12.2.2 Interface Grouping Criteria .................................................................................................174
Chapter 13
USB Service ......................................................................................................................................177
13.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................177
13.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ........................................................................................177
13.1.2 What You Need To Know .....................................................................................................177
13.2 The File Sharing Screen ...............................................................................................................178
13.2.1 Before You Begin .................................................................................................................179
13.3 The Media Server Screen .............................................................................................................180
13.4 The Printer Server Screen ............................................................................................................181
13.4.1 Before You Begin .................................................................................................................181
Chapter 14
Firewall ..............................................................................................................................................183
14.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................183
14.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ........................................................................................183
14.1.2 What You Need to Know ......................................................................................................184
14.2 The Firewall Screen ......................................................................................................................185
14.3 The Service Screen ......................................................................................................................185
14.3.1 Add/Edit a Service ..............................................................................................................187
14.4 The Access Control Screen ..........................................................................................................188
14.4.1 Add/Edit an ACL Rule ........................................................................................................189
14.5 The DoS Screen ............................................................................................................................190
Chapter 15
MAC Filter..........................................................................................................................................193
15.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................................193
15.2 The MAC Filter Screen ..................................................................................................................193
Chapter 16
Parental Control ................................................................................................................................195
16.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................195
16.2 The Parental Control Screen .........................................................................................................195
16.2.1 Add/Edit a Parental Control Rule .........................................................................................196
Chapter 17
Scheduler Rule..................................................................................................................................199
17.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................199
17.2 The Scheduler Rule Screen ..........................................................................................................199
17.2.1 Add/Edit a Schedule ............................................................................................................200
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
Table of Contents
Chapter 18
Certificates ........................................................................................................................................201
18.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................201
18.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ........................................................................................201
18.2 What You Need to Know ...............................................................................................................201
18.3 The Local Certificates Screen .......................................................................................................202
18.3.1 Create Certificate Request .................................................................................................203
18.3.2 Load Signed Certificate ......................................................................................................204
18.4 The Trusted CA Screen ................................................................................................................205
18.4.1 View Trusted CA Certificate .................................................................................................206
18.4.2 Import Trusted CA Certificate ..............................................................................................207
Chapter 19
VPN ....................................................................................................................................................209
19.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................209
19.2 IPSec VPN ....................................................................................................................................209
19.2.1 The General Screen ............................................................................................................209
19.2.2 IPSec VPN: Add ..................................................................................................................210
19.3 Technical Reference ......................................................................................................................215
19.3.1 IPSec Architecture ...............................................................................................................215
19.3.2 Encapsulation ......................................................................................................................216
19.3.3 IKE Phases .........................................................................................................................217
19.3.4 Negotiation Mode ................................................................................................................218
19.3.5 IPSec and NAT ....................................................................................................................218
19.3.6 VPN, NAT, and NAT Traversal .............................................................................................219
19.3.7 Pre-Shared Key ...................................................................................................................219
19.3.8 Diffie-Hellman (DH) Key Groups ..........................................................................................220
Chapter 20
Log ....................................................................................................................................................221
20.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................221
20.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ........................................................................................221
20.1.2 What You Need To Know .....................................................................................................221
20.2 The System Log Screen ................................................................................................................222
20.3 The Security Log Screen ...............................................................................................................223
Chapter 21
Traffic Status ....................................................................................................................................225
21.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................225
21.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ........................................................................................225
21.2 The WAN Status Screen ...............................................................................................................225
21.3 The LAN Status Screen .................................................................................................................227
21.4 The NAT Status Screen .................................................................................................................228
10
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
Table of Contents
Chapter 22
ARP Table ..........................................................................................................................................229
22.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................229
22.1.1 How ARP Works ..................................................................................................................229
22.2 ARP Table Screen .........................................................................................................................229
Chapter 23
Routing Table ....................................................................................................................................231
23.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................231
23.2 The Routing Table Screen .............................................................................................................231
Chapter 24
IGMP Status ......................................................................................................................................233
24.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................233
24.2 The IGMP Group Status Screen ...................................................................................................233
Chapter 25
xDSL Statistics..................................................................................................................................235
25.1 The xDSL Statistics Screen ...........................................................................................................235
Chapter 26
3G Statistics .....................................................................................................................................239
26.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................239
26.2 The 3G Statistics Screen ...............................................................................................................239
Chapter 27
User Account ....................................................................................................................................241
27.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................................241
27.2 The User Account Screen .............................................................................................................241
Chapter 28
Remote Management........................................................................................................................243
28.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................243
28.2 The Remote MGMT Screen ..........................................................................................................243
Chapter 29
TR-069 Client.....................................................................................................................................245
29.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................245
29.2 The TR-069 Client Screen ............................................................................................................245
Chapter 30
TR-064................................................................................................................................................247
30.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................247
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
11
Table of Contents
30.2 The TR-064 Screen .......................................................................................................................247
Chapter 31
Time Settings ....................................................................................................................................249
31.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................249
31.2 The Time Screen ..........................................................................................................................249
Chapter 32
E-mail Notification ............................................................................................................................253
32.1 Overview
....................................................................................................................................253
32.2 The Email Notification Screen .......................................................................................................253
32.2.1 Email Notification Edit ........................................................................................................254
Chapter 33
Logs Setting .....................................................................................................................................255
33.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................................255
33.2 The Log Settings Screen ...............................................................................................................256
33.2.1 Example E-mail Log ............................................................................................................257
Chapter 34
Firmware Upgrade ............................................................................................................................259
34.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................259
34.2 The Firmware Screen ....................................................................................................................259
Chapter 35
Configuration ....................................................................................................................................261
35.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................261
35.2 The Configuration Screen .............................................................................................................261
35.3 The Reboot Screen .......................................................................................................................263
Chapter 36
Diagnostic .........................................................................................................................................265
36.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................265
36.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ........................................................................................265
36.2 What You Need to Know ...............................................................................................................265
36.3 Ping & TraceRoute & NsLookup ...................................................................................................266
36.4 802.1ag .........................................................................................................................................267
36.5 OAM Ping ......................................................................................................................................268
Chapter 37
Troubleshooting................................................................................................................................271
37.1 Power, Hardware Connections, and LEDs ....................................................................................271
37.2 Device Access and Login ..............................................................................................................272
12
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
Table of Contents
37.3 Internet Access .............................................................................................................................274
37.4 Wireless Internet Access ...............................................................................................................275
37.5 USB Device Connection ................................................................................................................276
37.6 UPnP .............................................................................................................................................276
Appendix A Customer Support ........................................................................................................277
Appendix B Legal Information..........................................................................................................283
Index ..................................................................................................................................................289
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
13
Table of Contents
14
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
P ART I
User’s Guide
15
16
C HAPT ER
Introducing the Device
1.1 Overview
The Device is a wireless VDSL router. It has a DSL port for super-fast Internet access over analog
(POTS) telephone lines. The Device supports both Packet Transfer Mode (PTM) and Asynchronous
Transfer Mode (ATM). It is backward compatible with ADSL, ADSL2 and ADSL2+ in case VDSL is not
available.
Only use firmware for your Device’s specific model. Refer to the label on
the bottom of your Device.
The Device has a USB port used to share files via a USB memory stick or a USB hard drive.
1.2 Ways to Manage the Device
Use any of the following methods to manage the Device.
• Web Configurator. This is recommended for everyday management of the Device using a
(supported) web browser.
• TR-069. This is an auto-configuration server used to remotely configure your device.
1.3 Good Habits for Managing the Device
Do the following things regularly to make the Device more secure and to manage the Device more
effectively.
• Change the password. Use a password that’s not easy to guess and that consists of different
types of characters, such as numbers and letters.
• Write down the password and put it in a safe place.
• Back up the configuration (and make sure you know how to restore it). Restoring an earlier
working configuration may be useful if the device becomes unstable or even crashes. If you
forget your password, you will have to reset the Device to its factory default settings. If you
backed up an earlier configuration file, you would not have to totally re-configure the Device. You
could simply restore your last configuration.
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
17
Chapter 1 Introducing the Device
1.4 Applications for the Device
Here are some example uses for which the Device is well suited.
1.4.1 Internet Access
Your Device provides shared Internet access by connecting the DSL port to the D SL or M OD EM
jack on a splitter or your telephone jack. You can have multiple WAN services over one ADSL or
VDSL. The Device cannot work in ADSL and VDSL mode at the same time.
Note: The ADSL and VDSL lines share the same WAN (layer-2) interfaces that you
configure in the Device. Refer to Section 5.2 on page 42 for the N e t w or k Se t t in g
> Br oa dba n d screen.
Computers can connect to the Device’s LAN ports (or wirelessly).
Figure 1 Device’s Internet Access Application
WLAN
WAN
Bridging
IPoE
PPPoE
ADSL / VDSL
LAN
WLAN
WAN
Bridging
PPPoE
IPoE
PPPoA
IPoA
LAN
ADSL
You can also configure IP filtering on the Device for secure Internet access. When the IP filter is on,
all incoming traffic from the Internet to your network is blocked by default unless it is initiated from
your network. This means that probes from the outside to your network are not allowed, but you
can safely browse the Internet and download files.
18
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
Chapter 1 Introducing the Device
1.4.2 Device’s USB Support
The USB port of the Device is used for file-sharing.
File Sharing
Use the built-in USB 2.0 port to share files on a USB memory stick or a USB hard drive (B). You can
connect one USB hard drive to the Device at a time. Use FTP to access the files on the USB device.
Figure 2 USB File Sharing Application
Media Server
You can also use the Device as a media server. This lets anyone on your network play video, music,
and photos from a USB device (B) connected to the Device’s USB port (without having to copy them
to another computer).
Figure 3 USB Media Server Application
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
19
Chapter 1 Introducing the Device
1.5 LEDs (Lights)
The following table describes the behavior of the LEDs. None of the LEDs are on if the Device is not
receiving power.
Table 1 LED Descriptions
LED
COLOR
STATUS
DESCRIPTION
Green
On
The Device recognizes a USB connection.
Blinking
The Device is sending/receiving data to /from the USB device connected
to it.
Off
The Device does not detect a USB connection.
USB
Green
DSL
Orange
Green
WLAN/WPS
Orange
4~1
Green
ETHERNET
Green
On
The ADSL line is up.
Blinking
The Device is initializing the ADSL line.
On
The VDSL line is up.
Blinking
The Device is initializing the VDSL line.
Off
The DSL line is down.
On
The wireless network is activated.
Blinking
The Device is communicating with other wireless clients.
Blinking
The Device is setting up a WPS connection.
Off
The wireless network is not activated.
On
The Device has a successful 100 Mbps Ethernet connection with a device
on the Local Area Network (LAN).
Blinking
The Device is sending or receiving data to/from the LAN at 100 Mbps.
Off
The Device does not have an Ethernet connection with the LAN.
On
The Device has an IP connection but no traffic.
Your device has a WAN IP address (either static or assigned by a DHCP
server), PPP negotiation was successfully completed (if used) and the
DSL connection is up.
INTERNET
POWER
Blinking
The Device is sending or receiving IP traffic.
Off
There is no Internet connection or the gateway is in bridged mode.
Red
On
The Device attempted to make an IP connection but failed. Possible
causes are no response from a DHCP server, no PPPoE response, PPPoE
authentication failed.
Green
On
The Device is receiving power and ready for use.
Blinking
The Device is self-testing.
On
The Device detected an error while self-testing, or there is a device
malfunction.
Off
The Device is not receiving power.
Blinking
Firmware upgrade is in progress.
Red
1.6 The RESET Button
If you forget your password or cannot access the web configurator, you will need to use the RESET
button at the back of the device to reload the factory-default configuration file. This means that you
will lose all configurations that you had previously and the password will be reset to “1234”.
20
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
Chapter 1 Introducing the Device
Make sure the POW ER LED is on (not blinking).
To set the device back to the factory default settings, press the RESET button for ten seconds or
until the POW ER LED begins to blink and then release it. When the POW ER LED begins to blink,
the defaults have been restored and the device restarts.
1.7 Wireless Access
The Device is a wireless Access Point (AP) for wireless clients, such as notebook computers or
tablets. It allows them to connect to the Internet without having to rely on inconvenient Ethernet
cables.
You can configure your wireless network in either the built-in Web Configurator, or using the WPS
button.
Figure 4 Wireless Access Example
1.7.1 Using the WLAN/WPS Button
If the wireless network is turned off, press the W LAN / W PS button at the back of the Device for
one second. Once the W LAN / W PS LED turns green, the wireless network is active.
You can also use the W LAN / W PS button to quickly set up a secure wireless connection between
the Device and a WPS-compatible client by adding one device at a time.
To activate WPS:
Make sure the POW ER LED is on and not blinking.
Press the W LAN / W PS button for five seconds and release it.
Press the WPS button on another WPS-enabled device within range of the Device. The W LAN / W PS
LED flashes orange while the Device sets up a WPS connection with the other wireless device.
Once the connection is successfully made, the W LAN / W PS LED shines green.
To turn off the wireless network, press the W LAN / W PS button on the front of the Device for one
second. The W LAN / W PS LED turns off when the wireless network is off.
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
21
Chapter 1 Introducing the Device
22
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
C HAPT ER
The Web Configurator
2.1 Overview
The web configurator is an HTML-based management interface that allows easy device setup and
management via Internet browser. Use Internet Explorer 6.0 and later versions or Mozilla Firefox 3
and later versions or Safari 2.0 and later versions. The recommended screen resolution is 1024 by
768 pixels.
In order to use the web configurator you need to allow:
• Web browser pop-up windows from your device. Web pop-up blocking is enabled by default in
Windows XP SP (Service Pack) 2.
• JavaScript (enabled by default).
• Java permissions (enabled by default).
2.1.1 Accessing the Web Configurator
Make sure your Device hardware is properly connected (refer to the Quick Start Guide).
Launch your web browser. If the Device does not automatically re-direct you to the login screen, go
to http://192.168.1.1.
A password screen displays. To access the administrative web configurator and manage the Device,
type the default username a dm in and password 1 2 3 4 in the password screen and click Login . If
advanced account security is enabled (see Section 27.2 on page 241) the number of dots that
appears when you type the password changes randomly to prevent anyone watching the password
field from knowing the length of your password. If you have changed the password, enter your
password and click Login .
Figure 5 Password Screen
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
23
Chapter 2 The Web Configurator
The following screen displays if you have not yet changed your password. It is strongly
recommended you change the default password. Enter a new password, retype it to confirm and
click Apply; alternatively click Sk ip to proceed to the main menu if you do not want to change the
password now.
Figure 6 Change Password Screen
The Quick St a r t W iza r d screen appears. You can configure the Device’s time zone, basic Internet
access, and wireless settings. See Chapter 3 on page 31 for more information.
After you finished or closed the Quick St a r t W iza r d screen, the N e t w or k M a p page appears.
Figure 7 Network Map
24
Click St a t us to display the St a t us screen, where you can view the Device’s interface and system
information.
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
Chapter 2 The Web Configurator
2.2 Web Configurator Layout
Figure 8 Screen Layout
As illustrated above, the main screen is divided into these parts:
• A - title bar
• B - main window
• C - navigation panel
2.2.1 Title Bar
The title bar provides some icons in the upper right corner.
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
25
Chapter 2 The Web Configurator
The icons provide the following functions.
Table 2 Web Configurator Icons in the Title Bar
ICON
DESCRIPTION
Quick Start
Click this icon to open screens where you can configure the Device’s time zone Internet
access, and wireless settings.
Logout
Click this icon to log out of the web configurator.
2.2.2 Main Window
The main window displays information and configuration fields. It is discussed in the rest of this
document.
After you click St a t u s on the Con n e ct ion St a t us page, the St a t us screen is displayed. See
Chapter 4 on page 36 for more information about the St a t u s screen.
26
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
Chapter 2 The Web Configurator
If you click Vir t ua l D e vice on the Syst e m I n fo screen, a visual graphic appears, showing the
connection status of the Device’s ports. The connected ports are in color and disconnected ports are
gray.
Figure 9 Virtual Device
2.2.3 Navigation Panel
Use the menu items on the navigation panel to open screens to configure Device features. The
following tables describe each menu item.
Table 3 Navigation Panel Summary
LINK
Connection Status
TAB
FUNCTION
This screen shows the network status of the Device and computers/
devices connected to it.
Network Setting
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
27
Chapter 2 The Web Configurator
Table 3 Navigation Panel Summary (continued)
LINK
Broadband
Wireless
Home
Networking
Routing
QoS
28
TAB
FUNCTION
Broadband
Use this screen to view and configure ISP parameters, WAN IP
address assignment, and other advanced properties. You can also add
new WAN connections.
3G Backup
Use this screen to configure 3G WAN connection.
Advanced
Use this screen to enable or disable PTM over ADSL, Annex M/Annex
J, and DSL PhyR functions.
8021x
Use this screen to view and configure the IEEE 802.1x settings on the
Device.
Ethernet WAN
Use this screen to configure a LAN port as an ethernet WAN port
General
Use this screen to configure the wireless LAN settings and WLAN
authentication/security settings.
More AP
Use this screen to configure multiple BSSs on the Device.
MAC
Authentication
Use this screen to block or allow wireless traffic from wireless devices
of certain SSIDs and MAC addresses to the Device.
WPS
Use this screen to configure and view your WPS (Wi-Fi Protected
Setup) settings.
WMM
Use this screen to enable or disable Wi-Fi MultiMedia (WMM).
WDS
Use this screen to set up Wireless Distribution System (WDS) links to
other access points.
Others
Use this screen to configure advanced wireless settings.
Channel Status
Use this screen to scan wireless LAN channel noises and view the
results.
LAN Setup
Use this screen to configure LAN TCP/IP settings, and other advanced
properties.
Static DHCP
Use this screen to assign specific IP addresses to individual MAC
addresses.
UPnP
Use this screen to turn UPnP and UPnP NAT-T on or off.
Additional
Subnet
Use this screen to configure IP alias and public static IP.
STB Vendor ID
Use this screen to have the Device automatically create static DHCP
entries for Set Top Box (STB) devices when they request IP
addresses.
LAN VLAN
Use this screen to control the VLAN ID and IEEE 802.1p priority tags
of traffic sent out through individual LAN ports.
Static Route
Use this screen to view and set up static routes on the Device.
Policy
Forwarding
Use this screen to configure policy routing on the Device.
RIP
Use this screen to configure Routing Information Protocol to
exchange routing information with other routers.
General
Use this screen to enable QoS and traffic prioritizing. You can also
configure the QoS rules and actions.
Queue Setup
Use this screen to configure QoS queues.
Class Setup
Use this screen to define a classifier.
Policer Setup
Use these screens to configure QoS policers.
Monitor
Use this screen to view QoS packets statistics.
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
Chapter 2 The Web Configurator
Table 3 Navigation Panel Summary (continued)
LINK
NAT
DNS
TAB
FUNCTION
Port Forwarding
Use this screen to make your local servers visible to the outside
world.
Applications
Use this screen to configure servers behind the Device.
Port Triggering
Use this screen to change your Device’s port triggering settings.
DMZ
Use this screen to configure a default server which receives packets
from ports that are not specified in the Por t For w a r din g screen.
ALG
Use this screen to enable or disable SIP ALG.
Address Mapping
Use this screen to change your Device’s address mapping settings.
DNS Entry
Use this screen to view and configure DNS routes.
Dynamic DNS
Use this screen to allow a static hostname alias for a dynamic IP
address.
Interface
Group
USB Device
Use this screen to map a port to a PVC or bridge group.
File Sharing
Use this screen to enable file sharing via the Device.
Media Server
Use this screen to use the Device as a media server.
Printer Server
Use this screen to enable the print server on the Device and get the
model name of the associated printer.
General
Use this screen to configure the security level of your firewall.
Service
Use this screen to add Internet services and configure firewall rules.
Access Control
Use this screen to enable specific traffic directions for network
services.
DoS
Use this screen to activate protection against Denial of Service (DoS)
attacks.
Security Settings
Firewall
MAC Filter
Use this screen to block or allow traffic from devices of certain MAC
addresses to the Device.
Parental
Control
Use this screen to block web sites with the specific URL.
Scheduler Rule
Use this screen to configure the days and times when a configured
restriction (such as parental control) is enforced.
Certificates
Local Certificates
Use this screen to view a summary list of certificates and manage
certificates and certification requests.
Trusted CA
Use this screen to view and manage the list of the trusted CAs.
IPSec VPN
Use this screen to add or edit VPN policies.
System Monitor
Log
Traffic Status
ARP Table
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
System Log
Use this screen to view the status of events that occurred to the
Device. You can export or e-mail the logs.
Security Log
Use this screen to view the login record of the Device. You can export
or e-mail the logs.
WAN
Use this screen to view the status of all network traffic going through
the WAN port of the Device.
LAN
Use this screen to view the status of all network traffic going through
the LAN ports of the Device.
NAT
Use this screen to view NAT statistics for connected hosts.
Use this screen to view the ARP table. It displays the IP and MAC
address of each DHCP connection.
29
Chapter 2 The Web Configurator
Table 3 Navigation Panel Summary (continued)
LINK
TAB
FUNCTION
IGMP Group
Status
Use this screen to view the status of all IGMP settings on the Device.
xDSL Statistics
Use this screen to view the Device’s xDSL traffic statistics.
3G Monitor
Use this screen to look at 3G Internet connection status.
Maintenance
User Account
Use this screen to change user password on the Device.
Remote MGMT
Use this screen to enable specific traffic directions for network
services.
TR-069 Client
Use this screen to configure the Device to be managed by an Auto
Configuration Server (ACS).
TR-064 Client
Use this screen to enable management via TR-064 on the LAN.
Time
Use this screen to change your Device’s time and date.
Email
Notification
Use this screen to configure up to two mail servers and sender
addresses on the Device.
Log Setting
Use this screen to change your Device’s log settings.
Firmware
Upgrade
Use this screen to upload firmware to your device.
Configuration
Use this screen to backup and restore your device’s configuration
(settings) or reset the factory default settings.
Reboot
Use this screen to reboot the Device without turning the power off.
Diagnostic
30
Ping &
Traceroute &
Nslookup
Use this screen to identify problems with the DSL connection. You can
use Ping, TraceRoute, or Nslookup to help you identify problems.
802.1ag
Use this screen to configure CFM (Connectivity Fault Management)
MD (maintenance domain) and MA (maintenance association),
perform connectivity tests and view test reports.
OAM Ping
Use this screen to view information to help you identify problems with
the DSL connection.
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
C HAPT ER
Quick Start
3.1 Overview
Use the Quick Start screens to configure the Device’s time zone, basic Internet access, and wireless
settings.
Note: See the technical reference chapters (starting on page 33) for background
information on the features in this chapter.
3.2 Quick Start Setup
The Quick Start Wizard appears automatically after login. Or you can click the Click St a r t icon in
the top right corner of the web configurator to open the quick start screens. Select the time zone of
the Device’s location and click N e x t .
Figure 10 Time Zone
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
31
Chapter 3 Quick Start
Enter your Internet connection information in this screen. The screen and fields to enter may vary
depending on your current connection type. Click N e x t . Click N e x t .
Figure 11 Internet Connection
Turn the wireless LAN on or off. If you keep it on, record the security settings so you can configure
your wireless clients to connect to the Device. Click Sa ve .
Figure 12 Internet Connection
32
Your Device saves your settings and attempts to connect to the Internet.
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
P ART II
Technical Reference
33
34
C HAPT ER
Network Map and Status Screens
4.1 Overview
After you log into the Web Configurator, the N e t w or k M a p screen appears. This shows the network
connection status of the Device and clients connected to it.
You can use the St a t u s screen to look at the current status of the Device, system resources, and
interfaces (LAN, WAN, and WLAN).
4.2 The Network Map Screen
Use this screen to view the network connection status of the device and its clients. A warning
message appears if there is a connection problem.
If you prefer to view the status in a list, click List Vie w in the Vie w in g M ode selection box. You
can configure how often you want the Device to update this screen in Re fr e sh I nt e r va l.
Figure 13 Network Map: Icon Mode
Figure 14 Network Map: List Mode
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
35
Chapter 4 Network Map and Status Screens
In I con M ode , if you want to view information about a client, click the client’s name and I nfo.
Click the IP address if you want to change it. If you want to change the name or icon of the client,
click Cha nge icon/ na m e .
In List M ode , you can also view the client’s information.
4.3 The Status Screen
Use this screen to view the status of the Device. Click St a t u s to open this screen.
Figure 15 Status Screen
36
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
Chapter 4 Network Map and Status Screens
Each field is described in the following table.
Table 4 Status Screen
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Refresh Interval Select how often you want the Device to update this screen.
Device Information
Host Name
This field displays the Device system name. It is used for identification.
Model
Number
This shows the model number of your Device.
Firmware
Version
This is the current version of the firmware inside the Device.
WAN Information (These fields display when you have a WAN connection.)
WAN Type
This field displays the current WAN connection type.
MAC Address
This shows the WAN Ethernet adapter MAC (Media Access Control) Address of your Device.
IP Address
This field displays the current IP address of the Device in the WAN. Click Re le a se to release
your IP address to 0.0.0.0. If you want to renew your IP address, click Re n e w .
IP Subnet Mask
This field displays the current subnet mask in the WAN.
Encapsulation
This field displays the current encapsulation method.
LAN Information
IP Address
This is the current IP address of the Device in the LAN.
IP Subnet
Mask
This is the current subnet mask in the LAN.
DHCP
This field displays what DHCP services the Device is providing to the LAN. Choices are:
Se r ve r - The Device is a DHCP server in the LAN. It assigns IP addresses to other
computers in the LAN.
Re la y - The Device acts as a surrogate DHCP server and relays DHCP requests and
responses between the remote server and the clients.
N on e - The Device is not providing any DHCP services to the LAN.
MAC
Address
This shows the LAN Ethernet adapter MAC (Media Access Control) Address of your Device.
WLAN Information
MAC
Address
This shows the wireless adapter MAC (Media Access Control) Address of your Device.
Status
This displays whether WLAN is activated.
SSID
This is the descriptive name used to identify the Device in a wireless LAN.
Channel
This is the channel number used by the Device now.
Security
This displays the type of security mode the Device is using in the wireless LAN.
802.11
Mode
This displays the type of 802.11 mode the Device is using in the wireless LAN.
WPS
This displays whether WPS is activated.
Security
Firewall
This displays the firewall’s current security level.
System Status
System Up
Time
This field displays how long the Device has been running since it last started up. The Device
starts up when you plug it in, when you restart it (M a in t e n a n ce > Re boot ), or when you
reset it.
Current
Date/Time
This field displays the current date and time in the Device. You can change this in
M a in t e n a n ce > Tim e Se t t in g.
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
37
Chapter 4 Network Map and Status Screens
Table 4 Status Screen (continued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
System Resource
38
CPU Usage
This field displays what percentage of the Device’s processing ability is currently used. When
this percentage is close to 100%, the Device is running at full load, and the throughput is
not going to improve anymore. If you want some applications to have more throughput, you
should turn off other applications (for example, using QoS; see Chapter 9 on page 131).
Memory
Usage
This field displays what percentage of the Device’s memory is currently used. Usually, this
percentage should not increase much. If memory usage does get close to 100%, the Device
is probably becoming unstable, and you should restart the device. See Section 35.2 on page
261, or turn off the device (unplug the power) for a few seconds.
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
C HAPT ER
Broadband
5.1 Overview
This chapter discusses the Device’s Br oa dba n d screens. Use these screens to configure your
Device for Internet access.
A WAN (Wide Area Network) connection is an outside connection to another network or the
Internet. It connects your private networks, such as a LAN (Local Area Network) and other
networks, so that a computer in one location can communicate with computers in other locations.
Figure 16 LAN and WAN
WAN
3G (third generation) standards for the sending and receiving of voice, video, and data in a mobile
environment.
You can attach a 3G wireless adapter to the USB port and set the Device to use this 3G connection
as your WAN or a backup when the wired WAN connection fails.
Figure 17 3G WAN Connection
5.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
• Use the Br oa dba n d screen to view, remove or add a WAN interface. You can also configure the
WAN settings on the Device for Internet access (Section 5.2 on page 42).
• Use the 3 G Ba ck up screen to configure 3G WAN connection (Section 5.3 on page 51).
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
39
Chapter 5 Broadband
• Use the Adva nce d screen to enable or disable PTM over ADSL, Annex M/Annex J, and DSL PhyR
functions (Section 5.4 on page 55).
• Use the 8 0 2 1 x screen to view and configure the IEEE 802.1X settings on the Device (Section 5.5
on page 56).
Table 5 WAN Setup Overview
LAYER-2 INTERFACE
CONNECTION
ADSL/VDSL
over PTM
ADSL over ATM
EtherWAN
INTERNET CONNECTION
DSL LINK
TYPE
MODE
ENCAPSULATION
CONNECTION SETTINGS
N/A
Routing
PPPoE
PPP information, IPv4/IPv6 IP address,
routing feature, DNS server, VLAN,
QoS, and MTU
IPoE
IPv4/IPv6 IP address, routing feature,
DNS server, VLAN, QoS, and MTU
Bridge
N/A
VLAN and QoS
Routing
PPPoE/PPP0A
ATM PVC configuration, PPP
information, IPv4/IPv6 IP address,
routing feature, DNS server, VLAN,
QoS, and MTU
IPoE/IPoA
ATM PVC configuration, IPv4/IPv6 IP
address, routing feature, DNS server,
VLAN, QoS, and MTU
Bridge
N/A
ATM PVC configuration, and QoS
Routing
PPPoE
PPP user name and password, WAN
IPv4/IPv6 IP address, routing feature,
DNS server, VLAN, QoS, and MTU
IPoE
WAN IPv4/IPv6 IP address, NAT, DNS
server and routing feature
N/A
VLAN and QoS
EoA
N/A
Bridge
5.1.2 What You Need to Know
The following terms and concepts may help as you read this chapter.
Encapsulation Method
Encapsulation is used to include data from an upper layer protocol into a lower layer protocol. To set
up a WAN connection to the Internet, you need to use the same encapsulation method used by your
ISP (Internet Service Provider). If your ISP offers a dial-up Internet connection using PPPoE (PPP
over Ethernet), they should also provide a username and password (and service name) for user
authentication.
WAN IP Address
The WAN IP address is an IP address for the Device, which makes it accessible from an outside
network. It is used by the Device to communicate with other devices in other networks. It can be
static (fixed) or dynamically assigned by the ISP each time the Device tries to access the Internet.
If your ISP assigns you a static WAN IP address, they should also assign you the subnet mask and
DNS server IP address(es).
40
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
Chapter 5 Broadband
ATM
Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) is a WAN networking technology that provides high-speed data
transfer. ATM uses fixed-size packets of information called cells. With ATM, a high QoS (Quality of
Service) can be guaranteed. ATM uses a connection-oriented model and establishes a virtual circuit
(VC) between Finding Out More
PTM
Packet Transfer Mode (PTM) is packet-oriented and supported by the VDSL2 standard. In PTM,
packets are encapsulated directly in the High-level Data Link Control (HDLC) frames. It is designed
to provide a low-overhead, transparent way of transporting packets over DSL links, as an
alternative to ATM.
3G
3G (Third Generation) is a digital, packet-switched wireless technology. Bandwidth usage is
optimized as multiple users share the same channel and bandwidth is only allocated to users when
they send data. It allows fast transfer of voice and non-voice data and provides broadband Internet
access to mobile devices.
IPv6 Introduction
IPv6 (Internet Protocol version 6), is designed to enhance IP address size and features. The
increase in IPv6 address size to 128 bits (from the 32-bit IPv4 address) allows up to 3.4 x 1038 IP
addresses. The Device can use IPv4/IPv6 dual stack to connect to IPv4 and IPv6 networks, and
supports IPv6 rapid deployment (6RD).
IPv6 Addressing
The 128-bit IPv6 address is written as eight 16-bit hexadecimal blocks separated by colons (:). This
is an example IPv6 address 2001:0db8:1a2b:0015:0000:0000:1a2f:0000.
IPv6 addresses can be abbreviated in two ways:
• Leading zeros in a block can be omitted. So
2001:0db8:1a2b:0015:0000:0000:1a2f:0000 can be written as
2001:db8:1a2b:15:0:0:1a2f:0.
• Any number of consecutive blocks of zeros can be replaced by a double colon. A double
colon can only appear once in an IPv6 address. So
2001:0db8:0000:0000:1a2f:0000:0000:0015 can be written as
2001:0db8::1a2f:0000:0000:0015, 2001:0db8:0000:0000:1a2f::0015,
2001:db8::1a2f:0:0:15 or 2001:db8:0:0:1a2f::15.
IPv6 Prefix and Prefix Length
Similar to an IPv4 subnet mask, IPv6 uses an address prefix to represent the network address. An
IPv6 prefix length specifies how many most significant bits (start from the left) in the address
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
41
Chapter 5 Broadband
compose the network address. The prefix length is written as “/x” where x is a number. For
example,
2001:db8:1a2b:15::1a2f:0/32
means that the first 32 bits (2001:db8) is the subnet prefix.
IPv6 Subnet Masking
Both an IPv6 address and IPv6 subnet mask compose of 128-bit binary digits, which are divided
into eight 16-bit blocks and written in hexadecimal notation. Hexadecimal uses four bits for each
character (1 ~ 10, A ~ F). Each block’s 16 bits are then represented by four hexadecimal
characters. For example, FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FC00:0000:0000:0000.
5.1.3 Before You Begin
You need to know your Internet access settings such as encapsulation and WAN IP address. Get this
information from your ISP.
5.2 The Broadband Screen
Use this screen to change your Device’s Internet access settings. Click N e t w or k Se t t ing >
Br oa dba n d from the menu. The summary table shows you the configured WAN services
(connections) on the Device.
Figure 18 Network Setting > Broadband
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 6 Network Setting > Broadband
42
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Add new WAN
Interface
Click this button to create a new connection.
This is the index number of the entry.
Name
This is the service name of the connection.
Type
This shows whether it is an ATM, PTM, or Ethernet connection.
Mode
This shows whether the connection is in routing or bridge mode.
Encapsulation
This is the method of encapsulation used by this connection.
802.1p
This indicates the 802.1p priority level assigned to traffic sent through this connection. This
displays N / A when there is no priority level assigned.
802.1q
This indicates the VLAN ID number assigned to traffic sent through this connection. This
displays N / A when there is no VLAN ID number assigned.
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
Chapter 5 Broadband
Table 6 Network Setting > Broadband (continued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
IGMP Proxy
This shows whether the Device act as an IGMP proxy on this connection.
NAT
This shows whether NAT is activated or not for this connection.
Default
Gateway
This shows whether the Device use the WAN interface of this connection as the system
default gateway.
IPv6
This shows whether IPv6 is activated or not for this connection. IPv6 is not available when
the connection uses the bridging service.
MLD Proxy
This shows whether Multicast Listener Discovery (MLD) is activated or not for this
connection. MLD is not available when the connection uses the bridging service.
Modify/Delete
Click the Edit icon to configure the WAN connection.
Click the D e le t e icon to remove the WAN connection.
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
43
Chapter 5 Broadband
5.2.1 Add/Edit Internet Connection
Click Add ne w W AN I n t e r fa ce in the Br oa dba nd screen or the Edit icon next to an existing WAN
interface to configure a WAN connection. The screen varies depending on the interface type, mode,
encapsulation, and IPv6/IPv4 mode you select.
5.2.1.1 Routing Mode
Use Rout ing mode if your ISP give you one IP address only and you want multiple computers to
share an Internet account.
The following example screen displays when you select the AD SL ove r ATM connection type,
Rou t in g mode, and PPPoE encapsulation. The screen varies when you select other interface type,
encapsulation, and IPv6/IPv4 mode.
Figure 19 Routing Mode
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 7 Routing Mode
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
General
44
Active
Select this to activate the WAN configuration settings.
Name
Specify a descriptive name for this connection.
Type
Select whether it is an ADSL/VDSL over PTM, ADSL over ATM connection or Ethernet.
Mode
Select Rou t in g if your ISP give you one IP address only and you want multiple computers to
share an Internet account.
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
Chapter 5 Broadband
Table 7 Routing Mode (continued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Encapsulation
Select the method of encapsulation used by your ISP from the drop-down list box. This
option is available only when you select Rou t in g in the M ode field.
The choices depend on the connection type you selected. If your connection type is AD SL/
V D SL ove r PTM , the choices are PPPoE and I PoE. If your connection type is AD SL ove r
ATM , the choices are PPPoE, PPPoA, I PoE and I PoA.
IPv6/IPv4 Mode Select I Pv4 On ly if you want the Device to run IPv4 only.
Select I Pv6 / I Pv4 D u a lSt a ck to allow the Device to run IPv4 and IPv6 at the same time.
Select I Pv6 On ly if you want the Device to run IPv6 only.
ATM PVC Configuration (These fields appear when the Type is set to AD SL ove r ATM .)
VPI
The valid range for the VPI is 0 to 255. Enter the VPI assigned to you.
VCI
The valid range for the VCI is 32 to 65535 (0 to 31 is reserved for local management of ATM
traffic). Enter the VCI assigned to you.
DSL Link Type
This field is not editable. The selection depends on the setting in the En ca psula t ion field.
EoA (Ethernet over ATM) uses an Ethernet header in the packet, so that you can have
multiple services/connections over one PVC. You can set each connection to have its own
MAC address or all connections share one MAC address but use different VLAN IDs for
different services. EoA supports ENET ENCAP (IPoE), PPPoE and RFC1483/2684 bridging
encapsulation methods.
PPPoA (PPP over ATM) allows just one PPPoA connection over a PVC.
I PoA (IP over ATM) allows just one RFC 1483 routing connection over a PVC.
Encapsulation
Mode
Select the method of multiplexing used by your ISP from the drop-down list box. Choices
are:
•
•
•
•
Service
Category
LLC/ SN AP- BRI D GI N G: In LCC encapsulation, bridged PDUs are encapsulated by
identifying the type of the bridged media in the SNAP header. This is available only when
you select I PoE or PPPoE in the Se le ct D SL Lin k Type field.
VC/ M UX: In VC multiplexing, each protocol is carried on a single ATM virtual circuit
(VC). To transport multiple protocols, the Device needs separate VCs. There is a binding
between a VC and the type of the network protocol carried on the VC. This reduces
payload overhead since there is no need to carry protocol information in each Protocol
Data Unit (PDU) payload.
LLC/ EN CAPSULATI ON : More than one protocol can be carried over the same VC. This
is available only when you select PPPoA in the En ca psu la t ion field.
LLC/ SN AP- ROUTI N G: In LCC encapsulation, an IEEE 802.2 Logical Link Control (LLC)
header is prefixed to each routed PDU to identify the PDUs. The LCC header can be
followed by an IEEE 802.1a SubNetwork Attachment Point (SNAP) header. This is
available only when you select I PoA in the En ca psu la t ion field.
Select UBR W it h ou t PCR or UBR W it h PCR for applications that are non-time sensitive,
such as e-mail.
Select CBR (Continuous Bit Rate) to specify fixed (always-on) bandwidth for voice or data
traffic.
Select N on Re a lt im e V BR (non real-time Variable Bit Rate) for connections that do not
require closely controlled delay and delay variation.
Select Re a lt im e VBR (real-time Variable Bit Rate) for applications with bursty connections
that require closely controlled delay and delay variation.
Peak Cell Rate
Divide the DSL line rate (bps) by 424 (the size of an ATM cell) to find the Peak Cell Rate
(PCR). This is the maximum rate at which the sender can send cells. Type the PCR here.This
field is not available when you select UBR W it h out PCR.
Sustainable
Cell Rate
The Sustainable Cell Rate (SCR) sets the average cell rate (long-term) that can be
transmitted. Type the SCR, which must be less than the PCR. Note that system default is 0
cells/sec.
This field is available only when you select N on Re a lt im e VBR or Re a lt im e VBR.
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
45
Chapter 5 Broadband
Table 7 Routing Mode (continued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Maximum Burst
Size
Maximum Burst Size (MBS) refers to the maximum number of cells that can be sent at the
peak rate. Type the MBS, which is less than 65535.
This field is available only when you select N on Re a lt im e VBR or Re a lt im e VBR.
PPP
Information
This is available only when you select PPPoE or PPPoA in the M ode field.
PPP User Name
Enter the user name exactly as your ISP assigned. If assigned a name in the form
user@domain where domain identifies a service name, then enter both components exactly
as given.
PPP Password
Enter the password associated with the user name above.
PPP Auto
Connect
Select this option if you do not want the connection to time out.
IDLE Timeout
This value specifies the time in minutes that elapses before the router automatically
disconnects from the PPPoE server.
This field is not configurable if you select PPP Au t o Con n e ct .
PPPoE Service
Name
Enter the name of your PPPoE service here.
PPPoE
Passthrough
This field is available when you select PPPoE encapsulation.
In addition to the Device’s built-in PPPoE client, you can enable PPPoE pass through to allow
up to ten hosts on the LAN to use PPPoE client software on their computers to connect to the
ISP via the Device. Each host can have a separate account and a public WAN IP address.
PPPoE pass through is an alternative to NAT for application where NAT is not appropriate.
Disable PPPoE pass through if you do not need to allow hosts on the LAN to use PPPoE client
software on their computers to connect to the ISP.
IP Address
This is available only when you select I Pv4 Only or I Pv6 / I Pv4 D u a lSt a ck in the I Pv6 /
I Pv4 M ode field.
Obtain an IP
Address
Automatically
A static IP address is a fixed IP that your ISP gives you. A dynamic IP address is not fixed;
the ISP assigns you a different one each time you connect to the Internet. Select this if you
have a dynamic IP address.
Static IP
Address
Select this option If the ISP assigned a fixed IP address.
IP Address
Enter the static IP address provided by your ISP.
Subnet
Mask
Enter the subnet mask provided by your ISP.
Gateway IP
Address
Enter the gateway IP address provided by your ISP.
Routing Feature This is available only when you select I Pv4 Only or I Pv6 / I Pv4 D u a lSt a ck in the I Pv6 /
I Pv4 M ode field.
NAT Enable
Select this option to activate NAT on this connection.
IGMP Proxy
Enable
Internet Group Multicast Protocol (IGMP) is a network-layer protocol used to establish
membership in a Multicast group - it is not used to carry user data.
Select this option to have the Device act as an IGMP proxy on this connection. This allows
the Device to get subscribing information and maintain a joined member list for each
multicast group. It can reduce multicast traffic significantly.
46
Apply as
Default
Gateway
Select this option to have the Device use the WAN interface of this connection as the system
default gateway.
DNS Server
This is available only when you select I Pv4 Only or I Pv6 / I Pv4 D u a lSt a ck in the I Pv6 /
I Pv4 M ode field.
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
Chapter 5 Broadband
Table 7 Routing Mode (continued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
DNS
Select D yna m ic if you want the Device use the DNS server addresses assigned by your ISP.
Select St a t ic if you want the Device use the DNS server addresses you configure manually.
DNS Server 1
Enter the first DNS server address assigned by the ISP.
DNS Server 2
Enter the second DNS server address assigned by the ISP.
WAN MAC Address
Factory
Default
Select Fa ct or y D e fa u lt to use the factory assigned default MAC address.
Clone the
computer’s
MAC
address
Select this option and enter the IP address of the computer on the LAN whose MAC you are
cloning. It is advisable to clone the MAC address from a computer on your LAN even if your
ISP does not presently require MAC address authentication.
Set WAN
MAC
Address
Select this option and enter the MAC address you want to use.
IPv6 Address
This is available only when you select I Pv6 / I Pv4 D u a lSt a ck or I Pv6 On ly in the I Pv6 /
I Pv4 M ode field.
IPv6 Address
Select Au t om a t ic if you want to have the Device use the IPv6 prefix from the connected
router’s Router Advertisement (RA) to generate an IPv6 address.
Select the Ge t I Pv6 Addr e ss Fr om D H CPv6 Se r ve r check box if you want to obtain an
IPv6 address from a DHCPv6 server. The IP address assigned by a DHCPv6 server has
priority over the IP address automatically generated by the Device using the IPv6 prefix
from an RA. This option is available only when you choose to get your IPv6 address
automatically.
Select St a t ic if you have a fixed IPv6 address assigned by your ISP.
Select N on e to not assign any IPv6 address to this WAN connection.
WAN IPv6
Address
Enter the IPv6 address assigned by your ISP.
Prefix
Length
Enter the address prefix length to specify how many most significant bits in an IPv6 address
compose the network address.
Next Hop
Enter the IP address of the next-hop gateway. The gateway is a router or switch on the
same segment as your Device's interface(s). The gateway helps forward packets to their
destinations.
IPv6 Routing
Feature
You can enable IPv6 routing features in the following section.
MLD Proxy
Enable
Select this check box to have the Device act as an MLD proxy on this connection. This allows
the Device to get subscription information and maintain a joined member list for each
multicast group. It can reduce multicast traffic significantly.
Apply as
Default
Gateway
Select this option to have the Device use the WAN interface of this connection as the system
default gateway.
IPv6 DNS
Server
Configure the IPv6 DNS server in the following section.
IPv6 DNS
Select D yn a m ic to have the Device get the IPv6 DNS server addresses from the ISP
automatically.
Select St a t ic to have the Device use the IPv6 DNS server addresses you configure
manually.
IPv6 DNS
Server 1
Enter the first IPv6 DNS server address assigned by the ISP.
IPv6 DNS
Server 2
Enter the second IPv6 DNS server address assigned by the ISP.
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
47
Chapter 5 Broadband
Table 7 Routing Mode (continued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
VLAN
These fields appear when the Type is set to AD SL/ V D SL ove r PTM .
Active
Select this option to add the VLAN tag (specified below) to the outgoing traffic through this
connection.
802.1p
IEEE 802.1p defines up to 8 separate traffic types by inserting a tag into a MAC-layer frame
that contains bits to define class of service.
Select the IEEE 802.1p priority level (from 0 to 7) to add to traffic through this connection.
The greater the number, the higher the priority level.
802.1q
Type the VLAN ID number (from 1 to 4094) for traffic through this connection.
QoS
Rate Limit
Enter the rate limit for the connection. This is the maximum transmission rate allowed for
traffic on this connection.
MTU
MTU Size
Enter the MTU (Maximum Transfer Unit) size for this traffic.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes back to the Device.
Cancel
Click Ca n ce l to exit this screen without saving.
5.2.1.2 Bridge Mode
Click the Add n e w W AN I n t e r fa ce in the N e t w or k Se t t ing > Br oa dba nd screen or the Edit icon
next to the connection you want to configure. Select Br idge as the encapsulation mode. The screen
varies depending on the interface type you select.
If you select AD SL/ VD SL ove r PTM as the interface type, the following screen appears.
Figure 20 Bridge Mode (ADSL/VDSL over PTM)
48
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
Chapter 5 Broadband
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 8 Bridge Mode (ADSL/VDSL over PTM)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
General
Active
Select this to activate the WAN configuration settings.
Name
Enter a service name of the connection.
Type
Select AD SL/ V D SL ove r PTM as the interface that you want to configure. The Device uses
the VDSL technology for data transmission over the DSL port.
Mode
Select Br idge when your ISP provides you more than one IP address and you want the
connected computers to get individual IP address from ISP’s DHCP server directly. If you
select Br idge , you cannot use routing functions, such as QoS, Firewall, DHCP server and
NAT on traffic from the selected LAN port(s).
VLAN
This section is available only when you select AD SL/ V D SL ove r PTM in the Type field.
Active
Select this to add the VLAN Tag (specified below) to the outgoing traffic through this
connection.
802.1p
IEEE 802.1p defines up to 8 separate traffic types by inserting a tag into a MAC-layer frame
that contains bits to define class of service.
Select the IEEE 802.1p priority level (from 0 to 7) to add to traffic through this connection.
The greater the number, the higher the priority level.
802.1q
Type the VLAN ID number (from 0 to 4094) for traffic through this connection.
QoS
Rate Limit
Enter the rate limit for the connection. This is the maximum transmission rate allowed for
traffic on this connection.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel
Click Ca n ce l to exit this screen without saving.
If you select AD SL ove r ATM as the interface type, the following screen appears.
Figure 21 Bridge Mode (ADSL over ATM)
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
49
Chapter 5 Broadband
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 9 Bridge Mode (ADSL over ATM)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
General
Active
Select this to activate the WAN configuration settings.
Name
Enter a service name of the connection.
Type
Select AD SL ove r ATM as the interface for which you want to configure here. The Device
uses the ADSL technology for data transmission over the DSL port.
Mode
Select Br idge when your ISP provides you more than one IP address and you want the
connected computers to get individual IP address from ISP’s DHCP server directly. If you
select Br idge , you cannot use routing functions, such as QoS, Firewall, DHCP server and
NAT on traffic from the selected LAN port(s).
ATM PVC Configuration (These fields appear when the Type is set to AD SL ove r ATM .)
VPI
The valid range for the VPI is 0 to 255. Enter the VPI assigned to you.
VCI
The valid range for the VCI is 32 to 65535 (0 to 31 is reserved for local management of ATM
traffic). Enter the VCI assigned to you.
DSL Link Type
This field is not editable. The selection depends on the setting in the En ca psu la t ion field.
EoA (Ethernet over ATM) uses an Ethernet header in the packet, so that you can have
multiple services/connections over one PVC. You can set each connection to have its own
MAC address or all connections share one MAC address but use different VLAN IDs for
different services. EoA supports ENET ENCAP (IPoE), PPPoE and RFC1483/2684 bridging
encapsulation methods.
PPPoA (PPP over ATM) allows just one PPPoA connection over a PVC.
I PoA (IP over ATM) allows just one RFC 1483 routing connection over a PVC.
Encapsulation
Mode
Select the method of multiplexing used by your ISP from the drop-down list box. Choices
are:
•
•
•
•
Service
Category
LLC/ SN AP- BRI D GI N G: In LCC encapsulation, bridged PDUs are encapsulated by
identifying the type of the bridged media in the SNAP header. This is available only when
you select I PoE or PPPoE in the Select DSL Link Type field.
V C/ M UX: In VC multiplexing, each protocol is carried on a single ATM virtual circuit
(VC). To transport multiple protocols, the Device needs separate VCs. There is a binding
between a VC and the type of the network protocol carried on the VC. This reduces
payload overhead since there is no need to carry protocol information in each Protocol
Data Unit (PDU) payload.
LLC/ EN CAPSULATI ON : More than one protocol can be carried over the same VC. This
is available only when you select PPPoA in the En ca psu la t ion field.
LLC/ SN AP- ROUTI N G: In LCC encapsulation, an IEEE 802.2 Logical Link Control (LLC)
header is prefixed to each routed PDU to identify the PDUs. The LCC header can be
followed by an IEEE 802.1a SubNetwork Attachment Point (SNAP) header. This is
available only when you select I PoA in the En ca psu la t ion field.
Select UBR W it hou t PCR or UBR W it h PCR for applications that are non-time sensitive,
such as e-mail.
Select CBR (Continuous Bit Rate) to specify fixed (always-on) bandwidth for voice or data
traffic.
Select N on Re a lt im e VBR (non real-time Variable Bit Rate) for connections that do not
require closely controlled delay and delay variation.
Select Re a lt im e V BR (real-time Variable Bit Rate) for applications with bursty connections
that require closely controlled delay and delay variation.
Peak Cell Rate
50
Divide the DSL line rate (bps) by 424 (the size of an ATM cell) to find the Peak Cell Rate
(PCR). This is the maximum rate at which the sender can send cells. Type the PCR here.This
field is not available when you select UBR W it h ou t PCR.
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
Chapter 5 Broadband
Table 9 Bridge Mode (ADSL over ATM) (continued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Sustainable Cell
Rate
The Sustainable Cell Rate (SCR) sets the average cell rate (long-term) that can be
transmitted. Type the SCR, which must be less than the PCR. Note that system default is 0
cells/sec.
This field is available only when you select N on Re a lt im e VBR or Re a lt im e VBR.
Maximum Burst
Size
Maximum Burst Size (MBS) refers to the maximum number of cells that can be sent at the
peak rate. Type the MBS, which is less than 65535.
This field is available only when you select N on Re a lt im e VBR or Re a lt im e VBR.
QoS
Rate Limit
Enter the rate limit for the connection. This is the maximum transmission rate allowed for
traffic on this connection.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel
Click Ca n ce l to exit this screen without saving.
5.3 The 3G Backup Screen
Use this screen to configure your 3G settings. Click N e t w or k Se t t in g > Br oa dba n d > 3 G
Ba ck up.
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
51
Chapter 5 Broadband
Note: The actual data rate you obtain varies depending the 3G card you use, the signal
strength to the service provider’s base station, and so on.
Figure 22 Network Setting > Broadband > 3G Backup
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 10 Network Setting > Broadband > 3G Backup
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
General
3G Backup
Select En a ble to have the Device use the 3G connection as your WAN or a backup when the
wired WAN connection fails.
Ping Check
Select En a ble if you want the Device to ping check the connection status of your WAN. You
can configure the frequency of the ping check and number of consecutive failures before
triggering 3G backup.
Check Cycle
Enter the frequency of the ping check in this field.
Consecutive
Fail
Enter how many consecutive failures are required before 3G backup is triggered.
Ping Default
Gateway
Select this to have the Device ping the WAN interface’s default gateway IP address.
Ping the Host
Select this to have the Device ping the particular host name or IP address you typed in this
field.
3G Connection Settings
Card
description
52
This field displays the manufacturer and model name of your 3G card if you inserted one in
the Device. Otherwise, it displays N / A.
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
Chapter 5 Broadband
Table 10 Network Setting > Broadband > 3G Backup (continued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Username
Type the user name (of up to 64 ASCII printable characters) given to you by your service
provider.
Password
Type the password (of up to 64 ASCII printable characters) associated with the user name
above.
PIN
A PIN (Personal Identification Number) code is a key to a 3G card. Without the PIN code,
you cannot use the 3G card.
If your ISP enabled PIN code authentication, enter the 4-digit PIN code (0000 for example)
provided by your ISP. If you enter the PIN code incorrectly, the 3G card may be blocked by
your ISP and you cannot use the account to access the Internet.
If your ISP disabled PIN code authentication, leave this field blank.
Dial string
Enter the phone number (dial string) used to dial up a connection to your service provider’s
base station. Your ISP should provide the phone number.
APN
Enter the APN (Access Point Name) provided by your service provider. Connections with
different APNs may provide different services (such as Internet access or MMS (Multi-Media
Messaging Service)) and charge method.
For example, *99# is the dial string to establish a GPRS or 3G connection in Taiwan.
You can enter up to 32 ASCII printable characters. Spaces are allowed.
Connection
Select N a ile d UP if you do not want the connection to time out.
Select on D e m a n d if you do not want the connection up all the time and specify an idle
time-out in the M a x I dle Tim e ou t field.
Max Idle
Timeout
This value specifies the time in minutes that elapses before the Device automatically
disconnects from the ISP.
Obtain an IP
Address
Automatically
Select this option If your ISP did not assign you a fixed IP address.
Use the
following static
IP address
Select this option If the ISP assigned a fixed IP address.
IP Address
Enter your WAN IP address in this field if you selected Use t h e follow ing st a t ic I P
a ddr e ss.
Obtain DNS
info
dynamically
Select this to have the Device get the DNS server addresses from the ISP automatically.
Use the
following static
DNS IP address
Select this to have the Device use the DNS server addresses you configure manually.
Primary DNS
server
Enter the first DNS server address assigned by the ISP.
Secondary DNS
server
Enter the second DNS server address assigned by the ISP.
Advanced
Click this to show the advanced 3G backup settings.
Budget Setup
Enable Budget
Control
Select En a ble to set a monthly limit for the user account of the installed 3G card. You can
set a limit on the total traffic and/or call time. The Device takes the actions you specified
when a limit is exceeded during the month.
Time Budget
Select this and specify the amount of time (in hours) that the 3G connection can be used
within one month. If you change the value after you configure and enable budget control,
the Device resets the statistics.
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
53
Chapter 5 Broadband
Table 10 Network Setting > Broadband > 3G Backup (continued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Data Budget
(Mbytes)
Select this and specify how much downstream and/or upstream data (in Mega bytes) can be
transmitted via the 3G connection within one month.
Select D ow n loa d/ Uploa d to set a limit on the total traffic in both directions.
Select D ow n loa d to set a limit on the downstream traffic (from the ISP to the Device).
Select Uploa d to set a limit on the upstream traffic (from the Device to the ISP).
If you change the value after you configure and enable budget control, the Device resets the
statistics.
Data Budget
(kPackets)
Select this and specify how much downstream and/or upstream data (in k Packets) can be
transmitted via the 3G connection within one month.
Select D ow n loa d/ Uploa d to set a limit on the total traffic in both directions.
Select D ow n loa d to set a limit on the downstream traffic (from the ISP to the Device).
Select Uploa d to set a limit on the upstream traffic (from the Device to the ISP).
If you change the value after you configure and enable budget control, the Device resets the
statistics.
Reset all
budget
counters on
Select the date on which the Device resets the budget every month. Select la st if you want
the Device to reset the budget on the last day of the month. Select spe cific and enter the
number of the date you want the Device to reset the budget
Reset time and
data budget
counters
Click this button to reset the time and data budgets immediately. The count starts over with
the 3G connection’s full configured monthly time and data budgets. This does not affect the
normal monthly budget restart; so if you configured the time and data budget counters to
reset on the second day of the month and you use this button on the first, the time and data
budget counters will still reset on the second.
Actions before
over budget
Specify the actions the Device takes before the time or data limit exceeds.
Enable % of
time budget/
data budget
(Mbytes)/data
budget
(kPackets)
Select En a ble and enter a number from 1 to 99 in the percentage fields. If you change the
value after you configure and enable budget control, the Device resets the statistics.
Actions when
over budget
Specify the actions the Device takes when the time or data limit is exceeded.
Current 3G
connection
Select Ke e p to maintain an existing 3G connection or D r op to disconnect it.
Enable Email
Notification
Select this to enable the e-mail notification function. The Device will e-mail you a
notification when there over budget occurs.
Mail Server
Select a mail server for the e-mail address specified below.
If you do not select a mail server, e-mail notifications cannot be sent via e-mail. You must
have configured a mail server already in the M a in t e n a n ce > Em a il N ot ifica t ion screen.
54
Over Budget
Email Title
Type a title that you want to be in the subject line of the e-mail notifications that the Device
sends.
Send
Notification to
Email
Notifications are sent to the e-mail address specified in this field. If this field is left blank,
notifications cannot be sent via e-mail.
Interval
Enter the interval of how many minutes you want the Device to e-mail you.
Enable Log
Select this to activate the logging function at the interval you set in this field.
Basic
Click this to hide the advanced settings of 3G backup.
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
Chapter 5 Broadband
Table 10 Network Setting > Broadband > 3G Backup (continued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes back to the Device.
Cancel
Click Ca nce l to return to the previous configuration.
5.4 The Advanced Screen
Use the Adva nce d screen to enable or disable PTM over ADSL, Annex M, and DSL PhyR functions.
The Device supports the PhyR retransmission scheme. PhyR is a retransmission scheme designed to
provide protection against noise on the DSL line. It improves voice, video and data transmission
resilience by utilizing a retransmission buffer.
Click N e t w or k Se t t in g > Br oa dba nd > Adva nce d to display the following screen.
Figure 23 Network Setting > Broadband > Advanced
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 11 Network Setting > Network Setting > Broadband
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
PTM over ADSL
Select En a ble to use PTM over ADSL. Since PTM has less overhead than ATM, some ISPs
use PTM over ADSL for better performance.
Annex M
You can enable An n e x M for the Device to use double upstream mode to increase the
maximum upstream transfer rate.
PhyR US
Enable or disable Ph yR US (upstream) for upstream transmission to the WAN. PhyR US
should be enabled if data being transmitted upstream is sensitive to noise. However,
enabling PhyR US can decrease the US line rate. Enabling or disabling PhyR will require the
CPE to retrain. For PhyR to function, the DSLAM must also support PhyR and have it
enabled.
PhyR DS
Enable or disable Ph yR D S (downstream) for downstream transmission from the WAN.
PhyR DS should be enabled if data being transmitted downstream is sensitive to noise.
However, enabling PhyR DS can decrease the DS line rate. Enabling or disabling PhyR will
require the CPE to retrain. For PhyR to function, the DSLAM must also support PhyR and
have it enabled.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes back to the Device.
Cancel
Click Ca nce l to return to the previous configuration.
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
55
Chapter 5 Broadband
5.5 The 8021x Screen
You can view and configure the 802.1X authentication settings in the 8 0 2 1 x screen. Click N e t w or k
Se t t in g > Br oa dba n d > 8 0 2 1 x to display the following screen.
Figure 24 Network Setting > Broadband > 8021x
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 12 Network Setting > Network Setting > 8021x
56
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
This is the index number of the entry.
Status
This field displays whether the authentication is active or not. A yellow bulb signifies that
this authentication is active. A gray bulb signifies that this authentication is not active.
Interface
This is the interface that uses the authentication. This displays N / A when there is no
interface assigned.
EAP Identity
This shows the EAP identity of the authentication. This displays N / A when there is no EAP
identity assigned.
EAP method
This shows the EAP method used in the authentication. This displays N / A when there is no
EAP method assigned.
Bidirectional
Authentication
This shows whether bidirectional authentication is allowed.
Certificate
This shows the certificate used for this authentication. This displays N / A when there is no
certificate assigned.
Trusted CA
This shows the Trusted CA used for this authentication. This displays N / A when there is no
Trusted CA assigned.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes back to the Device.
Cancel
Click Ca nce l to return to the previous configuration.
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
Chapter 5 Broadband
5.5.1 Edit 802.1X Settings
Use this screen to edit 802.1X authentication settings. Click the Edit icon next to the rule you want
to edit. The screen shown next appears.
Figure 25 802.1x: Add/Edit
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 13 802.1x: Add/Edit
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Active
This field allows you to activate/deactivate the authentication.
Select this to enable the authentication. Clear this to disable this authentication without
having to delete the entry.
Interface
This field displays where there is an interface available to select for the 802.1X
authentication settings. Select the interface to which to apply the 802.1X authentication
settings.
EAP Identity
Enter the EAP identity of the authentication.
EAP method
This is the EAP method used for this authentication.
Enable
Bidirectional
Authentication
Select this to allow bidirectional authentication.
Certificate
Select the certificate you want to assign to the authentication. You need to import the
certificate in the Se cu r it y > Ce r t ifica t e s > Loca l Ce r t ifica t e s screen.
Trusted CA
Select the Trusted CA you want to assign to the authentication. You need to import the
certificate in the Se cu r it y > Ce r t ifica t e s > Tr u st e d CA screen.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel
Click Ca n ce l to exit this screen without saving.
5.6 The Ethernet WAN Screen
If you are using an ethernet WAN connection, you can configure a LAN port as an ethernet WAN
port. Click N e t w or k Se t t in g > Br oa dba n d > Et he r ne t W AN to open this screen.
Note: LAN port 4 can operate as an Ethernet WAN port.
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
57
Chapter 5 Broadband
Figure 26 Network Setting > Broadband > Ethernet WAN
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 14 Network Setting > Broadband > Ethernet WAN
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
State
Select En a ble to use the Ethernet LAN port as a WAN port on the Device.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes back to the Device.
Cancel
Click Ca n ce l to exit this screen without saving.
5.7 Technical Reference
The following section contains additional technical information about the Device features described
in this chapter.
Encapsulation
Be sure to use the encapsulation method required by your ISP. The Device can work in bridge mode
or routing mode. When the Device is in routing mode, it supports the following methods.
IP over Ethernet
IP over Ethernet (IPoE) is an alternative to PPPoE. IP packets are being delivered across an
Ethernet network, without using PPP encapsulation. They are routed between the Ethernet interface
and the WAN interface and then formatted so that they can be understood in a bridged
environment. For instance, it encapsulates routed Ethernet frames into bridged Ethernet cells.
PPP over ATM (PPPoA)
PPPoA stands for Point to Point Protocol over ATM Adaptation Layer 5 (AAL5). A PPPoA connection
functions like a dial-up Internet connection. The Device encapsulates the PPP session based on
RFC1483 and sends it through an ATM PVC (Permanent Virtual Circuit) to the Internet Service
Provider’s (ISP) DSLAM (digital access multiplexer). Please refer to RFC 2364 for more information
on PPPoA. Refer to RFC 1661 for more information on PPP.
58
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
Chapter 5 Broadband
PPP over Ethernet (PPPoE)
Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet (PPPoE) provides access control and billing functionality in a
manner similar to dial-up services using PPP. PPPoE is an IETF standard (RFC 2516) specifying how
a personal computer (PC) interacts with a broadband modem (DSL, cable, wireless, etc.)
connection.
For the service provider, PPPoE offers an access and authentication method that works with existing
access control systems (for example RADIUS).
One of the benefits of PPPoE is the ability to let you access one of multiple network services, a
function known as dynamic service selection. This enables the service provider to easily create and
offer new IP services for individuals.
Operationally, PPPoE saves significant effort for both you and the ISP or carrier, as it requires no
specific configuration of the broadband modem at the customer site.
By implementing PPPoE directly on the Device (rather than individual computers), the computers on
the LAN do not need PPPoE software installed, since the Device does that part of the task.
Furthermore, with NAT, all of the LANs’ computers will have access.
RFC 1483
RFC 1483 describes two methods for Multiprotocol Encapsulation over ATM Adaptation Layer 5
(AAL5). The first method allows multiplexing of multiple protocols over a single ATM virtual circuit
(LLC-based multiplexing) and the second method assumes that each protocol is carried over a
separate ATM virtual circuit (VC-based multiplexing). Please refer to RFC 1483 for more detailed
information.
Multiplexing
There are two conventions to identify what protocols the virtual circuit (VC) is carrying. Be sure to
use the multiplexing method required by your ISP.
VC-based Multiplexing
In this case, by prior mutual agreement, each protocol is assigned to a specific virtual circuit; for
example, VC1 carries IP, etc. VC-based multiplexing may be dominant in environments where
dynamic creation of large numbers of ATM VCs is fast and economical.
LLC-based Multiplexing
In this case one VC carries multiple protocols with protocol identifying information being contained
in each packet header. Despite the extra bandwidth and processing overhead, this method may be
advantageous if it is not practical to have a separate VC for each carried protocol, for example, if
charging heavily depends on the number of simultaneous VCs.
Traffic Shaping
Traffic Shaping is an agreement between the carrier and the subscriber to regulate the average rate
and fluctuations of data transmission over an ATM network. This agreement helps eliminate
congestion, which is important for transmission of real time data such as audio and video
connections.
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
59
Chapter 5 Broadband
Peak Cell Rate (PCR) is the maximum rate at which the sender can send cells. This parameter may
be lower (but not higher) than the maximum line speed. 1 ATM cell is 53 bytes (424 bits), so a
maximum speed of 832Kbps gives a maximum PCR of 1962 cells/sec. This rate is not guaranteed
because it is dependent on the line speed.
Sustained Cell Rate (SCR) is the mean cell rate of each bursty traffic source. It specifies the
maximum average rate at which cells can be sent over the virtual connection. SCR may not be
greater than the PCR.
Maximum Burst Size (MBS) is the maximum number of cells that can be sent at the PCR. After MBS
is reached, cell rates fall below SCR until cell rate averages to the SCR again. At this time, more
cells (up to the MBS) can be sent at the PCR again.
If the PCR, SCR or MBS is set to the default of "0", the system will assign a maximum value that
correlates to your upstream line rate.
The following figure illustrates the relationship between PCR, SCR and MBS.
Figure 27 Example of Traffic Shaping
ATM Traffic Classes
These are the basic ATM traffic classes defined by the ATM Forum Traffic Management 4.0
Specification.
Constant Bit Rate (CBR)
Constant Bit Rate (CBR) provides fixed bandwidth that is always available even if no data is being
sent. CBR traffic is generally time-sensitive (doesn't tolerate delay). CBR is used for connections
that continuously require a specific amount of bandwidth. A PCR is specified and if traffic exceeds
this rate, cells may be dropped. Examples of connections that need CBR would be high-resolution
video and voice.
Variable Bit Rate (VBR)
The Variable Bit Rate (VBR) ATM traffic class is used with bursty connections. Connections that use
the Variable Bit Rate (VBR) traffic class can be grouped into real time (VBR-RT) or non-real time
(VBR-nRT) connections.
The VBR-RT (real-time Variable Bit Rate) type is used with bursty connections that require closely
controlled delay and delay variation. It also provides a fixed amount of bandwidth (a PCR is
60
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
Chapter 5 Broadband
specified) but is only available when data is being sent. An example of an VBR-RT connection would
be video conferencing. Video conferencing requires real-time data transfers and the bandwidth
requirement varies in proportion to the video image's changing dynamics.
The VBR-nRT (non real-time Variable Bit Rate) type is used with bursty connections that do not
require closely controlled delay and delay variation. It is commonly used for "bursty" traffic typical
on LANs. PCR and MBS define the burst levels, SCR defines the minimum level. An example of an
VBR-nRT connection would be non-time sensitive data file transfers.
Unspecified Bit Rate (UBR)
The Unspecified Bit Rate (UBR) ATM traffic class is for bursty data transfers. However, UBR doesn't
guarantee any bandwidth and only delivers traffic when the network has spare bandwidth. An
example application is background file transfer.
IP Address Assignment
A static IP is a fixed IP that your ISP gives you. A dynamic IP is not fixed; the ISP assigns you a
different one each time. The Single User Account feature can be enabled or disabled if you have
either a dynamic or static IP. However the encapsulation method assigned influences your choices
for IP address and default gateway.
Introduction to VLANs
A Virtual Local Area Network (VLAN) allows a physical network to be partitioned into multiple logical
networks. Devices on a logical network belong to one group. A device can belong to more than one
group. With VLAN, a device cannot directly talk to or hear from devices that are not in the same
group(s); the traffic must first go through a router.
In Multi-Tenant Unit (MTU) applications, VLAN is vital in providing isolation and security among the
subscribers. When properly configured, VLAN prevents one subscriber from accessing the network
resources of another on the same LAN, thus a user will not see the printers and hard disks of
another user in the same building.
VLAN also increases network performance by limiting broadcasts to a smaller and more
manageable logical broadcast domain. In traditional switched environments, all broadcast packets
go to each and every individual port. With VLAN, all broadcasts are confined to a specific broadcast
domain.
Introduction to IEEE 802.1Q Tagged VLAN
A tagged VLAN uses an explicit tag (VLAN ID) in the MAC header to identify the VLAN membership
of a frame across bridges - they are not confined to the switch on which they were created. The
VLANs can be created statically by hand or dynamically through GVRP. The VLAN ID associates a
frame with a specific VLAN and provides the information that switches need to process the frame
across the network. A tagged frame is four bytes longer than an untagged frame and contains two
bytes of TPID (Tag Protocol Identifier), residing within the type/length field of the Ethernet frame)
and two bytes of TCI (Tag Control Information), starts after the source address field of the Ethernet
frame).
The CFI (Canonical Format Indicator) is a single-bit flag, always set to zero for Ethernet switches. If
a frame received at an Ethernet port has a CFI set to 1, then that frame should not be forwarded as
it is to an untagged port. The remaining twelve bits define the VLAN ID, giving a possible maximum
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
61
Chapter 5 Broadband
number of 4,096 VLANs. Note that user priority and VLAN ID are independent of each other. A
frame with VID (VLAN Identifier) of null (0) is called a priority frame, meaning that only the priority
level is significant and the default VID of the ingress port is given as the VID of the frame. Of the
4096 possible VIDs, a VID of 0 is used to identify priority frames and value 4095 (FFF) is reserved,
so the maximum possible VLAN configurations are 4,094.
TPID
User Priority
CFI
VLAN ID
2 Bytes
3 Bits
1 Bit
12 Bits
Multicast
IP packets are transmitted in either one of two ways - Unicast (1 sender - 1 recipient) or Broadcast
(1 sender - everybody on the network). Multicast delivers IP packets to a group of hosts on the
network - not everybody and not just 1.
Internet Group Multicast Protocol (IGMP) is a network-layer protocol used to establish membership
in a Multicast group - it is not used to carry user data. IGMP version 2 (RFC 2236) is an
improvement over version 1 (RFC 1112) but IGMP version 1 is still in wide use. If you would like to
read more detailed information about interoperability between IGMP version 2 and version 1, please
see sections 4 and 5 of RFC 2236. The class D IP address is used to identify host groups and can be
in the range 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255. The address 224.0.0.0 is not assigned to any group
and is used by IP multicast computers. The address 224.0.0.1 is used for query messages and is
assigned to the permanent group of all IP hosts (including gateways). All hosts must join the
224.0.0.1 group in order to participate in IGMP. The address 224.0.0.2 is assigned to the multicast
routers group.
At start up, the Device queries all directly connected networks to gather group membership. After
that, the Device periodically updates this information.
DNS Server Address Assignment
Use Domain Name System (DNS) to map a domain name to its corresponding IP address and vice
versa, for instance, the IP address of www.zyxel.com is 204.217.0.2. The DNS server is extremely
important because without it, you must know the IP address of a computer before you can access
it.
The Device can get the DNS server addresses in the following ways.
The ISP tells you the DNS server addresses, usually in the form of an information sheet, when you
sign up. If your ISP gives you DNS server addresses, manually enter them in the DNS server fields.
If your ISP dynamically assigns the DNS server IP addresses (along with the Device’s WAN IP
address), set the DNS server fields to get the DNS server address from the ISP.
IPv6 Addressing
The 128-bit IPv6 address is written as eight 16-bit hexadecimal blocks separated by colons (:). This
is an example IPv6 address 2001:0db8:1a2b:0015:0000:0000:1a2f:0000.
IPv6 addresses can be abbreviated in two ways:
62
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
Chapter 5 Broadband
• Leading zeros in a block can be omitted. So 2001:0db8:1a2b:0015:0000:0000:1a2f:0000 can
be written as 2001:db8:1a2b:15:0:0:1a2f:0.
• Any number of consecutive blocks of zeros can be replaced by a double colon. A double colon can
only appear once in an IPv6 address. So 2001:0db8:0000:0000:1a2f:0000:0000:0015 can be
written as 2001:0db8::1a2f:0000:0000:0015, 2001:0db8:0000:0000:1a2f::0015,
2001:db8::1a2f:0:0:15 or 2001:db8:0:0:1a2f::15.
IPv6 Prefix and Prefix Length
Similar to an IPv4 subnet mask, IPv6 uses an address prefix to represent the network address. An
IPv6 prefix length specifies how many most significant bits (start from the left) in the address
compose the network address. The prefix length is written as “/x” where x is a number. For
example,
2001:db8:1a2b:15::1a2f:0/32
means that the first 32 bits (2001:db8) is the subnet prefix.
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
63
Chapter 5 Broadband
64
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
C HAPT ER
Wireless
6.1 Overview
This chapter describes the Device’s N e t w or k Se t t ing > W ir e le ss screens. Use these screens to
set up your Device’s wireless connection.
6.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
This section describes the Device’s W ir e le ss screens. Use these screens to set up your Device’s
wireless connection.
• Use the Ge n e r a l screen to enable the Wireless LAN, enter the SSID and select the wireless
security mode (Section 6.2 on page 66).
• Use the M or e AP screen to set up multiple wireless networks on your Device (Section 6.3 on
page 75).
• Use the M AC Aut he nt ica t ion screen to allow or deny wireless clients based on their MAC
addresses from connecting to the Device (Section 6.4 on page 78).
• Use the W PS screen to enable or disable WPS, view or generate a security PIN (Personal
Identification Number) (Section 6.5 on page 79).
• Use the W M M screen to enable Wi-Fi MultiMedia (WMM) to ensure quality of service in wireless
networks for multimedia applications (Section 6.6 on page 81).
• Use the W D S screen to set up a Wireless Distribution System, in which the Device acts as a
bridge with other ZyXEL access points (Section 6.7 on page 82).
• Use the Ot h e r s screen to configure wireless advanced features, such as the RTS/CTS Threshold
(Section 6.8 on page 84).
• Use the Cha nn e l St a t us screen to scan wireless LAN channel noises and view the results
(Section 6.9 on page 86).
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
65
Chapter 6 Wireless
6.1.2 What You Need to Know
Wireless Basics
“Wireless” is essentially radio communication. In the same way that walkie-talkie radios send and
receive information over the airwaves, wireless networking devices exchange information with one
another. A wireless networking device is just like a radio that lets your computer exchange
information with radios attached to other computers. Like walkie-talkies, most wireless networking
devices operate at radio frequency bands that are open to the public and do not require a license to
use. However, wireless networking is different from that of most traditional radio communications in
that there a number of wireless networking standards available with different methods of data
encryption.
Finding Out More
See Section 6.10 on page 86 for advanced technical information on wireless networks.
6.2 The General Screen
Use this screen to enable the Wireless LAN, enter the SSID and select the wireless security mode.
Note: If you are configuring the Device from a computer connected to the wireless LAN
and you change the Device’s SSID, channel or security settings, you will lose your
wireless connection when you press Apply to confirm. You must then change the
wireless settings of your computer to match the Device’s new settings.
66
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
Chapter 6 Wireless
Click N e t w or k Se t t in g > W ir e le ss to open the Ge ne r a l screen.
Figure 28 Network Setting > Wireless > General
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
67
Chapter 6 Wireless
The following table describes the general wireless LAN labels in this screen.
Table 15 Network Setting > Wireless > General
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Wireless Network Setup
Wireless
You can En a ble or D isa ble the wireless LAN in this field.
Band
This shows the wireless band which this radio profile is using. 2 .4 GH z is the frequency used
by IEEE 802.11b/g/n wireless clients.
Channel
Set the channel depending on your particular region.
Select a channel or use Au t o to have the Device automatically determine a channel to use.
If you are having problems with wireless interference, changing the channel may help. Try
to use a channel that is as many channels away from any channels used by neighboring APs
as possible. The channel number which the Device is currently using then displays next to
this field.
more.../less
Click m or e ... to show more information. Click le ss to hide them.
Bandwidth
Select whether the Device uses a wireless channel width of 2 0 M H z or 4 0 M H z , or use Au t o
to have the Device automatically select one.
A standard 20MHz channel offers transfer speeds of up to 150Mbps whereas a 40MHz
channel uses two standard channels and offers speeds of up to 300 Mbps.
40MHz (channel bonding or dual channel) bonds two adjacent radio channels to increase
throughput. The wireless clients must also support 40 MHz. It is often better to use the 20
MHz setting in a location where the environment hinders the wireless signal.
Select 2 0 M H z if you want to lessen radio interference with other wireless devices in your
neighborhood or the wireless clients do not support channel bonding.
Control
Sideband
This is available for some regions when you select a specific channel and set the Bandwidth
field to 4 0 M H z . Set whether the control channel (set in the Ch a n n e l field) should be in the
Low e r or Uppe r range of channel bands.
Passphrase
Type
If you set security for the wireless LAN and have the Device generate a password, the
setting in this field determines how the Device generates the password.
Select N on e to set the Device’s password generation to not be based on a passphrase.
Select Fix e d to use a 16 character passphrase for generating a password.
Select Va r ia ble to use a 16 to 63 character passphrase for generating a password.
Passphrase Key
For a fixed type passphrase enter 16 alphanumeric characters (0-9, A-Z, with no spaces). It
must contain both letters and numbers and is case-sensitive.
For a variable type passphrase enter 16 to 63 alphanumeric characters (0-9, A-Z, with no
spaces). It must contain both letters and numbers and is case-sensitive.
Wireless Network Settings
Wireless
Network Name
(SSID)
The SSID (Service Set IDentity) identifies the service set with which a wireless device is
associated. Wireless devices associating to the access point (AP) must have the same SSID.
Max clients
Specify the maximum number of clients that can connect to this network at the same time.
Hide SSID
Select this check box to hide the SSID in the outgoing beacon frame so a station cannot
obtain the SSID through scanning using a site survey tool.
Client Isolation
Select this to keep the wireless clients in this SSID from communicating with each other
through the Device.
MBSSID/LAN
Isolation
Select this to keep the wireless clients in this SSID from communicating with clients in other
SSIDs or wired LAN devices through the Device.
Enter a descriptive name (up to 32 English keyboard characters) for the wireless LAN.
Select both Clie n t I sola t ion and M BSSI D / LAN I sola t ion to allow this SSID’s wireless
clients to only connect to the Internet through the Device.
68
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
Chapter 6 Wireless
Table 15 Network Setting > Wireless > General (continued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Enhanced
Multicast
Forwarding
Select this check box to allow the Device to convert wireless multicast traffic into wireless
unicast traffic.
Maximum
Upstream
Bandwidth
Specify the maximum rate for upstream wireless traffic to the WAN from this WLAN in
kilobits per second (Kbps).
Maximum
Downstream
Bandwidth
Specify the maximum rate for downstream wireless traffic to this WLAN from the WAN in
kilobits per second (Kbps).
BSSID
This shows the MAC address of the wireless interface on the Device when wireless LAN is
enabled.
Security Level
Security Mode
Select Ba sic ( W EP, 8 0 2 .1 X) or M or e Se cur e ( W PA( 2 ) - PSK, W PA( 2 ) ) to add security
on this wireless network. The wireless clients which want to associate to this network must
have same wireless security settings as the Device. When you select to use a security,
additional options appears in this screen.
Or you can select N o Se cur it y to allow any client to associate this network without any data
encryption or authentication.
See the following sections for more details about this field.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel
Click Ca n ce l to restore your previously saved settings.
6.2.1 No Security
Select N o Se cur it y to allow wireless stations to communicate with the access points without any
data encryption or authentication.
Note: If you do not enable any wireless security on your Device, your network is
accessible to any wireless networking device that is within range.
Figure 29 Wireless > General: No Security
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 16 Wireless > General: No Security
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Security Level
Choose N o Se cur it y to allow all wireless connections without data encryption or
authentication.
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
69
Chapter 6 Wireless
6.2.2 Basic (WEP Encryption)
WEP encryption scrambles the data transmitted between the wireless stations and the access points
(AP) to keep network communications private. Both the wireless stations and the access points
must use the same WEP key.
Note: WEP is extremely insecure. Its encryption can be broken by an attacker, using
widely-available software. It is strongly recommended that you use a more
effective security mechanism. Use the strongest security mechanism that all the
wireless devices in your network support. For example, use WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK
if all your wireless devices support it, or use WPA or WPA2 if your wireless devices
support it and you have a RADIUS server. If your wireless devices support nothing
stronger than WEP, use the highest encryption level available.
Your Device allows you to configure up to four 64-bit or 128-bit WEP keys but only one key can be
enabled at any one time.
In order to configure and enable WEP encryption, click N e t w or k Se t t ing > W ir e le ss to display the
Ge ne r a l screen, then select Ba sic as the security level.
Figure 30 Wireless > General: Basic (WEP)
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 17 Wireless > General: Basic (WEP)
70
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Security Level
Select Ba sic to enable WEP data encryption.
Generate
password
automatically
Select this option to have the Device automatically generate a password. The password field
will not be configurable when you select this option.
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
Chapter 6 Wireless
Table 17 Wireless > General: Basic (WEP) (continued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Password 1~4
The password (WEP keys) are used to encrypt data. Both the Device and the wireless
stations must use the same password (WEP key) for data transmission.
If you chose 6 4 - bit WEP, then enter any 5 ASCII characters or 10 hexadecimal characters
("0-9", "A-F").
If you chose 1 2 8 - bit WEP, then enter 13 ASCII characters or 26 hexadecimal characters
("0-9", "A-F").
You must configure at least one password, only one password can be activated at any one
time.
more.../less
Click m or e ... to show more fields in this section. Click le ss to hide them.
WEP Encryption
Select 6 4 - bit s or 1 2 8 - bit s.
This dictates the length of the security key that the network is going to use.
6.2.3 Basic (802.1X)
Use this screen to configure 802.1X encryption and authentication. Configure your RADIUS server
information and WEP encryption settings. Use this security method if your wireless usernames and
passwords are configured on a RADIUS server.
In order to configure and enable WEP encryption, click N e t w or k Se t t ing > W ir e le ss to display the
Ge ne r a l screen, then select Ba sic as the security level and 8 0 2 .1 X as the Se cu r it y M ode .
Figure 31 Wireless > General: Basic (802.1X)
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
71
Chapter 6 Wireless
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 18 Wireless > General: Basic (802.1X)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Security Level
Select Ba sic and 8 0 2 .1 X to enable 802.1X data encryption.
Generate
password
automatically
Select this option to have the Device automatically generate a password. The password field
will not be configurable when you select this option.
Password 1~4
The password (WEP key) is used to encrypt data. Both the Device and the wireless stations
must use the same password (WEP key) for data transmission.
If you chose 6 4 - bit WEP, then enter any 5 ASCII characters or 10 hexadecimal characters
("0-9", "A-F").
If you chose 1 2 8 - bit WEP, then enter 13 ASCII characters or 26 hexadecimal characters
("0-9", "A-F").
You must configure at least one password, only one password can be activated at any one
time.
more.../less
Click m or e ... to show more fields in this section. Click le ss to hide them.
WEP Encryption
Select 6 4 - bit s or 1 2 8 - bit s.
This dictates the length of the security key that the network is going to use.
72
IP Address
Enter the IP address of an external RADIUS server in dotted decimal notation.
Port Number
The default port of a RADIUS server for authentication is 1812. You need not change this
value unless your network administrator instructs you to do so.
Shared Secret
Specify a password (up to 32 alphanumeric characters) as the key to be shared between the
external RADIUS server and the Device. This key is not sent over the network. This key
must be the same on the external RADIUS server and the Device.
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
Chapter 6 Wireless
6.2.4 More Secure (WPA(2)-PSK)
The WPA-PSK security mode provides both improved data encryption and user authentication over
WEP. Using a Pre-Shared Key (PSK), both the Device and the connecting client share a common
password in order to validate the connection. This type of encryption, while robust, is not as strong
as WPA, WPA2 or even WPA2-PSK. The WPA2-PSK security mode is a newer, more robust version of
the WPA encryption standard. It offers slightly better security, although the use of PSK makes it
less robust than it could be.
Click N e t w or k Se t t in g > W ir e le ss to display the Ge ne r a l screen. Select M or e Se cu r e as the
security level. Then select W PA- PSK or W PA2 - PSK from the Se cur it y M ode list.
Figure 32 Wireless > General: More Secure: WPA(2)-PSK
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 19 Wireless > General: More Secure: WPA(2)-PSK
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Security Level
Select M or e Se cu r e to enable WPA(2)-PSK data encryption.
Security Mode
Select W PA- PSK or W PA2 - PSK from the drop-down list box.
Generate
password
automatically
Select this option to have the Device automatically generate a password. The password field
will not be configurable when you select this option.
Password
The encryption mechanisms used for WPA(2) and WPA(2)-PSK are the same. The only
difference between the two is that WPA(2)-PSK uses a simple common password, instead of
user-specific credentials.
If you did not select Ge n e r a t e pa ssw or d a ut om a t ica lly, you can manually type a preshared key from 8 to 64 case-sensitive keyboard characters.
more.../less
Click m or e ... to show more fields in this section. Click le ss to hide them.
WPA-PSK
Compatible
This field appears when you choose W PA- PSK2 as the Se cu r it y M ode .
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
Check this field to allow wireless devices using W PA- PSK security mode to connect to your
Device. The Device supports WPA-PSK and WPA2-PSK simultaneously.
73
Chapter 6 Wireless
Table 19 Wireless > General: More Secure: WPA(2)-PSK (continued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Encryption
Select the encryption type (TKI P, AES or TKI P+ AES) for data encryption.
Select TKI P if your wireless clients can all use TKIP.
Select AES if your wireless clients can all use AES.
Select TKI P+ AES to allow the wireless clients to use either TKIP or AES.
Group Key
Update Timer
The Gr ou p Ke y Upda t e Tim e r is the rate at which the RADIUS server sends a new group
key out to all clients.
6.2.5 WPA(2) Authentication
The WPA2 security mode is currently the most robust form of encryption for wireless networks. It
requires a RADIUS server to authenticate user credentials and is a full implementation the security
protocol. Use this security option for maximum protection of your network. However, it is the least
backwards compatible with older devices.
The WPA security mode is a security subset of WPA2. It requires the presence of a RADIUS server
on your network in order to validate user credentials. This encryption standard is slightly older than
WPA2 and therefore is more compatible with older devices.
Click N e t w or k Se t t in g > W ir e le ss to display the Ge ne r a l screen. Select M or e Se cu r e as the
security level. Then select W PA or W PA2 from the Se cur it y M ode list.
Figure 33 Wireless > General: More Secure: WPA(2)
74
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
Chapter 6 Wireless
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 20 Wireless > General: More Secure: WPA(2)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Security Level
Select M or e Se cu r e to enable WPA(2)-PSK data encryption.
Security Mode
Choose W PA or W PA2 from the drop-down list box.
Authentication Server
IP Address
Enter the IP address of the external authentication server in dotted decimal notation.
Port
Number
Enter the port number of the external authentication server. The default port number is
1812.
You need not change this value unless your network administrator instructs you to do so
with additional information.
Shared
Secret
Enter a password (up to 31 alphanumeric characters) as the key to be shared between the
external authentication server and the Device.
The key must be the same on the external authentication server and your Device. The key is
not sent over the network.
more.../less
Click m or e ... to show more fields in this section. Click le ss to hide them.
WPA
Compatible
This field is only available for WPA2. Select this if you want the Device to support WPA and
WPA2 simultaneously.
Encryption
Select the encryption type (TKI P, AES or TKI P+ AES) for data encryption.
Select TKI P if your wireless clients can all use TKIP.
Select AES if your wireless clients can all use AES.
Select TKI P+ AES to allow the wireless clients to use either TKIP or AES.
WPA2 PreAuthentication
Network Reauth Interval
This field is available only when you select W PA2 .
Pre-authentication enables fast roaming by allowing the wireless client (already connecting
to an AP) to perform IEEE 802.1x authentication with another AP before connecting to it.
Select En a ble d to turn on preauthentication in WAP2. Otherwise, select D isa ble d.
Specify how often wireless stations have to resend usernames and passwords in order to
stay connected.
If wireless station authentication is done using a RADIUS server, the reauthentication timer
on the RADIUS server has priority.
Group Key
Update Timer
The Gr ou p Ke y Upda t e Tim e r is the rate at which the RADIUS server sends a new group
key out to all clients.
6.3 The More AP Screen
This screen allows you to enable and configure multiple Basic Service Sets (BSSs) on the Device.
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
75
Chapter 6 Wireless
Click N e t w or k Se t t ing > W ir e le ss > M or e AP. The following screen displays.
Figure 34 Network Setting > Wireless > More AP
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 21 Network Setting > Wireless > More AP
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
This is the index number of the entry.
Status
This field indicates whether this SSID is active. A yellow bulb signifies that this SSID is
active. A gray bulb signifies that this SSID is not active.
SSID
An SSID profile is the set of parameters relating to one of the Device’s BSSs. The SSID
(Service Set IDentifier) identifies the Service Set with which a wireless device is associated.
This field displays the name of the wireless profile on the network. When a wireless client
scans for an AP to associate with, this is the name that is broadcast and seen in the wireless
client utility.
Security
This field indicates the security mode of the SSID profile.
Guest WLAN
This displays if the guest WLAN function has been enabled for this WLAN.
If H om e Gu e st displays, clients can connect to each other directly.
If Ex t e r na l Gu e st displays, clients are blocked from connecting to each other directly.
N / A displays if guest WLAN is disabled.
Modify
76
Click the Edit icon to configure the SSID profile.
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
Chapter 6 Wireless
6.3.1 Edit More AP
Use this screen to edit an SSID profile. Click the Edit icon next to an SSID in the M or e AP screen.
The following screen displays.
Figure 35 More AP: Edit
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 22 More AP: Edit
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Wireless Network Setup
Wireless
You can En a ble or D isa ble the wireless LAN in this field.
Passphrase
Type
Passphrase type cannot be changed. The default is N on e .
Wireless Network Settings
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
77
Chapter 6 Wireless
Table 22 More AP: Edit (continued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Wireless
Network Name
(SSID)
The SSID (Service Set IDentity) identifies the service set with which a wireless device is
associated. Wireless devices associating to the access point (AP) must have the same SSID.
Max clients
Specify the maximum number of clients that can connect to this network at the same time.
Hide SSID
Select this check box to hide the SSID in the outgoing beacon frame so a station cannot
obtain the SSID through scanning using a site survey tool.
Enhanced
Multicast
Forwarding
Select this check box to allow the Device to convert wireless multicast traffic into wireless
unicast traffic.
Guest WLAN
Select this to create Guest WLANs for home and external clients. Select the WLAN type in
the Acce ss Sce na r io field.
Access
Scenario
If you select H om e Gu e st , clients can connect to each other directly.
Enter a descriptive name (up to 32 English keyboard characters) for the wireless LAN.
If you select Ex t e r n a l Gu e st , clients are blocked from connecting to each other directly.
Maximum
Upstream
Bandwidth
Specify the maximum rate for upstream wireless traffic to the WAN from this WLAN in
kilobits per second (Kbps).
Maximum
Downstream
Bandwidth
Specify the maximum rate for downstream wireless traffic to this WLAN from the WAN in
kilobits per second (Kbps).
Security Level
Security Mode
Select Ba sic ( W EP, 8 0 2 .1 X ) or M or e Se cu r e ( W PA( 2 ) - PSK, W PA( 2 ) ) to add security
on this wireless network. The wireless clients which want to associate to this network must
have same wireless security settings as the Device. After you select to use a security,
additional options appears in this screen.
Or you can select N o Se cu r it y to allow any client to associate this network without any data
encryption or authentication.
See Section 6.2.1 on page 69 for more details about this field.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel
Click Ca n ce l to exit this screen without saving.
6.4 MAC Authentication
This screen allows you to configure the ZyXEL Device to give exclusive access to specific devices
( Allow ) or exclude specific devices from accessing the ZyXEL Device ( D e n y) . Every Ethernet
device has a unique MAC (Media Access Control) address. The MAC address is assigned at the
factory and consists of six pairs of hexadecimal characters, for example, 00:A0:C5:00:00:02. You
need to know the MAC addresses of the devices to configure this screen.
78
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
Chapter 6 Wireless
Use this screen to view your Device’s MAC filter settings and add new MAC filter rules. Click
N e t w or k Se t t ing > W ir e le ss > M AC Aut he nt ica t ion . The screen appears as shown.
Figure 36 Wireless > MAC Authentication
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 23 Wireless > MAC Authentication
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
SSID
Select the SSID for which you want to configure MAC filter settings.
MAC Restrict
Mode
Define the filter action for the list of MAC addresses in the M AC Addr e ss table.
Select D isa ble to turn off MAC filtering.
Select D e ny to block access to the Device. MAC addresses not listed will be allowed to
access the Device.
Select Allow to permit access to the Device. MAC addresses not listed will be denied access
to the Device.
Add new MAC
address
Click this if you want to add a new MAC address entry to the MAC filter list below.
Enter the MAC addresses of the wireless devices that are allowed or denied access to the
Device in these address fields. Enter the MAC addresses in a valid MAC address format, that
is, six hexadecimal character pairs, for example, 12:34:56:78:9a:bc.
This is the index number of the entry.
MAC Address
This is the MAC addresses of the wireless devices that are allowed or denied access to the
Device.
Delete
Click the D e le t e icon to delete the entry.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel
Click Ca n ce l to exit this screen without saving.
6.5 The WPS Screen
Use this screen to configure WiFi Protected Setup (WPS) on your Device.
WPS allows you to quickly set up a wireless network with strong security, without having to
configure security settings manually. Set up each WPS connection between two devices. Both
devices must support WPS. See Section 6.10.9.3 on page 95 for more information about WPS.
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
79
Chapter 6 Wireless
Note: The Device applies the security settings of the SSI D 1 profile (see Section 6.2 on
page 66). If you want to use the WPS feature, make sure you have set the security
mode of SSI D 1 to W PA2 - PSK or N o Se cu r it y.
Click N e t w or k Se t t ing > W ir e le ss > W PS. The following screen displays. Select Ena ble and click
Apply to activate the WPS function. Then you can configure the WPS settings in this screen.
Figure 37 Network Setting > Wireless > WPS
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 24 Network Setting > Wireless > WPS
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
WPS
Select En a ble to activate WPS on the Device.
WPS 2.0
Select En a ble to have the device use WPS 2.0 or D isa ble to have it use WPS 1.0.
Method 1
Use this section to set up a WPS wireless network using Push Button Configuration (PBC).
Connect
Click this button to add another WPS-enabled wireless device (within wireless range of the
Device) to your wireless network. This button may either be a physical button on the
outside of device, or a menu button similar to the Con n e ct button on this screen.
Note: You must press the other wireless device’s WPS button within two minutes of pressing
this button.
Method 2
Register
Use this section to set up a WPS wireless network by entering the PIN of the client into the
Device.
Enter the PIN of the device that you are setting up a WPS connection with and click
Re gist e r to authenticate and add the wireless device to your wireless network.
You can find the PIN either on the outside of the device, or by checking the device’s
settings.
Note: You must also activate WPS on that device within two minutes to have it present its
PIN to the Device.
80
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
Chapter 6 Wireless
Table 24 Network Setting > Wireless > WPS (continued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Method 3
Use this section to set up a WPS wireless network by entering the PIN of the Device into
the client.
Release
Configuration
Generate
New PIN
Number
The default WPS status is configured.
Click this button to remove all configured wireless and wireless security settings for WPS
connections on the Device.
The PIN (Personal Identification Number) of the Device is shown here. Enter this PIN in the
configuration utility of the device you want to connect to using WPS.
The PIN is not necessary when you use WPS push-button method.
Click the Ge n e r a t e N e w PI N N u m be r button to have the Device create a new PIN.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel
Click Ca nce l to restore your previously saved settings.
6.6 The WMM Screen
Use this screen to enable Wi-Fi MultiMedia (WMM) and WMM Power Save in wireless networks for
multimedia applications.
Click N e t w or k Se t t ing > W ir e le ss > W M M . The following screen displays.
Figure 38 Network Setting > Wireless > WMM
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 25 Network Setting > Wireless > WMM
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
WMM
Select On to have the Device automatically give a service a priority level according to the
ToS value in the IP header of packets it sends. WMM QoS (Wifi MultiMedia Quality of
Service) gives high priority to voice and video, which makes them run more smoothly.
WMM
Automatic
Power Save
Delivery
Select this option to extend the battery life of your mobile devices (especially useful for
small devices that are running multimedia applications). The Device goes to sleep mode to
save power when it is not transmitting data. The AP buffers the packets sent to the Device
until the Device "wakes up". The Device wakes up periodically to check for incoming data.
Note: Note: This works only if the wireless device to which the Device is connected also
supports this feature.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel
Click Ca n ce l to restore your previously saved settings.
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
81
Chapter 6 Wireless
6.7 The WDS Screen
An AP using the Wireless Distribution System (WDS) can function as a wireless network bridge
allowing you to wirelessly connect two wired network segments. The W D S screen allows you to
configure the Device to connect to two or more APs wirelessly when WDS is enabled.
Use this screen to set up your WDS (Wireless Distribution System) links between the Device and
other wireless APs. You need to know the MAC address of the peer device. Once the security
settings of peer sides match one another, the connection between devices is made.
Note: WDS security is independent of the security settings between the Device and any
wireless clients.
Note: At the time of writing, WDS is compatible with other ZyXEL APs only. Not all models
support WDS links. Check your other AP’s documentation.
Click N e t w or k Se t t ing > W ir e le ss > W D S. The following screen displays.
Figure 39 Network Setting > Wireless > WDS
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 26 Network Setting > Wireless > WDS
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Wireless Bridge Setup
AP Mode
Select the operating mode for your Device.
•
•
Bridge Restrict
Acce ss Poin t - The Device functions as a bridge and access point simultaneously.
W ir e le ss Br idge - The Device acts as a wireless network bridge and establishes
wireless links with other APs. In this mode, clients cannot connect to the Device
wirelessly.
This field is available only when you set operating mode to Acce ss Poin t .
Select En a ble d to turn on WDS and enter the peer device’s MAC address manually in the
table below. Select D isa ble to turn off WDS.
82
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
Chapter 6 Wireless
Table 26 Network Setting > Wireless > WDS (continued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Remote Bridge
MAC Address
You can enter the MAC address of the peer device by clicking the Edit icon under M odify.
This is the index number of the entry.
MAC Address
This shows the MAC address of the peer device.
You can connect to up to 4 peer devices.
Modify/Delete
Click the Edit icon and type the MAC address of the peer device in a valid MAC address
format (six hexadecimal character pairs, for example 12:34:56:78:9a:bc).
Click the D e le t e icon to remove this entry.
Scan
Click the Sca n icon to search and display the available APs within range.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel
Click Ca n ce l to restore your previously saved settings.
6.7.1 WDS Scan
You can click the Sca n icon in W ir e le ss > W D S to have the Device automatically search and
display the available APs within range. Select an AP and click Apply to have the Device establish a
wireless link with the selected wireless device.
Figure 40 WDS: Scan
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 27 WDS: Scan
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Wireless Bridge Scan Setup
Refresh
Click Re fr e sh to update the table.
This is the index number of the entry.
SSID
This shows the SSID of the available wireless device within range.
BSSID
This shows the MAC address of the available wireless device within range.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel
Click Ca n ce l to restore your previously saved settings.
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
83
Chapter 6 Wireless
6.8 The Others Screen
Use this screen to configure advanced wireless settings. Click N e t w or k Se t t in g > W ir e le ss >
Ot he r s. The screen appears as shown.
See Section 6.10.2 on page 88 for detailed definitions of the terms listed in this screen.
Figure 41 Network Setting > Wireless > Others
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 28 Network Setting > Wireless > Others
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
RTS/CTS
Threshold
Data with its frame size larger than this value will perform the RTS (Request To Send)/CTS
(Clear To Send) handshake.
Enter a value between 0 and 2347.
Fragmentation
Threshold
This is the maximum data fragment size that can be sent. Enter a value between 256 and
2346.
Auto Channel
Timer
If you set the channel to Au t o in the N e t w or k Se t t in g > W ir e le ss > Ge ne r a l screen,
specify the interval in minutes for how often the Device scans for the best channel. Enter 0
to disable the periodical scan.
Output Power
Set the output power of the Device. If there is a high density of APs in an area, decrease
the output power to reduce interference with other APs. Select one of the following: 2 0 % ,
4 0 % , 6 0 % , 8 0 % or 1 0 0 % .
Beacon Interval
When a wirelessly networked device sends a beacon, it includes with it a beacon interval.
This specifies the time period before the device sends the beacon again.
The interval tells receiving devices on the network how long they can wait in low power
mode before waking up to handle the beacon. This value can be set from 50ms to 1000ms.
A high value helps save current consumption of the access point.
DTIM Interval
84
Delivery Traffic Indication Message (DTIM) is the time period after which broadcast and
multicast packets are transmitted to mobile clients in the Power Saving mode. A high DTIM
value can cause clients to lose connectivity with the network. This value can be set from 1
to 255.
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
Chapter 6 Wireless
Table 28 Network Setting > Wireless > Others (continued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
802.11 Mode
Select 8 0 2 .1 1 b On ly to allow only IEEE 802.11b compliant WLAN devices to associate with
the Device.
Select 8 0 2 .1 1 g On ly to allow only IEEE 802.11g compliant WLAN devices to associate with
the Device.
Select 8 0 2 .1 1 n On ly to allow only IEEE 802.11n compliant WLAN devices to associate with
the Device.
Select 8 0 2 .1 1 b/ g M ix e d to allow either IEEE 802.11b or IEEE 802.11g compliant WLAN
devices to associate with the Device. The transmission rate of your Device might be
reduced.
Select 8 0 2 .1 1 b/ g/ n M ix e d to allow IEEE 802.11b, IEEE 802.11g or IEEE802.11n
compliant WLAN devices to associate with the Device. The transmission rate of your Device
might be reduced.
802.11
Protection
Enabling this feature can help prevent collisions in mixed-mode networks (networks with
both IEEE 802.11b and IEEE 802.11g traffic).
Select Au t o to have the wireless devices transmit data after a RTS/CTS handshake. This
helps improve IEEE 802.11g performance.
Select Off to disable 802.11 protection. The transmission rate of your Device might be
reduced in a mixed-mode network.
This field displays Off and is not configurable when you set 8 0 2 .1 1 M ode to 8 0 2 .1 1 b
On ly.
Preamble
Select a preamble type from the drop-down list box. Choices are Lon g or Sh or t . See
Section 6.10.7 on page 92 for more information.
This field is configurable only when you set 802.11 Mode to 8 0 2 .1 1 b.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel
Click Ca n ce l to restore your previously saved settings.
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
85
Chapter 6 Wireless
6.9 The Channel Status Screen
Use the Cha nn e l St a t us screen to scan wireless LAN channel noises and view the results. Click
N e t w or k Se t t ing > W ir e le ss > Cha nne l St a t us. The screen appears as shown. Click Sca n to
scan the wireless LAN channels. You can view the results in the Cha nne l Sca n Re sult section.
Figure 42 Network Setting > Wireless > Channel Status
6.10 Technical Reference
This section discusses wireless LANs in depth.
6.10.1 Wireless Network Overview
Wireless networks consist of wireless clients, access points and bridges.
• A wireless client is a radio connected to a user’s computer.
• An access point is a radio with a wired connection to a network, which can connect with
numerous wireless clients and let them access the network.
• A bridge is a radio that relays communications between access points and wireless clients,
extending a network’s range.
86
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
Chapter 6 Wireless
Traditionally, a wireless network operates in one of two ways.
• An “infrastructure” type of network has one or more access points and one or more wireless
clients. The wireless clients connect to the access points.
• An “ad-hoc” type of network is one in which there is no access point. Wireless clients connect to
one another in order to exchange information.
The following figure provides an example of a wireless network.
Figure 43 Example of a Wireless Network
The wireless network is the part in the blue circle. In this wireless network, devices A and B use the
access point (AP) to interact with the other devices (such as the printer) or with the Internet. Your
Device is the AP.
Every wireless network must follow these basic guidelines.
• Every device in the same wireless network must use the same SSID.
The SSID is the name of the wireless network. It stands for Service Set IDentifier.
• If two wireless networks overlap, they should use a different channel.
Like radio stations or television channels, each wireless network uses a specific channel, or
frequency, to send and receive information.
• Every device in the same wireless network must use security compatible with the AP.
Security stops unauthorized devices from using the wireless network. It can also protect the
information that is sent in the wireless network.
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
87
Chapter 6 Wireless
Radio Channels
In the radio spectrum, there are certain frequency bands allocated for unlicensed, civilian use. For
the purposes of wireless networking, these bands are divided into numerous channels. This allows a
variety of networks to exist in the same place without interfering with one another. When you
create a network, you must select a channel to use.
Since the available unlicensed spectrum varies from one country to another, the number of
available channels also varies.
6.10.2 Additional Wireless Terms
The following table describes some wireless network terms and acronyms used in the Device’s Web
Configurator.
Table 29 Additional Wireless Terms
TERM
DESCRIPTION
RTS/CTS Threshold
In a wireless network which covers a large area, wireless devices are sometimes not
aware of each other’s presence. This may cause them to send information to the AP
at the same time and result in information colliding and not getting through.
By setting this value lower than the default value, the wireless devices must
sometimes get permission to send information to the Device. The lower the value, the
more often the devices must get permission.
If this value is greater than the fragmentation threshold value (see below), then
wireless devices never have to get permission to send information to the Device.
Preamble
A preamble affects the timing in your wireless network. There are two preamble
modes: long and short. If a device uses a different preamble mode than the Device
does, it cannot communicate with the Device.
Authentication
The process of verifying whether a wireless device is allowed to use the wireless
network.
Fragmentation
Threshold
A small fragmentation threshold is recommended for busy networks, while a larger
threshold provides faster performance if the network is not very busy.
6.10.3 Wireless Security Overview
By their nature, radio communications are simple to intercept. For wireless data networks, this
means that anyone within range of a wireless network without security can not only read the data
passing over the airwaves, but also join the network. Once an unauthorized person has access to
the network, he or she can steal information or introduce malware (malicious software) intended to
compromise the network. For these reasons, a variety of security systems have been developed to
ensure that only authorized people can use a wireless data network, or understand the data carried
on it.
These security standards do two things. First, they authenticate. This means that only people
presenting the right credentials (often a username and password, or a “key” phrase) can access the
network. Second, they encrypt. This means that the information sent over the air is encoded. Only
people with the code key can understand the information, and only people who have been
authenticated are given the code key.
These security standards vary in effectiveness. Some can be broken, such as the old Wired
Equivalent Protocol (WEP). Using WEP is better than using no security at all, but it will not keep a
determined attacker out. Other security standards are secure in themselves but can be broken if a
88
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
Chapter 6 Wireless
user does not use them properly. For example, the WPA-PSK security standard is very secure if you
use a long key which is difficult for an attacker’s software to guess - for example, a twenty-letter
long string of apparently random numbers and letters - but it is not very secure if you use a short
key which is very easy to guess - for example, a three-letter word from the dictionary.
Because of the damage that can be done by a malicious attacker, it’s not just people who have
sensitive information on their network who should use security. Everybody who uses any wireless
network should ensure that effective security is in place.
A good way to come up with effective security keys, passwords and so on is to use obscure
information that you personally will easily remember, and to enter it in a way that appears random
and does not include real words. For example, if your mother owns a 1970 Dodge Challenger and
her favorite movie is Vanishing Point (which you know was made in 1971) you could use
“70dodchal71vanpoi” as your security key.
The following sections introduce different types of wireless security you can set up in the wireless
network.
6.10.3.1 SSID
Normally, the Device acts like a beacon and regularly broadcasts the SSID in the area. You can hide
the SSID instead, in which case the Device does not broadcast the SSID. In addition, you should
change the default SSID to something that is difficult to guess.
This type of security is fairly weak, however, because there are ways for unauthorized wireless
devices to get the SSID. In addition, unauthorized wireless devices can still see the information that
is sent in the wireless network.
6.10.3.2 MAC Address Filter
Every device that can use a wireless network has a unique identification number, called a MAC
address.1 A MAC address is usually written using twelve hexadecimal characters2; for example,
00A0C5000002 or 00:A0:C5:00:00:02. To get the MAC address for each device in the wireless
network, see the device’s User’s Guide or other documentation.
You can use the MAC address filter to tell the Device which devices are allowed or not allowed to
use the wireless network. If a device is allowed to use the wireless network, it still has to have the
correct information (SSID, channel, and security). If a device is not allowed to use the wireless
network, it does not matter if it has the correct information.
This type of security does not protect the information that is sent in the wireless network.
Furthermore, there are ways for unauthorized wireless devices to get the MAC address of an
authorized device. Then, they can use that MAC address to use the wireless network.
6.10.3.3 User Authentication
Authentication is the process of verifying whether a wireless device is allowed to use the wireless
network. You can make every user log in to the wireless network before using it. However, every
device in the wireless network has to support IEEE 802.1x to do this.
1.
Some wireless devices, such as scanners, can detect wireless networks but cannot use wireless networks. These kinds
of wireless devices might not have MAC addresses.
2.
Hexadecimal characters are 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, A, B, C, D, E, and F.
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
89
Chapter 6 Wireless
For wireless networks, you can store the user names and passwords for each user in a RADIUS
server. This is a server used in businesses more than in homes. If you do not have a RADIUS server,
you cannot set up user names and passwords for your users.
Unauthorized wireless devices can still see the information that is sent in the wireless network,
even if they cannot use the wireless network. Furthermore, there are ways for unauthorized
wireless users to get a valid user name and password. Then, they can use that user name and
password to use the wireless network.
6.10.3.4 Encryption
Wireless networks can use encryption to protect the information that is sent in the wireless
network. Encryption is like a secret code. If you do not know the secret code, you cannot
understand the message.
The types of encryption you can choose depend on the type of authentication. (See Section
6.10.3.3 on page 89 for information about this.)
Table 30 Types of Encryption for Each Type of Authentication
W e a k e st
NO AUTHENTICATION
RADIUS SERVER
No Security
WPA
Static WEP
WPA-PSK
St r on ge st
WPA2-PSK
WPA2
For example, if the wireless network has a RADIUS server, you can choose W PA or W PA2 . If users
do not log in to the wireless network, you can choose no encryption, St a t ic W EP, W PA- PSK, or
W PA2 - PSK.
Usually, you should set up the strongest encryption that every device in the wireless network
supports. For example, suppose you have a wireless network with the Device and you do not have
a RADIUS server. Therefore, there is no authentication. Suppose the wireless network has two
devices. Device A only supports WEP, and device B supports WEP and WPA. Therefore, you should
set up St a t ic W EP in the wireless network.
Note: It is recommended that wireless networks use W PA- PSK, W PA, or stronger
encryption. The other types of encryption are better than none at all, but it is still
possible for unauthorized wireless devices to figure out the original information
pretty quickly.
When you select W PA2 or W PA2 - PSK in your Device, you can also select an option (W PA
com pa t ible ) to support WPA as well. In this case, if some of the devices support WPA and some
support WPA2, you should set up W PA2 - PSK or W PA2 (depending on the type of wireless network
login) and select the W PA com pa t ible option in the Device.
Many types of encryption use a key to protect the information in the wireless network. The longer
the key, the stronger the encryption. Every device in the wireless network must have the same key.
90
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
Chapter 6 Wireless
6.10.4 Signal Problems
Because wireless networks are radio networks, their signals are subject to limitations of distance,
interference and absorption.
Problems with distance occur when the two radios are too far apart. Problems with interference
occur when other radio waves interrupt the data signal. Interference may come from other radio
transmissions, such as military or air traffic control communications, or from machines that are
coincidental emitters such as electric motors or microwaves. Problems with absorption occur when
physical objects (such as thick walls) are between the two radios, muffling the signal.
6.10.5 BSS
A Basic Service Set (BSS) exists when all communications between wireless stations or between a
wireless station and a wired network client go through one access point (AP).
Intra-BSS traffic is traffic between wireless stations in the BSS. When Intra-BSS traffic blocking is
disabled, wireless station A and B can access the wired network and communicate with each other.
When Intra-BSS traffic blocking is enabled, wireless station A and B can still access the wired
network but cannot communicate with each other.
Figure 44 Basic Service set
6.10.6 MBSSID
Traditionally, you need to use different APs to configure different Basic Service Sets (BSSs). As well
as the cost of buying extra APs, there is also the possibility of channel interference. The Device’s
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
91
Chapter 6 Wireless
MBSSID (Multiple Basic Service Set IDentifier) function allows you to use one access point to
provide several BSSs simultaneously. You can then assign varying QoS priorities and/or security
modes to different SSIDs.
Wireless devices can use different BSSIDs to associate with the same AP.
6.10.6.1 Notes on Multiple BSSs
• A maximum of eight BSSs are allowed on one AP simultaneously.
• You must use different keys for different BSSs. If two wireless devices have different BSSIDs
(they are in different BSSs), but have the same keys, they may hear each other’s
communications (but not communicate with each other).
• MBSSID should not replace but rather be used in conjunction with 802.1x security.
6.10.7 Preamble Type
Preamble is used to signal that data is coming to the receiver. Short and long refer to the length of
the synchronization field in a packet.
Short preamble increases performance as less time sending preamble means more time for sending
data. All IEEE 802.11 compliant wireless adapters support long preamble, but not all support short
preamble.
Use long preamble if you are unsure what preamble mode other wireless devices on the network
support, and to provide more reliable communications in busy wireless networks.
Use short preamble if you are sure all wireless devices on the network support it, and to provide
more efficient communications.
Use the dynamic setting to automatically use short preamble when all wireless devices on the
network support it, otherwise the Device uses long preamble.
Note: The wireless devices MUST use the same preamble mode in order to communicate.
6.10.8 Wireless Distribution System (WDS)
The Device can act as a wireless network bridge and establish WDS (Wireless Distribution System)
links with other APs. You need to know the MAC addresses of the APs you want to link to. Once the
security settings of peer sides match one another, the connection between devices is made.
At the time of writing, WDS security is compatible with other ZyXEL access points only. Refer to
your other access point’s documentation for details.
The following figure illustrates how WDS link works between APs. Notebook computer A is a
wireless client connecting to access point AP 1 . AP 1 has no wired Internet connection, but it can
92
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
Chapter 6 Wireless
establish a WDS link with access point AP 2 , which has a wired Internet connection. When AP 1
has a WDS link with AP 2 , the notebook computer can access the Internet through AP 2 .
Figure 45 WDS Link Example
WDS
AP 1
AP 2
6.10.9 WiFi Protected Setup (WPS)
Your Device supports WiFi Protected Setup (WPS), which is an easy way to set up a secure wireless
network. WPS is an industry standard specification, defined by the WiFi Alliance.
WPS allows you to quickly set up a wireless network with strong security, without having to
configure security settings manually. Each WPS connection works between two devices. Both
devices must support WPS (check each device’s documentation to make sure).
Depending on the devices you have, you can either press a button (on the device itself, or in its
configuration utility) or enter a PIN (a unique Personal Identification Number that allows one device
to authenticate the other) in each of the two devices. When WPS is activated on a device, it has two
minutes to find another device that also has WPS activated. Then, the two devices connect and set
up a secure network by themselves.
6.10.9.1 Push Button Configuration
WPS Push Button Configuration (PBC) is initiated by pressing a button on each WPS-enabled
device, and allowing them to connect automatically. You do not need to enter any information.
Not every WPS-enabled device has a physical WPS button. Some may have a WPS PBC button in
their configuration utilities instead of or in addition to the physical button.
Take the following steps to set up WPS using the button.
Ensure that the two devices you want to set up are within wireless range of one another.
Look for a WPS button on each device. If the device does not have one, log into its configuration
utility and locate the button (see the device’s User’s Guide for how to do this - for the Device, see
Section 6.6 on page 81).
Press the button on one of the devices (it doesn’t matter which). For the Device you must press the
WPS button for more than three seconds.
Within two minutes, press the button on the other device. The registrar sends the network name
(SSID) and security key through an secure connection to the enrollee.
If you need to make sure that WPS worked, check the list of associated wireless clients in the AP’s
configuration utility. If you see the wireless client in the list, WPS was successful.
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
93
Chapter 6 Wireless
6.10.9.2 PIN Configuration
Each WPS-enabled device has its own PIN (Personal Identification Number). This may either be
static (it cannot be changed) or dynamic (in some devices you can generate a new PIN by clicking
on a button in the configuration interface).
Use the PIN method instead of the push-button configuration (PBC) method if you want to ensure
that the connection is established between the devices you specify, not just the first two devices to
activate WPS in range of each other. However, you need to log into the configuration interfaces of
both devices to use the PIN method.
When you use the PIN method, you must enter the PIN from one device (usually the wireless client)
into the second device (usually the Access Point or wireless router). Then, when WPS is activated
on the first device, it presents its PIN to the second device. If the PIN matches, one device sends
the network and security information to the other, allowing it to join the network.
Take the following steps to set up a WPS connection between an access point or wireless router
(referred to here as the AP) and a client device using the PIN method.
Ensure WPS is enabled on both devices.
Access the WPS section of the AP’s configuration interface. See the device’s User’s Guide for how to
do this.
Look for the client’s WPS PIN; it will be displayed either on the device, or in the WPS section of the
client’s configuration interface (see the device’s User’s Guide for how to find the WPS PIN - for the
Device, see Section 6.5 on page 79).
Enter the client’s PIN in the AP’s configuration interface.
If the client device’s configuration interface has an area for entering another device’s PIN, you can
either enter the client’s PIN in the AP, or enter the AP’s PIN in the client - it does not matter which.
Start WPS on both devices within two minutes.
Use the configuration utility to activate WPS, not the push-button on the device itself.
On a computer connected to the wireless client, try to connect to the Internet. If you can connect,
WPS was successful.
If you cannot connect, check the list of associated wireless clients in the AP’s configuration utility. If
you see the wireless client in the list, WPS was successful.
94
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
Chapter 6 Wireless
The following figure shows a WPS-enabled wireless client (installed in a notebook computer)
connecting to the WPS-enabled AP via the PIN method.
Figure 46 Example WPS Process: PIN Method
ENROLLEE
REGISTRAR
WPS
This device’s
WPS PIN: 123456
WPS
Enter WPS PIN
from other device:
WPS
START
WPS
START
WITHIN 2 MINUTES
SECURE EAP TUNNEL
SSID
WPA(2)-PSK
COMMUNICATION
6.10.9.3 How WPS Works
When two WPS-enabled devices connect, each device must assume a specific role. One device acts
as the registrar (the device that supplies network and security settings) and the other device acts
as the enrollee (the device that receives network and security settings. The registrar creates a
secure EAP (Extensible Authentication Protocol) tunnel and sends the network name (SSID) and the
WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK pre-shared key to the enrollee. Whether WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK is used
depends on the standards supported by the devices. If the registrar is already part of a network, it
sends the existing information. If not, it generates the SSID and WPA(2)-PSK randomly.
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
95
Chapter 6 Wireless
The following figure shows a WPS-enabled client (installed in a notebook computer) connecting to a
WPS-enabled access point.
Figure 47 How WPS works
ACTIVATE
WPS
ACTIVATE
WPS
WITHIN 2 MINUTES
WPS HANDSHAKE
ENROLLEE
REGISTRAR
SECURE TUNNEL
SECURITY INFO
COMMUNICATION
The roles of registrar and enrollee last only as long as the WPS setup process is active (two
minutes). The next time you use WPS, a different device can be the registrar if necessary.
The WPS connection process is like a handshake; only two devices participate in each WPS
transaction. If you want to add more devices you should repeat the process with one of the existing
networked devices and the new device.
Note that the access point (AP) is not always the registrar, and the wireless client is not always the
enrollee. All WPS-certified APs can be a registrar, and so can some WPS-enabled wireless clients.
By default, a WPS devices is “unconfigured”. This means that it is not part of an existing network
and can act as either enrollee or registrar (if it supports both functions). If the registrar is
unconfigured, the security settings it transmits to the enrollee are randomly-generated. Once a
WPS-enabled device has connected to another device using WPS, it becomes “configured”. A
configured wireless client can still act as enrollee or registrar in subsequent WPS connections, but a
configured access point can no longer act as enrollee. It will be the registrar in all subsequent WPS
connections in which it is involved. If you want a configured AP to act as an enrollee, you must reset
it to its factory defaults.
6.10.9.4 Example WPS Network Setup
This section shows how security settings are distributed in an example WPS setup.
The following figure shows an example network. In step 1 , both AP1 and Clie nt 1 are
unconfigured. When WPS is activated on both, they perform the handshake. In this example, AP1
96
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
Chapter 6 Wireless
is the registrar, and Clie nt 1 is the enrollee. The registrar randomly generates the security
information to set up the network, since it is unconfigured and has no existing information.
Figure 48 WPS: Example Network Step 1
ENROLLEE
REGISTRAR
SECURITY INFO
AP1
CLIENT 1
In step 2 , you add another wireless client to the network. You know that Clie nt 1 supports registrar
mode, but it is better to use AP1 for the WPS handshake with the new client since you must
connect to the access point anyway in order to use the network. In this case, AP1 must be the
registrar, since it is configured (it already has security information for the network). AP1 supplies
the existing security information to Clie nt 2 .
Figure 49 WPS: Example Network Step 2
REGISTRAR
EXISTING CONNECTION
AP1
CLIENT 1
ENROLLEE
INF
RI
CU
SE
CLIENT 2
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
97
Chapter 6 Wireless
In step 3, you add another access point (AP2 ) to your network. AP2 is out of range of AP1 , so you
cannot use AP1 for the WPS handshake with the new access point. However, you know that Clie nt
2 supports the registrar function, so you use it to perform the WPS handshake instead.
Figure 50 WPS: Example Network Step 3
EXISTING CONNECTION
CLIENT 1
IS
EX
GC
TIN
ION
CT
NN
AP1
REGISTRAR
CLIENT 2
SE
CU
RIT
ENROLLEE
INF
AP2
6.10.9.5 Limitations of WPS
WPS has some limitations of which you should be aware.
• WPS works in Infrastructure networks only (where an AP and a wireless client communicate). It
does not work in Ad-Hoc networks (where there is no AP).
• When you use WPS, it works between two devices only. You cannot enroll multiple devices
simultaneously, you must enroll one after the other.
For instance, if you have two enrollees and one registrar you must set up the first enrollee (by
pressing the WPS button on the registrar and the first enrollee, for example), then check that it
successfully enrolled, then set up the second device in the same way.
• WPS works only with other WPS-enabled devices. However, you can still add non-WPS devices to
a network you already set up using WPS.
WPS works by automatically issuing a randomly-generated WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK pre-shared
key from the registrar device to the enrollee devices. Whether the network uses WPA-PSK or
WPA2-PSK depends on the device. You can check the configuration interface of the registrar
device to discover the key the network is using (if the device supports this feature). Then, you
can enter the key into the non-WPS device and join the network as normal (the non-WPS device
must also support WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK).
98
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
Chapter 6 Wireless
• When you use the PBC method, there is a short period (from the moment you press the button
on one device to the moment you press the button on the other device) when any WPS-enabled
device could join the network. This is because the registrar has no way of identifying the
“correct” enrollee, and cannot differentiate between your enrollee and a rogue device. This is a
possible way for a hacker to gain access to a network.
You can easily check to see if this has happened. WPS works between only two devices
simultaneously, so if another device has enrolled your device will be unable to enroll, and will not
have access to the network. If this happens, open the access point’s configuration interface and
look at the list of associated clients (usually displayed by MAC address). It does not matter if the
access point is the WPS registrar, the enrollee, or was not involved in the WPS handshake; a
rogue device must still associate with the access point to gain access to the network. Check the
MAC addresses of your wireless clients (usually printed on a label on the bottom of the device). If
there is an unknown MAC address you can remove it or reset the AP.
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
99
Chapter 6 Wireless
100
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
C HAPT ER
Home Networking
7.1 Overview
A Local Area Network (LAN) is a shared communication system to which many networking devices
are connected. It is usually located in one immediate area such as a building or floor of a building.
Use the LAN screens to help you configure a LAN DHCP server and manage IP addresses.
LAN
DSL
7.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
• Use the LAN Se t u p screen to set the LAN IP address, subnet mask, and DHCP settings of your
Device (Section 7.2 on page 103).
• Use the St a t ic D H CP screen to assign IP addresses on the LAN to specific individual computers
based on their MAC Addresses (Section 7.3 on page 107).
• Use the UPn P screen to enable UPnP and UPnP NAT traversal on the Device (Section 7.4 on page
108).
• Use the Addit ion a l Su bne t screen to configure IP alias and public static IP (Section 7.5 on page
109).
• Use the STB Ve n dor I D screen to have the Device automatically create static DHCP entries for
Set Top Box (STB) devices when they request IP addresses (Section 7.8 on page 119)
• Use the LAN VLAN screen to control the VLAN ID and IEEE 802.1p priority tags of traffic sent out
through individual LAN ports (Section 7.9 on page 120).
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
101
Chapter 7 Home Networking
7.1.2 What You Need To Know
7.1.2.1 About LAN
IP Address
IP addresses identify individual devices on a network. Every networking device (including
computers, servers, routers, printers, etc.) needs an IP address to communicate across the
network. These networking devices are also known as hosts.
Subnet Mask
Subnet masks determine the maximum number of possible hosts on a network. You can also use
subnet masks to divide one network into multiple sub-networks.
DHCP
A DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) server can assign your Device an IP address, subnet
mask, DNS and other routing information when it's turned on.
DNS
DNS (Domain Name System) is for mapping a domain name to its corresponding IP address and
vice versa. The DNS server is extremely important because without it, you must know the IP
address of a networking device before you can access it.
RADVD (Router Advertisement Daemon)
When an IPv6 host sends a Router Solicitation (RS) request to discover the available routers,
RADVD with Router Advertisement (RA) messages in response to the request. It specifies the
minimum and maximum intervals of RA broadcasts. RA messages containing the address prefix.
IPv6 hosts can be generated with the IPv6 prefix an IPv6 address.
7.1.2.2 About UPnP
Identifying UPnP Devices
UPnP hardware is identified as an icon in the Network Connections folder (Windows XP). Each UPnP
compatible device installed on your network will appear as a separate icon. Selecting the icon of a
UPnP device will allow you to access the information and properties of that device.
NAT Traversal
UPnP NAT traversal automates the process of allowing an application to operate through NAT. UPnP
network devices can automatically configure network addressing, announce their presence in the
network to other UPnP devices and enable exchange of simple product and service descriptions.
NAT traversal allows the following:
• Dynamic port mapping
• Learning public IP addresses
102
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
Chapter 7 Home Networking
• Assigning lease times to mappings
Windows Messenger is an example of an application that supports NAT traversal and UPnP.
See the Chapter 10 on page 149 for more information on NAT.
Cautions with UPnP
The automated nature of NAT traversal applications in establishing their own services and opening
firewall ports may present network security issues. Network information and configuration may also
be obtained and modified by users in some network environments.
When a UPnP device joins a network, it announces its presence with a multicast message. For
security reasons, the Device allows multicast messages on the LAN only.
All UPnP-enabled devices may communicate freely with each other without additional configuration.
Disable UPnP if this is not your intention.
UPnP and ZyXEL
ZyXEL has achieved UPnP certification from the Universal Plug and Play Forum UPnP™
Implementers Corp. (UIC). ZyXEL's UPnP implementation supports Internet Gateway Device (IGD)
1.0.
See Section 7.5 on page 109 for examples of installing and using UPnP.
Finding Out More
See Section 7.10 on page 120 for technical background information on LANs.
7.1.3 Before You Begin
Find out the MAC addresses of your network devices if you intend to add them to the DHCP Client
List screen.
7.2 The LAN Setup Screen
Use this screen to set the Local Area Network IP address and subnet mask of your Device. Click
N e t w or k Se t t ing > H om e N e t w or k ing to open the LAN Se t up screen.
Follow these steps to configure your LAN settings.
Enter an IP address into the I P Addr e ss field. The IP address must be in dotted decimal notation.
This will become the IP address of your Device.
Enter the IP subnet mask into the I P Su bn e t M a sk field. Unless instructed otherwise it is best to
leave this alone, the configurator will automatically compute a subnet mask based upon the IP
address you entered.
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
103
Chapter 7 Home Networking
Click Apply to save your settings.
Figure 51 Network Setting > Home Networking > LAN Setup
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 31 Network Setting > Home Networking > LAN Setup
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Interface Group
Group Name
Select the interface group name for which you want to configure LAN settings. See Chapter
12 on page 171 for how to create a new interface group.
LAN IP Setup
IP Address
Enter the LAN IP address you want to assign to your Device in dotted decimal notation, for
example, 192.168.1.1 (factory default).
Subnet Mask
Type the subnet mask of your network in dotted decimal notation, for example
255.255.255.0 (factory default). Your Device automatically computes the subnet mask
based on the IP Address you enter, so do not change this field unless you are instructed to
do so.
IGMP Snooping
Status
104
Select the En a ble I GM P Sn ooping check box to allows the Device to passively learn
multicast group.
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
Chapter 7 Home Networking
Table 31 Network Setting > Home Networking > LAN Setup (continued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
IGMP Mode
Select St a n da r d M ode to have the Device forward multicast packets to a port that joins the
multicast group and broadcast unknown multicast packets from the WAN to all LAN ports.
Select Block ing M ode to have the Device block all unknown multicast packets from the
WAN.
DHCP Server State
DHCP
Select En a ble to have the Device act as a DHCP server or DHCP relay agent.
Select D isa ble to stop the DHCP server on the Device.
Select D H CP Re la y to have the Device forward DHCP request to the DHCP server.
DHCP Relay
Server Address
This field is only available when you select D H CP Re la y in the D H CP field.
IP Address
Enter the IP address of the actual remote DHCP server in this field.
IP Addressing
Values
This field is only available when you select En a ble in the D H CP field.
Beginning IP
Address
This field specifies the first of the contiguous addresses in the IP address pool.
Ending IP
Address
This field specifies the last of the contiguous addresses in the IP address pool.
DHCP Server
Lease Time
This is the period of time DHCP-assigned addresses is used. DHCP automatically assigns IP
addresses to clients when they log in. DHCP centralizes IP address management on central
computers that run the DHCP server program. DHCP leases addresses, for a period of time,
which means that past addresses are “recycled” and made available for future reassignment
to other systems.
This field is only available when you select En a ble in the D H CP field.
Days/Hours/
Minutes
Enter the lease time of the DHCP server.
DNS Values
This field is only available when you select En a ble in the D H CP field.
DNS
Specify which DNS server addresses the Device sends to LAN DHCP clients.
Select D yn a m ic to have the DHCP clients use the Device’s LAN IP address as the DNS
server address so the Device acts as a proxy for DNS queries.
Select St a t ic to manually enter DNS server addresses.
Select Obt a in e d fr om I SP to use the DNS server IP addresses the Device’s WAN
connection uses.
DNS Server 1
DNS Server 2
Enter the first and second DNS (Domain Name System) server IP address the Device passes
to the DHCP clients.
LAN IPv6 Mode Setup
IPv6 State
Select Ena ble to activate the IPv6 mode and configure IPv6 settings on the Device.
LAN IPv6 Address Setup
Delegate prefix
from WAN
Select this option to automatically obtain an IPv6 network prefix from the service provider
or an uplink router.
Static
Select this option to configure a fixed IPv6 address for the Device’s LAN IPv6 address.
ULA PseudoRandom Global
ID
A unique local address (ULA) is a unique IPv6 address for use in private networks but not
routable in the global IPv6 Internet.
Select this to have the Device automatically generate a globally unique address for the LAN
IPv6 address. The address format is like fdxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx::/64.
ULA IPv6 Address Setup
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
105
Chapter 7 Home Networking
Table 31 Network Setting > Home Networking > LAN Setup (continued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
IPv6 Address
If you select static IPv6 address, enter the IPv6 address prefix that the Device uses for the
LAN IPv6 address.
Prefix Length
If you select static IPv6 address, enter the IPv6 prefix length that the Device uses to
generate the LAN IPv6 address.
An IPv6 prefix length specifies how many most significant bits (starting from the left) in the
address compose the network address. This field displays the bit number of the IPv6 subnet
mask.
MLD Snooping
Multicast Listener Discovery (MLD) allows an IPv6 switch or router to discover the presence
of MLD hosts who wish to receive multicast packets and the IP addresses of multicast
groups the hosts want to join on its network. Select En a ble M LD Sn oopin g to activate MLD
snooping on the Device. This allows the Device to check MLD packets passing through it and
learn the multicast group membership. It helps reduce multicast traffic.
MLD Mode
Select St a n da r d M ode to have the Device forward IPv6 multicast packets to a port that
joins the IPv6 multicast group and broadcast unknown IPv6 multicast packets from the WAN
to all LAN ports.
Select Block ing M ode to have the Device block all unknown IPv6 multicast packets from
the WAN.
LAN IPv6
Address Assign
Setup
Select how you want to obtain an IPv6 address:
•
•
•
•
st a t e le ss + D N S se n d by RAD VD : The Device uses IPv6 stateless autoconfiguration.
RADVD (Router Advertisement Daemon) is enabled to have the Device send IPv6 prefix
information in router advertisements periodically and in response to router solicitations.
DHCPv6 server is disabled. (See page 102 for more information on RADVD.)
st a t e le ss + D N S se n d by D H CPv6 : The Device uses IPv6 stateless autoconfiguration.
The DNS is provided by a DHCPv6 server.
st a t e fu l + D H CPv6 se r ve r : The Device uses IPv6 stateful autoconfiguration. The
DHCPv6 server is enabled to have the Device act as a DHCPv6 server and pass IPv6
addresses, DNS server and domain name information to DHCPv6 clients.
st a t e fu l + D H CPv6 r e la y: The Device uses IPv6 stateful autoconfiguration. D H CPv6
Re la y is enabled to have the Device relay client DHCPv6 requests.
DHCPv6 Configuration
DHCPv6 State
This shows the status of the DHCPv6.
IPv6 DNS Values
IPv6 DNS
Server 1-3
Select Fr om I SP if your ISP dynamically assigns IPv6 DNS server information.
Select Use r - D e fin e d if you have the IPv6 address of a DNS server. Enter the DNS server
IPv6 addresses the Device passes to the DHCP clients.
Select N on e if you do not want to configure IPv6 DNS servers.
IPv6 Address Values
IPv6 Start
Address
If DHCPv6 is enabled, specify the first IPv6 address in the pool of addresses that can be
assigned to DHCPv6 clients.
IPv6 End
Address
If DHCPv6 is enabled, specify the last IPv6 address in the pool of addresses that can be
assigned to DHCPv6 clients.
IPv6 Domain
Name
If DHCPv6 is enabled, specify the domain name to be assigned to DHCPv6 clients.
IPv6 Router Advertisement State
106
RADVD State
This shows the status of RADVD.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel
Click Ca n ce l to restore your previously saved settings.
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
Chapter 7 Home Networking
7.3 The Static DHCP Screen
This table allows you to assign IP addresses on the LAN to specific individual computers based on
their MAC Addresses.
Every Ethernet device has a unique MAC (Media Access Control) address. The MAC address is
assigned at the factory and consists of six pairs of hexadecimal characters, for example,
00:A0:C5:00:00:02.
Use this screen to change your Device’s static DHCP settings. Click N e t w or k Se t t in g > H om e
N e t w or k in g > St a t ic D H CP to open the following screen.
Figure 52 Network Setting > Home Networking > Static DHCP
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 32 Network Setting > Home Networking > Static DHCP
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Add new static
lease
Click this to add a new static DHCP entry.
This is the index number of the entry.
Status
This field displays whether the client is connected to the Device.
MAC Address
The MAC (Media Access Control) or Ethernet address on a LAN (Local Area Network) is
unique to your computer (six pairs of hexadecimal notation).
A network interface card such as an Ethernet adapter has a hardwired address that is
assigned at the factory. This address follows an industry standard that ensures no other
adapter has a similar address.
IP Address
This field displays the IP address relative to the # field listed above.
Modify/Delete
Click the Edit icon to have the IP address field editable and change it.
Click the D e le t e icon to delete a static DHCP entry. A window displays asking you to
confirm that you want to delete the selected entry.
If you click Add ne w st a t ic le a se in the St a t ic D H CP screen or the Edit icon next to a static DHCP
entry, the following screen displays.
Figure 53 Static DHCP: Add/Edit
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
107
Chapter 7 Home Networking
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 33 Static DHCP: Add/Edit
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Active
Select this to activate the connection between the client and the Device.
Group Name
Select the interface group name for which you want to configure static DHCP settings.
See Chapter 12 on page 171 for how to create a new interface group.
Select Device Info
If you select M a nu a l I nput , you can manually type in the MAC address and IP address of
a computer on your LAN. You can also choose the name of a computer from the drop list
and have the MAC Address and IP address auto-detected.
MAC Address
If you select M a n u a l I n pu t , enter the MAC address of a computer on your LAN.
IP Address
If you select M a n u a l I n pu t , enter the IP address that you want to assign to the
computer on your LAN with the MAC address that you will also specify.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel
Click Ca n ce l to exit this screen without saving.
7.4 The UPnP Screen
Universal Plug and Play (UPnP) is a distributed, open networking standard that uses TCP/IP for
simple peer-to-peer network connectivity between devices. A UPnP device can dynamically join a
network, obtain an IP address, convey its capabilities and learn about other devices on the network.
In turn, a device can leave a network smoothly and automatically when it is no longer in use.
See page 102 for more information on UPnP.
Use the following screen to configure the UPnP settings on your Device. Click N e t w or k Se t t in g >
H om e N e t w or k ing > UPn P to display the screen shown next.
Figure 54 Network Setting > Home Networking > UPnP
108
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
Chapter 7 Home Networking
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 34 Network Setting > Home Networking > UPnP
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
UPnP
Select En a ble to activate UPnP. Be aware that anyone could use a UPnP application to open
the web configurator's login screen without entering the Device's IP address (although you
must still enter the password to access the web configurator).
UPnP NAT-T
Select En a ble to allow UPnP-enabled applications to automatically configure the Device so
that they can communicate through the Device by using NAT traversal. UPnP applications
automatically reserve a NAT forwarding port in order to communicate with another UPnP
enabled device; this eliminates the need to manually configure port forwarding for the UPnP
enabled application.
This is the index number of the UPnP NAT-T connection.
Description
This is the description of the UPnP NAT-T connection.
IP Address
This is the IP address of the other connected UPnP enabled device.
External Port
This is the external port number that identifies the service.
Internal Port
This is the internal port number that identifies the service.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel
Click Ca n ce l to exit this screen without saving.
The table below displays the NAT port forwarding rules added automatically by UPnP NAT-T.
7.5 Installing UPnP in Windows Example
This section shows how to install UPnP in Windows Me and Windows XP.
Installing UPnP in Windows Me
Follow the steps below to install the UPnP in Windows Me.
Click St a r t and Cont r ol Pa ne l. Double-click Add/ Re m ove Pr ogr a m s.
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
109
Chapter 7 Home Networking
Click on the W indow s Se t up tab and select Com m u n ica t ion in the Com pone n t s selection box.
Click D e t a ils.
Add/Remove Programs: Windows Setup: Communication
In the Com m unica t ions window, select the Un ive r sa l Plug a n d Pla y check box in the
Com pone nt s selection box.
Add/Remove Programs: Windows Setup: Communication: Components
110
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
Chapter 7 Home Networking
Click OK to go back to the Add/ Re m ove Pr ogr a m s Pr ope r t ie s window and click N e x t .
Restart the computer when prompted.
Installing UPnP in Windows XP
Follow the steps below to install the UPnP in Windows XP.
Click St a r t and Con t r ol Pa n e l.
Double-click N e t w or k Conne ct ions.
In the N e t w or k Conne ct ions window, click Adva n ce d in the main menu and select Opt iona l
N e t w or k in g Com pon e n t s ….
Network Connections
The W in dow s Opt ion a l N e t w or k in g Com pon e n t s W iza r d window displays. Select N e t w or k in g
Se r vice in the Com pon e n t s selection box and click D e t a ils.
Windows Optional Networking Components Wizard
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
111
Chapter 7 Home Networking
In the N e t w or k ing Se r vice s window, select the Unive r sa l Plug a nd Pla y check box.
Networking Services
Click OK to go back to the W indow s Opt ion a l N e t w or k ing Com pone nt W iz a r d window and
click N e x t .
7.6 Using UPnP in Windows XP Example
This section shows you how to use the UPnP feature in Windows XP. You must already have UPnP
installed in Windows XP and UPnP activated on the Device.
Make sure the computer is connected to a LAN port of the Device. Turn on your computer and the
Device.
Auto-discover Your UPnP-enabled Network Device
112
Click St a r t and Con t r ol Pa n e l. Double-click N e t w or k Con ne ct ion s. An icon displays under
Internet Gateway.
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
Chapter 7 Home Networking
Right-click the icon and select Pr ope r t ie s.
Network Connections
In the I nt e r ne t Conne ct ion Pr ope r t ie s window, click Se t t ings to see the port mappings there
were automatically created.
Internet Connection Properties
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
113
Chapter 7 Home Networking
You may edit or delete the port mappings or click Add to manually add port mappings.
Internet Connection Properties: Advanced Settings
Internet Connection Properties: Advanced Settings: Add
When the UPnP-enabled device is disconnected from your computer, all port mappings will be
deleted automatically.
Select Sh ow icon in not ifica t ion a r e a w he n conn e ct e d option and click OK. An icon displays in
the system tray.
System Tray Icon
114
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
Chapter 7 Home Networking
Double-click on the icon to display your current Internet connection status.
Internet Connection Status
Web Configurator Easy Access
With UPnP, you can access the web-based configurator on the Device without finding out the IP
address of the Device first. This comes helpful if you do not know the IP address of the Device.
Follow the steps below to access the web configurator.
Click St a r t and then Cont r ol Pa ne l.
Double-click N e t w or k Conne ct ions.
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
115
Chapter 7 Home Networking
Select M y N e t w or k Pla ce s under Ot h e r Pla ce s.
Network Connections
An icon with the description for each UPnP-enabled device displays under Loca l N e t w or k .
Right-click on the icon for your Device and select I n vok e . The web configurator login screen
displays.
Network Connections: My Network Places
116
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
Chapter 7 Home Networking
Right-click on the icon for your Device and select Pr ope r t ie s. A properties window displays with
basic information about the Device.
Network Connections: My Network Places: Properties: Example
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
117
Chapter 7 Home Networking
7.7 The Additional Subnet Screen
Use the Addit iona l Su bne t screen to configure IP alias and public static IP.
IP alias allows you to partition a physical network into different logical networks over the same
Ethernet interface. The Device supports multiple logical LAN interfaces via its physical Ethernet
interface with the Device itself as the gateway for the LAN network. When you use IP alias, you can
also configure firewall rules to control access to the LAN's logical network (subnet).
If your ISP provides the Public LAN service, the Device may use an LAN IP address that can be
accessed from the WAN.
Click N e t w or k Se t t in g > H om e N e t w or k ing > Addit ion a l Subn e t to display the screen shown
next.
Figure 55 Network Setting > Home Networking > Additional Subnet
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 35 Network Setting > Home Networking > Additional Subnet
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
IP Alias Setup
Group Name
Select the interface group name for which you want to configure the IP alias settings. See
Chapter 12 on page 171 for how to create a new interface group.
Active
Select the check box to configure a LAN network for the Device.
IP Address
Enter the IP address of your Device in dotted decimal notation.
IP Subnet Mask
Your Device will automatically calculate the subnet mask based on the IP address that you
assign. Unless you are implementing subnetting, use the subnet mask computed by the
Device.
Public LAN
118
Active
Select the checkbox to enable the Public LAN feature. Your ISP must support Public LAN and
Static IP.
IP Address
Enter the public IP address provided by your ISP.
IP Subnet Mask
Enter the public IP subnet mask provided by your ISP.
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
Chapter 7 Home Networking
Table 35 Network Setting > Home Networking > Additional Subnet (continued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Offer Public IP
by DHCP
Select the check box to enable the Device to provide public IP addresses by DHCP server.
Enable ARP
Proxy
Select the check box to enable the ARP (Address Resolution Protocol) proxy.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel
Click Ca n ce l to exit this screen without saving.
7.8 The STB Vendor ID Screen
Set Top Box (STB) devices with dynamic IP addresses sometimes don’t renew their IP addresses
before the lease time expires. This could lead to IP address conflicts if the STB continues to use an
IP address that gets assigned to another device. Use this screen to list the Vendor IDs of connected
STBs to have the Device automatically create static DHCP entries for them when they request IP
addresses.
Click N e t w or k Se t t in g > H om e N e t w or k in g > STB Ve ndor I D to open this screen.
Figure 56 Network Setting > Home Networking > STB Vendor ID
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 36 Network Setting > Home Networking > STB Vendor ID
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Vendor ID 1 ~
Enter the STB’s vendor ID.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel
Click Ca n ce l to exit this screen without saving.
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
119
Chapter 7 Home Networking
7.9 The LAN VLAN Screen
Click N e t w or k Se t t ing > H om e N e t w or k in g > LAN VLAN to open this screen. Use this screen to
control the VLAN ID and IEEE 802.1p priority tags of traffic sent out through individual LAN ports.
Figure 57 Network Setting > Home Networking > LAN VLAN
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 37 Network Setting > Home Networking > LAN VLAN
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Lan Port
These represent the Device’s LAN ports.
Tag Operation
Select what you want the Device to do to the IEEE 802.1q VLAN ID and priority tags of
downstream traffic before sending it out through this LAN port.
•
•
•
•
Un ch a n ge - Don’t do anything to the traffic’s VLAN ID and priority tags.
Add - Add VLAN ID and priority tags to untagged traffic.
Re m ove - Delete one tag from tagged traffic. If the frame has double tags, this removes
the outer tag. This does not affect untagged traffic.
Re m a r k - Change the value of the outer VLAN ID and priority tags.
802.1P Mark
Use this option to set what to do for the IEEE 802.1p priority tags when you add or remark
the tags for a LAN port’s downstream traffic. Either select Un ch a n ge to not modify the
traffic’s priority tags or select an priority from 0 to 7 to use. The larger the number, the
higher the priority.
VLAN ID
If you will add or remark tags for this LAN port’s downstream traffic, specify the VLAN ID
(from 0 to 4094) to use here.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel
Click Ca n ce l to exit this screen without saving.
7.10 Technical Reference
This section provides some technical background information about the topics covered in this
chapter.
120
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
Chapter 7 Home Networking
7.10.1 LANs, WANs and the Device
The actual physical connection determines whether the Device ports are LAN or WAN ports. There
are two separate IP networks, one inside the LAN network and the other outside the WAN network
as shown next.
Figure 58 LAN and WAN IP Addresses
LAN
WAN
7.10.2 DHCP Setup
DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol, RFC 2131 and RFC 2132) allows individual clients to
obtain TCP/IP configuration at start-up from a server. You can configure the Device as a DHCP
server or disable it. When configured as a server, the Device provides the TCP/IP configuration for
the clients. If you turn DHCP service off, you must have another DHCP server on your LAN, or else
the computer must be manually configured.
IP Pool Setup
The Device is pre-configured with a pool of IP addresses for the DHCP clients (DHCP Pool). See the
product specifications in the appendices. Do not assign static IP addresses from the DHCP pool to
your LAN computers.
7.10.3 DNS Server Addresses
DNS (Domain Name System) maps a domain name to its corresponding IP address and vice versa.
The DNS server is extremely important because without it, you must know the IP address of a
computer before you can access it. The DNS server addresses you enter when you set up DHCP are
passed to the client machines along with the assigned IP address and subnet mask.
There are two ways that an ISP disseminates the DNS server addresses.
• The ISP tells you the DNS server addresses, usually in the form of an information sheet, when
you sign up. If your ISP gives you DNS server addresses, enter them in the D N S Se r ve r fields in
the D H CP Se t up screen.
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
121
Chapter 7 Home Networking
• Some ISPs choose to disseminate the DNS server addresses using the DNS server extensions of
IPCP (IP Control Protocol) after the connection is up. If your ISP did not give you explicit DNS
servers, chances are the DNS servers are conveyed through IPCP negotiation. The Device
supports the IPCP DNS server extensions through the DNS proxy feature.
Please note that DNS proxy works only when the ISP uses the IPCP DNS server extensions. It
does not mean you can leave the DNS servers out of the DHCP setup under all circumstances. If
your ISP gives you explicit DNS servers, make sure that you enter their IP addresses in the
D H CP Se t up screen.
7.10.4 LAN TCP/IP
The Device has built-in DHCP server capability that assigns IP addresses and DNS servers to
systems that support DHCP client capability.
IP Address and Subnet Mask
Similar to the way houses on a street share a common street name, so too do computers on a LAN
share one common network number.
Where you obtain your network number depends on your particular situation. If the ISP or your
network administrator assigns you a block of registered IP addresses, follow their instructions in
selecting the IP addresses and the subnet mask.
If the ISP did not explicitly give you an IP network number, then most likely you have a single user
account and the ISP will assign you a dynamic IP address when the connection is established. If this
is the case, it is recommended that you select a network number from 192.168.0.0 to
192.168.255.0 and you must enable the Network Address Translation (NAT) feature of the Device.
The Internet Assigned Number Authority (IANA) reserved this block of addresses specifically for
private use; please do not use any other number unless you are told otherwise. Let's say you select
192.168.1.0 as the network number; which covers 254 individual addresses, from 192.168.1.1 to
192.168.1.254 (zero and 255 are reserved). In other words, the first three numbers specify the
network number while the last number identifies an individual computer on that network.
Once you have decided on the network number, pick an IP address that is easy to remember, for
instance, 192.168.1.1, for your Device, but make sure that no other device on your network is
using that IP address.
The subnet mask specifies the network number portion of an IP address. Your Device will compute
the subnet mask automatically based on the IP address that you entered. You don't need to change
the subnet mask computed by the Device unless you are instructed to do otherwise.
Private IP Addresses
Every machine on the Internet must have a unique address. If your networks are isolated from the
Internet, for example, only between your two branch offices, you can assign any IP addresses to
the hosts without problems. However, the Internet Assigned Numbers Authority (IANA) has
reserved the following three blocks of IP addresses specifically for private networks:
• 10.0.0.0
• 172.16.0.0
— 10.255.255.255
— 172.31.255.255
• 192.168.0.0 — 192.168.255.255
122
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
Chapter 7 Home Networking
You can obtain your IP address from the IANA, from an ISP or it can be assigned from a private
network. If you belong to a small organization and your Internet access is through an ISP, the ISP
can provide you with the Internet addresses for your local networks. On the other hand, if you are
part of a much larger organization, you should consult your network administrator for the
appropriate IP addresses.
Note: Regardless of your particular situation, do not create an arbitrary IP address;
always follow the guidelines above. For more information on address assignment,
please refer to RFC 1597, “Address Allocation for Private Internets” and RFC 1466,
“Guidelines for Management of IP Address Space”.
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
123
Chapter 7 Home Networking
124
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
C HAPT ER
Routing
8.1 Overview
The Device usually uses the default gateway to route outbound traffic from computers on the LAN
to the Internet. To have the Device send data to devices not reachable through the default gateway,
use static routes.
For example, the next figure shows a computer (A) connected to the Device’s LAN interface. The
Device routes most traffic from A to the Internet through the Device’s default gateway (R1 ). You
create one static route to connect to services offered by your ISP behind router R2 . You create
another static route to communicate with a separate network behind a router R3 connected to the
LAN.
Figure 59 Example of Routing Topology
R1
LAN
WAN
R3
R2
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
125
Chapter 8 Routing
8.2 The Routing Screen
Use this screen to view and configure the static route rules on the Device. Click N e t w or k Se t t ing
> Rou t in g > St a t ic Rou t e to open the following screen.
Figure 60 Network Setting > Routing > Static Route
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 38 Network Setting > Routing > Static Route
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Add new static
route
Click this to configure a new static route.
This is the index number of the entry.
Status
This field displays whether the static route is active or not. A yellow bulb signifies that this
route is active. A gray bulb signifies that this route is not active.
Name
This is the name that describes or identifies this route.
Destination IP
This parameter specifies the IP network address of the final destination. Routing is always
based on network number.
Subnet Mask/
Prefix Length
This parameter specifies the IP network subnet mask of the final destination.
Gateway
This is the IP address of the gateway. The gateway is a router or switch on the same
network segment as the device's LAN or WAN port. The gateway helps forward packets to
their destinations.
Interface
This is the WAN interface used for this static route.
Modify/Delete
Click the Edit icon to edit the static route on the Device.
Click the D e le t e icon to remove a static route from the Device. A window displays asking
you to confirm that you want to delete the route.
126
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
Chapter 8 Routing
8.2.1 Add/Edit Static Route
Use this screen to add or edit a static route. Click Add n e w st a t ic r ou t e in the Rout ing screen or
the Edit icon next to the static route you want to edit. The screen shown next appears.
Figure 61 Routing: Add/Edit
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 39 Routing: Add/Edit
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Active
This field allows you to activate/deactivate this static route.
Select this to enable the static route. Clear this to disable this static route without having to
delete the entry.
Route Name
Enter a descriptive name for the static route.
IP Type
Select whether your IP type is I Pv4 or I Pv6 .
Destination IP
Address
Enter the IPv4 or IPv6 network address of the final destination.
IP Subnet Mask
If you are using IPv4 and need to specify a route to a single host, use a subnet mask of
255.255.255.255 in the subnet mask field to force the network number to be identical to
the host ID. Enter the IP subnet mask here.
Use Gateway IP
Address
The gateway is a router or switch on the same network segment as the device's LAN or WAN
port. The gateway helps forward packets to their destinations.
If you want to use the gateway IP address, select Ena ble .
Gateway IP
Address
Enter the IP address of the gateway.
Use Interface
Select the WAN interface you want to use for this static route.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel
Click Ca n ce l to exit this screen without saving.
8.3 The Policy Forwarding Screen
Traditionally, routing is based on the destination address only and the Device takes the shortest
path to forward a packet. Policy forwarding allows the Device to override the default routing
behavior and alter the packet forwarding based on the policy defined by the network administrator.
Policy-based routing is applied to outgoing packets, prior to the normal routing.
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
127
Chapter 8 Routing
You can use source-based policy forwarding to direct traffic from different users through different
connections or distribute traffic among multiple paths for load sharing.
The Policy For w a r din g screen let you view and configure routing policies on the Device. Click
N e t w or k Se t t ing > Rout ing > Policy For w a r ding to open the following screen.
Figure 62 Network Setting > Routing > Policy Forwarding
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 40 Network Setting > Routing >Policy Forwarding
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Add new Policy
Forward Rule
Click this to create a new policy forwarding rule.
This is the index number of the entry.
Policy Name
This is the name of the rule.
Source IP
This is the source IP address.
Source Subnet
Mask
his is the source subnet mask address.
Protocol
This is the transport layer protocol.
Source Port
This is the source port number.
WAN
This is the WAN interface through which the traffic is routed.
Modify/Delete
Click the Edit icon to edit this policy.
Click the D e le t e icon to remove a policy from the Device. A window displays asking you to
confirm that you want to delete the policy.
128
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
Chapter 8 Routing
8.3.1 Add/Edit Policy Forwarding
Click Add ne w Policy For w a r d Rule in the Policy For w a r din g screen or click the Edit icon next
to a policy. Use this screen to configure the required information for a policy route.
Figure 63 Policy Forwarding: Add/Edit
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 41 Policy Forwarding: Add/Edit
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Policy Name
Enter a descriptive name of up to 8 printable English keyboard characters, not including
spaces.
Source IP
Enter the source IP address.
Source Subnet
Mask
Enter the source subnet mask address.
Protocol
Select the transport layer protocol (TCP or UD P).
Source Port
Enter the source port number.
Source MAC
Enter the source MAC address.
WAN
Select a WAN interface through which the traffic is sent. You must have the WAN
interface(s) already configured in the Br oa dba n d screens.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel
Click Ca n ce l to exit this screen without saving.
8.4 RIP
Routing Information Protocol (RIP, RFC 1058 and RFC 1389) allows a device to exchange routing
information with other routers.
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
129
Chapter 8 Routing
8.4.1 The RIP Screen
Click N e t w or k Se t t ing > Rout ing > RI P to open the RI P screen.
Figure 64 RIP
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 42 RIP
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
This is the index of the interface in which the RIP setting is used.
Interface
This is the name of the interface in which the RIP setting is used.
Version
The RIP version controls the format and the broadcasting method of the RIP
packets that the Device sends (it recognizes both formats when receiving). RIP
version 1 is universally supported but RIP version 2 carries more information. RIP
version 1 is probably adequate for most networks, unless you have an unusual
network topology.
Operation
Select Pa ssive to have the Device update the routing table based on the RIP
packets received from neighbors but not advertise its route information to other
routers in this interface.
Select Act ive to have the Device advertise its route information and also listen for
routing updates from neighboring routers.
130
Enabled
Select the check box to activate the settings.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes back to the Device.
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
C HAPT ER
Quality of Service (QoS)
9.1 Overview
Quality of Service (QoS) refers to both a network’s ability to deliver data with minimum delay, and
the networking methods used to control the use of bandwidth. Without QoS, all traffic data is
equally likely to be dropped when the network is congested. This can cause a reduction in network
performance and make the network inadequate for time-critical application such as video-ondemand.
Configure QoS on the Device to group and prioritize application traffic and fine-tune network
performance. Setting up QoS involves these steps:
Configure classifiers to sort traffic into different flows.
Assign priority and define actions to be performed for a classified traffic flow.
The Device assigns each packet a priority and then queues the packet accordingly. Packets assigned
a high priority are processed more quickly than those with low priority if there is congestion,
allowing time-sensitive applications to flow more smoothly. Time-sensitive applications include both
those that require a low level of latency (delay) and a low level of jitter (variations in delay) such as
Voice over IP (VoIP) or Internet gaming, and those for which jitter alone is a problem such as
Internet radio or streaming video.
This chapter contains information about configuring QoS and editing classifiers.
9.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
• The Ge n e r a l screen lets you enable or disable QoS and set the upstream bandwidth (Section 9.3
on page 133).
• The Que ue Se t up screen lets you configure QoS queue assignment (Section 9.4 on page 134).
• The Cla ss Se t up screen lets you add, edit or delete QoS classifiers (Section 9.5 on page 136).
• The Police r Se t u p screen lets you add, edit or delete QoS policers (Section 9.5 on page 136).
• The M on it or screen lets you view the Device's QoS-related packet statistics (Section 9.7 on page
143).
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
131
Chapter 9 Quality of Service (QoS)
9.2 What You Need to Know
The following terms and concepts may help as you read through this chapter.
QoS versus Cos
QoS is used to prioritize source-to-destination traffic flows. All packets in the same flow are given
the same priority. CoS (class of service) is a way of managing traffic in a network by grouping
similar types of traffic together and treating each type as a class. You can use CoS to give different
priorities to different packet types.
CoS technologies include IEEE 802.1p layer 2 tagging and DiffServ (Differentiated Services or DS).
IEEE 802.1p tagging makes use of three bits in the packet header, while DiffServ is a new protocol
and defines a new DS field, which replaces the eight-bit ToS (Type of Service) field in the IP header.
Tagging and Marking
In a QoS class, you can configure whether to add or change the DSCP (DiffServ Code Point) value,
IEEE 802.1p priority level and VLAN ID number in a matched packet. When the packet passes
through a compatible network, the networking device, such as a backbone switch, can provide
specific treatment or service based on the tag or marker.
Traffic Shaping
Bursty traffic may cause network congestion. Traffic shaping regulates packets to be transmitted
with a pre-configured data transmission rate using buffers (or queues). Your Device uses the Token
Bucket algorithm to allow a certain amount of large bursts while keeping a limit at the average rate.
Time
(Before Traffic Shaping)
132
Traffic Rate
Traffic
Traffic
Traffic Rate
Time
(After Traffic Shaping)
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
Chapter 9 Quality of Service (QoS)
Traffic Policing
Traffic policing is the limiting of the input or output transmission rate of a class of traffic on the
basis of user-defined criteria. Traffic policing methods measure traffic flows against user-defined
criteria and identify it as either conforming, exceeding or violating the criteria.
Traffic Rate
Traffic
Traffic
Traffic Rate
Time
(Before Traffic Policing)
Time
(After Traffic Policing)
The Device supports three incoming traffic metering algorithms: Token Bucket Filter (TBF), Single
Rate Two Color Maker (srTCM), and Two Rate Two Color Marker (trTCM). You can specify actions
which are performed on the colored packets. See Section 9.8 on page 144 for more information on
each metering algorithm.
9.3 The Quality of Service General Screen
Click N e t w or k Se t t in g > QoS > Ge ne r a l to open the screen as shown next.
Use this screen to enable or disable QoS and set the upstream bandwidth. See Section 9.1 on page
131 for more information.
Figure 65 Network Settings > QoS > General
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
133
Chapter 9 Quality of Service (QoS)
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 43 Network Setting > QoS > General
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
QoS
Select the Ena ble check box to turn on QoS to improve your network performance.
WAN Managed
Upstream
Bandwidth
Enter the amount of upstream bandwidth for the WAN interfaces that you want to allocate
using QoS.
The recommendation is to set this speed to match the interfaces’ actual transmission speed.
For example, set the WAN interfaces’ speed to 100000 kbps if your Internet connection has
an upstream transmission speed of 100 Mbps.
You can set this number higher than the interfaces’ actual transmission speed. The Device
uses up to 95% of the DSL port’s actual upstream transmission speed even if you set this
number higher than the DSL port’s actual transmission speed.
You can also set this number lower than the interfaces’ actual transmission speed. This will
cause the Device to not use some of the interfaces’ available bandwidth.
If you leave this field blank, the Device automatically sets this number to be 95% of the
WAN interfaces’ actual upstream transmission speed.
LAN Managed
Downstream
Bandwidth
Enter the amount of downstream bandwidth for the LAN interfaces (including WLAN) that
you want to allocate using QoS.
The recommendation is to set this speed to match the WAN interfaces’ actual transmission
speed. For example, set the LAN managed downstream bandwidth to 100000 kbps if you
use a 100 Mbps wired Ethernet WAN connection.
You can also set this number lower than the WAN interfaces’ actual transmission speed. This
will cause the Device to not use some of the interfaces’ available bandwidth.
If you leave this field blank, the Device automatically sets this to the LAN interfaces’
maximum supported connection speed.
Upstream
traffic priority
Assigned by
Select how the Device assigns priorities to various upstream traffic flows.
•
•
•
•
N on e : Disables auto priority mapping and has the Device put packets into the queues
according to your classification rules. Traffic which does not match any of the
classification rules is mapped into the default queue with the lowest priority.
Et h e r n e t Pr ior it y: Automatically assign priority based on the IEEE 802.1p priority level.
I P Pr e ce de n ce : Automatically assign priority based on the first three bits of the TOS
field in the IP header.
Pa ck e t Le n gt h : Automatically assign priority based on the packet size. Smaller packets
get higher priority since control, signaling, VoIP, internet gaming, or other real-time
packets are usually small while larger packets are usually best effort data packets like
file transfers.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel
Click Ca n ce l to restore your previously saved settings.
9.4 The Queue Setup Screen
Click N e t w or k Se t t in g > QoS > Qu e ue Se t u p to open the screen as shown next.
134
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
Chapter 9 Quality of Service (QoS)
Use this screen to configure QoS queue assignment.
Figure 66 Network Setting > QoS > Queue Setup
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 44 Network Setting > QoS > Queue Setup
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Add new Queue
Click this button to create a new queue entry.
This is the index number of the entry.
Status
This field displays whether the queue is active or not. A yellow bulb signifies that this queue
is active. A gray bulb signifies that this queue is not active.
Name
This shows the descriptive name of this queue.
Interface
This shows the name of the Device’s interface through which traffic in this queue passes.
Priority
This shows the priority of this queue.
Weight
This shows the weight of this queue.
Buffer
Management
This shows the queue management algorithm used for this queue.
Rate Limit
This shows the maximum transmission rate allowed for traffic on this queue.
Modify/Delete
Click the Edit icon to edit the queue.
Queue management algorithms determine how the Device should handle packets when it
receives too many (network congestion).
Click the D e le t e icon to delete an existing queue. Note that subsequent rules move up by
one when you take this action.
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
135
Chapter 9 Quality of Service (QoS)
9.4.1 Adding a QoS Queue
Click Add ne w Qu e u e or the edit icon in the Que ue Se t up screen to configure a queue.
Figure 67 Queue Setup: Add
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 45 Queue Setup: Add
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Active
Select to enable or disable this queue.
Name
Enter the descriptive name of this queue.
Interface
Select the interface to which this queue is applied.
This field is read-only if you are editing the queue.
Priority
Select the priority level (from 1 to 7) of this queue.
The smaller the number, the higher the priority level. Traffic assigned to higher priority
queues gets through faster while traffic in lower priority queues is dropped if the network is
congested.
Weight
Select the weight (from 1 to 8) of this queue.
If two queues have the same priority level, the Device divides the bandwidth across the
queues according to their weights. Queues with larger weights get more bandwidth than
queues with smaller weights.
Buffer
Management
This field displays D r op Ta il ( D T) . D r op Ta il ( D T) is a simple queue management
algorithm that allows the Device buffer to accept as many packets as it can until it is full.
Once the buffer is full, new packets that arrive are dropped until there is space in the buffer
again (packets are transmitted out of it).
Rate Limit
Specify the maximum transmission rate (in Kbps) allowed for traffic on this queue.
OK
Click OK to save your changes.
Cancel
Click Ca n ce l to exit this screen without saving.
9.5 The Class Setup Screen
Use this screen to add, edit or delete QoS classifiers. A classifier groups traffic into data flows
according to specific criteria such as the source address, destination address, source port number,
136
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
Chapter 9 Quality of Service (QoS)
destination port number or incoming interface. For example, you can configure a classifier to select
traffic from the same protocol port (such as Telnet) to form a flow.
You can give different priorities to traffic that the Device forwards out through the WAN interface.
Give high priority to voice and video to make them run more smoothly. Similarly, give low priority
to many large file downloads so that they do not reduce the quality of other applications.
Click N e t w or k Se t t in g > QoS > Cla ss Se t u p to open the following screen.
Figure 68 Network Setting > QoS > Class Setup
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 46 Network Setting > QoS > Class Setup
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Add new Classifier
Click this to create a new classifier.
This is the index number of the entry.
Status
This field displays whether the classifier is active or not. A yellow bulb signifies that this
classifier is active. A gray bulb signifies that this classifier is not active.
Class Name
This is the name of the classifier.
Classification
Criteria
This shows criteria specified in this classifier, for example the interface from which
traffic of this class should come and the source MAC address of traffic that matches this
classifier.
DSCP Mark
This is the DSCP number added to traffic of this classifier.
802.1P Mark
This is the IEEE 802.1p priority level assigned to traffic of this classifier.
VLAN ID Tag
This is the VLAN ID number assigned to traffic of this classifier.
To Queue
This is the name of the queue in which traffic of this classifier is put.
Modify/Delete
Click the Edit icon to edit the classifier.
Click the D e le t e icon to delete an existing classifier. Note that subsequent rules move
up by one when you take this action.
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
137
Chapter 9 Quality of Service (QoS)
9.5.1 Add/Edit QoS Class
Click Add ne w Cla ssifie r in the Cla ss Se t up screen or the Edit icon next to a classifier to open
the following screen.
Figure 69 Class Setup: Add/Edit
138
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
Chapter 9 Quality of Service (QoS)
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 47 Class Setup: Add/Edit
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Active
Select this to enable this classifier.
Class Name
Enter a descriptive name of up to 15 printable English keyboard characters, not including
spaces.
Classification
Order
Select an existing number for where you want to put this classifier to move the classifier to
the number you selected after clicking Apply.
Select La st to put this rule in the back of the classifier list.
From Interface
If you want to classify the traffic by an ingress interface, select an interface from the Fr om
I n t e r fa ce drop-down list box.
Ether Type
Select a predefined application to configure a class for the matched traffic.
If you select I P, you also need to configure source or destination MAC address, IP address,
DHCP options, DSCP value or the protocol type.
If you select 8 0 2 .1 Q, you can configure an 802.1p priority level.
Source
Address
Select the check box and enter the source IP address in dotted decimal notation. A blank
source IP address means any source IP address.
Subnet
Netmask
Enter the source subnet mask.
Port Range
If you select TCP or UD P in the I P Pr ot ocol field, select the check box and enter the port
number(s) of the source.
MAC
Select the check box and enter the source MAC address of the packet.
MAC Mask
Type the mask for the specified MAC address to determine which bits a packet’s MAC
address should match.
Enter “f” for each bit of the specified source MAC address that the traffic’s MAC address
should match. Enter “0” for the bit(s) of the matched traffic’s MAC address, which can be of
any hexadecimal character(s). For example, if you set the MAC address to
00:13:49:00:00:00 and the mask to ff:ff:ff:00:00:00, a packet with a MAC address of
00:13:49:12:34:56 matches this criteria.
Exclude
Select this option to exclude the packets that match the specified criteria from this classifier.
Destination
Address
Select the check box and enter the source IP address in dotted decimal notation. A blank
source IP address means any source IP address.
Subnet
Netmask
Enter the source subnet mask.
Port Range
If you select TCP or UD P in the I P Pr ot ocol field, select the check box and enter the port
number(s) of the source.
MAC
Select the check box and enter the source MAC address of the packet.
MAC Mask
Type the mask for the specified MAC address to determine which bits a packet’s MAC
address should match.
Enter “f” for each bit of the specified source MAC address that the traffic’s MAC address
should match. Enter “0” for the bit(s) of the matched traffic’s MAC address, which can be of
any hexadecimal character(s). For example, if you set the MAC address to
00:13:49:00:00:00 and the mask to ff:ff:ff:00:00:00, a packet with a MAC address of
00:13:49:12:34:56 matches this criteria.
Exclude
Select this option to exclude the packets that match the specified criteria from this classifier.
Others
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
139
Chapter 9 Quality of Service (QoS)
Table 47 Class Setup: Add/Edit (continued)
LABEL
Service
DESCRIPTION
This field is available only when you select I P in the Et h e r Type field.
This field simplifies classifier configuration by allowing you to select a predefined
application. When you select a predefined application, you do not configure the rest of the
filter fields.
IP Protocol
This field is available only when you select I P in the Et h e r Type field.
Select this option and select the protocol (service type) from TCP, UD P, I CM P or I GM P. If
you select Use r de fin e d, enter the protocol (service type) number.
DHCP
This field is available only when you select I P in the Et h e r Type field.
Select this option and select a DHCP option.
If you select Ve n dor Cla ss I D ( D H CP Opt ion 6 0 ) , enter the Vendor Class Identifier
(Option 60) of the matched traffic, such as the type of the hardware or firmware.
If you select Use r Cla ss I D ( D H CP Opt ion 7 7 ) , enter a string that identifies the user’s
category or application type in the matched DHCP packets.
Packet
Length
This field is available only when you select I P in the Et h e r Type field.
DSCP
This field is available only when you select I P in the Et h e r Type field.
Select this option and enter the minimum and maximum packet length (from 46 to 1500) in
the fields provided.
Select this option and specify a DSCP (DiffServ Code Point) number between 0 and 63 in the
field provided.
802.1P
This field is available only when you select 8 0 2 .1 Q in the Et h e r Type field.
Select this option and select a priority level (between 0 and 7) from the drop-down list box.
"0" is the lowest priority level and "7" is the highest.
VLAN ID
This field is available only when you select 8 0 2 .1 Q in the Et h e r Type field.
Select this option and specify a VLAN ID number.
TCP ACK
This field is available only when you select I P in the Et h e r Type field.
If you select this option, the matched TCP packets must contain the ACK (Acknowledge)
flag.
Exclude
DSCP Mark
Select this option to exclude the packets that match the specified criteria from this classifier.
This field is available only when you select I P in the Et h e r Type field.
If you select M a r k , enter a DSCP value with which the Device replaces the DSCP field in the
packets.
If you select Un cha n ge , the Device keep the DSCP field in the packets.
802.1P Mark
Select a priority level with which the Device replaces the IEEE 802.1p priority field in the
packets.
If you select Un cha n ge , the Device keep the 802.1p priority field in the packets.
VLAN ID
If you select Re m a r k , enter a VLAN ID number with which the Device replaces the VLAN ID
of the frames.
If you select Re m ove , the Device deletes the VLAN ID of the frames before forwarding
them out.
If you select Add, the Device treat all matched traffic untagged and add a second VLAN ID.
If you select Un cha n ge , the Device keep the VLAN ID in the packets.
Forward to
Interface
140
Select a WAN interface through which traffic of this class will be forwarded out. If you select
Un ch a n ge , the Device forward traffic of this class according to the default routing table.
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
Chapter 9 Quality of Service (QoS)
Table 47 Class Setup: Add/Edit (continued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
To Queue Index
Select a queue that applies to this class.
You should have configured a queue in the Qu e u e Se t u p screen already.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel
Click Ca n ce l to exit this screen without saving.
9.6 The QoS Policer Setup Screen
Use this screen to configure QoS policers that allow you to limit the transmission rate of incoming
traffic. Click N e t w or k Se t t in g > QoS > Police r Se t up. The screen appears as shown.
Figure 70 Network Setting > QoS > Policer Setup
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 48 Network Setting > QoS > Policer Setup
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Add new Policer
Click this to create a new entry.
This is the index number of the entry.
Status
This field displays whether the policer is active or not. A yellow bulb signifies that this
policer is active. A gray bulb signifies that this policer is not active.
Name
This field displays the descriptive name of this policer.
Regulated
Classes
This field displays the name of a QoS classifier
Meter Type
This field displays the type of QoS metering algorithm used in this policer.
Rule
These are the rates and burst sizes against which the policer checks the traffic of the
member QoS classes.
Action
This shows the how the policer has the Device treat different types of traffic belonging to
the policer’s member QoS classes.
Modify/Delete
Click the Edit icon to edit the policer.
Click the D e le t e icon to delete an existing policer. Note that subsequent rules move up by
one when you take this action.
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
141
Chapter 9 Quality of Service (QoS)
9.6.1 Add/Edit a QoS Policer
Click Add ne w Police r in the Police r Se t u p screen or the Edit icon next to a policer to show the
following screen.
Figure 71 Policer Setup: Add/Edit
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 49 Policer Setup: Add/Edit
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Active
Select the check box to activate this policer.
Name
Enter the descriptive name of this policer.
Meter Type
This shows the traffic metering algorithm used in this policer.
The Sim ple Tok e n Bu ck e t algorithm uses tokens in a bucket to control when traffic can be
transmitted. Each token represents one byte. The algorithm allows bursts of up to b bytes
which is also the bucket size.
The Sin gle Ra t e Thr e e Color M a r k e r (srTCM) is based on the token bucket filter and
identifies packets by comparing them to the Committed Information Rate (CIR), the
Committed Burst Size (CBS) and the Excess Burst Size (EBS).
The Tw o Ra t e Th r e e Color M a r k e r (trTCM) is based on the token bucket filter and
identifies packets by comparing them to the Committed Information Rate (CIR) and the
Peak Information Rate (PIR).
Committed
Rate
Specify the committed rate. When the incoming traffic rate of the member QoS classes is
less than the committed rate, the device applies the conforming action to the traffic.
Committed
Burst Size
Specify the committed burst size for packet bursts. This must be equal to or less than the
peak burst size (two rate three color) or excess burst size (single rate three color) if it is also
configured.
This is the maximum size of the (first) token bucket in a traffic metering algorithm.
142
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
Chapter 9 Quality of Service (QoS)
Table 49 Policer Setup: Add/Edit
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Conforming
Action
Specify what the Device does for packets within the committed rate and burst size (greenmarked packets).
•
•
Pa ss: Send the packets without modification.
D SCP M a r k : Change the DSCP mark value of the packets. Enter the DSCP mark value to
use.
NonConforming
Action
Specify what the Device does for packets that exceed the excess burst size or peak rate and
burst size (red-marked packets).
Available Class
Select a QoS classifier to apply this QoS policer to traffic that matches the QoS classifier.
Selected Class
Highlight a QoS classifier in the Ava ila ble Cla ss box and use the > button to move it to the
Se le ct e d Cla ss box.
•
•
D r op: Discard the packets.
D SCP M a r k : Change the DSCP mark value of the packets. Enter the DSCP mark value to
use. The packets may be dropped if there is congestion on the network.
To remove a QoS classifier from the Se le ct e d Cla ss box, select it and use the < button.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel
Click Ca n ce l to exit this screen without saving.
9.7 The QoS Monitor Screen
To view the Device’s QoS packet statistics, click N e t w or k Se t t in g > QoS > M onit or. The screen
appears as shown.
Figure 72 Network Setting > QoS > Monitor
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 50 Network Setting > QoS > Monitor
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Refresh Interval
Enter how often you want the Device to update this screen. Select N o Re fr e sh to stop
refreshing statistics.
Interface Monitor
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
This is the index number of the entry.
143
Chapter 9 Quality of Service (QoS)
Table 50 Network Setting > QoS > Monitor (continued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Name
This shows the name of the interface on the Device.
Pass Rate
This shows how many packets forwarded to this interface are transmitted successfully.
Drop Rate
This shows how many packets forwarded to this interface are dropped.
Queue Monitor
This is the index number of the entry.
Name
This shows the name of the queue.
Pass Rate
This shows how many packets assigned to this queue are transmitted successfully.
Drop Rate
This shows how many packets assigned to this queue are dropped.
9.8 Technical Reference
The following section contains additional technical information about the Device features described
in this chapter.
IEEE 802.1Q Tag
The IEEE 802.1Q standard defines an explicit VLAN tag in the MAC header to identify the VLAN
membership of a frame across bridges. A VLAN tag includes the 12-bit VLAN ID and 3-bit user
priority. The VLAN ID associates a frame with a specific VLAN and provides the information that
devices need to process the frame across the network.
IEEE 802.1p specifies the user priority field and defines up to eight separate traffic types. The
following table describes the traffic types defined in the IEEE 802.1d standard (which incorporates
the 802.1p).
Table 51 IEEE 802.1p Priority Level and Traffic Type
144
PRIORITY
LEVEL
TRAFFIC TYPE
Level 7
Typically used for network control traffic such as router configuration messages.
Level 6
Typically used for voice traffic that is especially sensitive to jitter (jitter is the
variations in delay).
Level 5
Typically used for video that consumes high bandwidth and is sensitive to jitter.
Level 4
Typically used for controlled load, latency-sensitive traffic such as SNA (Systems
Network Architecture) transactions.
Level 3
Typically used for “excellent effort” or better than best effort and would include
important business traffic that can tolerate some delay.
Level 2
This is for “spare bandwidth”.
Level 1
This is typically used for non-critical “background” traffic such as bulk transfers that
are allowed but that should not affect other applications and users.
Level 0
Typically used for best-effort traffic.
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
Chapter 9 Quality of Service (QoS)
DiffServ
QoS is used to prioritize source-to-destination traffic flows. All packets in the flow are given the
same priority. You can use CoS (class of service) to give different priorities to different packet
types.
DiffServ (Differentiated Services) is a class of service (CoS) model that marks packets so that they
receive specific per-hop treatment at DiffServ-compliant network devices along the route based on
the application types and traffic flow. Packets are marked with DiffServ Code Points (DSCPs)
indicating the level of service desired. This allows the intermediary DiffServ-compliant network
devices to handle the packets differently depending on the code points without the need to
negotiate paths or remember state information for every flow. In addition, applications do not have
to request a particular service or give advanced notice of where the traffic is going.
DSCP and Per-Hop Behavior
DiffServ defines a new Differentiated Services (DS) field to replace the Type of Service (TOS) field
in the IP header. The DS field contains a 2-bit unused field and a 6-bit DSCP field which can define
up to 64 service levels. The following figure illustrates the DS field.
DSCP is backward compatible with the three precedence bits in the ToS octet so that non-DiffServ
compliant, ToS-enabled network device will not conflict with the DSCP mapping.
DSCP (6 bits)
Unused (2 bits)
The DSCP value determines the forwarding behavior, the PHB (Per-Hop Behavior), that each packet
gets across the DiffServ network. Based on the marking rule, different kinds of traffic can be
marked for different kinds of forwarding. Resources can then be allocated according to the DSCP
values and the configured policies.
IP Precedence
Similar to IEEE 802.1p prioritization at layer-2, you can use IP precedence to prioritize packets in a
layer-3 network. IP precedence uses three bits of the eight-bit ToS (Type of Service) field in the IP
header. There are eight classes of services (ranging from zero to seven) in IP precedence. Zero is
the lowest priority level and seven is the highest.
Automatic Priority Queue Assignment
If you enable QoS on the Device, the Device can automatically base on the IEEE 802.1p priority
level, IP precedence and/or packet length to assign priority to traffic which does not match a class.
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
145
Chapter 9 Quality of Service (QoS)
The following table shows you the internal layer-2 and layer-3 QoS mapping on the Device. On the
Device, traffic assigned to higher priority queues gets through faster while traffic in lower index
queues is dropped if the network is congested.
Table 52 Internal Layer2 and Layer3 QoS Mapping
LAYER 2
LAYER 3
PRIORITY
QUEUE
IEEE 802.1P USER
PRIORITY
(ETHERNET
PRIORITY)
TOS (IP
PRECEDENCE)
DSCP
000000
IP PACKET
LENGTH (BYTE)
000000
>1100
001110
250~1100
001100
001010
001000
010110
010100
010010
010000
011110
<250
011100
011010
011000
100110
100100
100010
100000
101110
101000
110000
111000
Token Bucket
The token bucket algorithm uses tokens in a bucket to control when traffic can be transmitted. The
bucket stores tokens, each of which represents one byte. The algorithm allows bursts of up to b
bytes which is also the bucket size, so the bucket can hold up to b tokens. Tokens are generated
and added into the bucket at a constant rate. The following shows how tokens work with packets:
• A packet can be transmitted if the number of tokens in the bucket is equal to or greater than the
size of the packet (in bytes).
• After a packet is transmitted, a number of tokens corresponding to the packet size is removed
from the bucket.
146
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
Chapter 9 Quality of Service (QoS)
• If there are no tokens in the bucket, the Device stops transmitting until enough tokens are
generated.
• If not enough tokens are available, the Device treats the packet in either one of the following
ways:
In traffic shaping:
• Holds it in the queue until enough tokens are available in the bucket.
In traffic policing:
• Drops it.
• Transmits it but adds a DSCP mark. The Device may drop these marked packets if the network
is overloaded.
Configure the bucket size to be equal to or less than the amount of the bandwidth that the interface
can support. It does not help if you set it to a bucket size over the interface’s capability. The smaller
the bucket size, the lower the data transmission rate and that may cause outgoing packets to be
dropped. A larger transmission rate requires a big bucket size. For example, use a bucket size of 10
kbytes to get the transmission rate up to 10 Mbps.
Single Rate Three Color Marker
The Single Rate Three Color Marker (srTCM, defined in RFC 2697) is a type of traffic policing that
identifies packets by comparing them to one user-defined rate, the Committed Information Rate
(CIR), and two burst sizes: the Committed Burst Size (CBS) and Excess Burst Size (EBS).
The srTCM evaluates incoming packets and marks them with one of three colors which refer to
packet loss priority levels. High packet loss priority level is referred to as red, medium is referred to
as yellow and low is referred to as green.
The srTCM is based on the token bucket filter and has two token buckets (CBS and EBS). Tokens
are generated and added into the bucket at a constant rate, called Committed Information Rate
(CIR). When the first bucket (CBS) is full, new tokens overflow into the second bucket (EBS).
All packets are evaluated against the CBS. If a packet does not exceed the CBS it is marked green.
Otherwise it is evaluated against the EBS. If it is below the EBS then it is marked yellow. If it
exceeds the EBS then it is marked red.
The following shows how tokens work with incoming packets in srTCM:
• A packet arrives. The packet is marked green and can be transmitted if the number of tokens in
the CBS bucket is equal to or greater than the size of the packet (in bytes).
• After a packet is transmitted, a number of tokens corresponding to the packet size is removed
from the CBS bucket.
• If there are not enough tokens in the CBS bucket, the Device checks the EBS bucket. The packet
is marked yellow if there are sufficient tokens in the EBS bucket. Otherwise, the packet is marked
red. No tokens are removed if the packet is dropped.
Two Rate Three Color Marker
The Two Rate Three Color Marker (trTCM, defined in RFC 2698) is a type of traffic policing that
identifies packets by comparing them to two user-defined rates: the Committed Information Rate
(CIR) and the Peak Information Rate (PIR). The CIR specifies the average rate at which packets are
admitted to the network. The PIR is greater than or equal to the CIR. CIR and PIR values are based
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
147
Chapter 9 Quality of Service (QoS)
on the guaranteed and maximum bandwidth respectively as negotiated between a service provider
and client.
The trTCM evaluates incoming packets and marks them with one of three colors which refer to
packet loss priority levels. High packet loss priority level is referred to as red, medium is referred to
as yellow and low is referred to as green.
The trTCM is based on the token bucket filter and has two token buckets (Committed Burst Size
(CBS) and Peak Burst Size (PBS)). Tokens are generated and added into the two buckets at the CIR
and PIR respectively.
All packets are evaluated against the PIR. If a packet exceeds the PIR it is marked red. Otherwise it
is evaluated against the CIR. If it exceeds the CIR then it is marked yellow. Finally, if it is below the
CIR then it is marked green.
The following shows how tokens work with incoming packets in trTCM:
• A packet arrives. If the number of tokens in the PBS bucket is less than the size of the packet (in
bytes), the packet is marked red and may be dropped regardless of the CBS bucket. No tokens
are removed if the packet is dropped.
• If the PBS bucket has enough tokens, the Device checks the CBS bucket. The packet is marked
green and can be transmitted if the number of tokens in the CBS bucket is equal to or greater
than the size of the packet (in bytes). Otherwise, the packet is marked yellow.
148
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
C HAPTER
10
Network Address Translation (NAT)
10.1 Overview
This chapter discusses how to configure NAT on the Device. NAT (Network Address Translation NAT, RFC 1631) is the translation of the IP address of a host in a packet, for example, the source
address of an outgoing packet, used within one network to a different IP address known within
another network.
10.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
• Use the Por t For w a r ding screen to configure forward incoming service requests to the server(s)
on your local network (Section 10.2 on page 150).
• Use the Applica t ions screen to forward incoming service requests to the server(s) on your local
network (Section 10.3 on page 153).
• Use the Por t Tr igge r ing screen to add and configure the Device’s trigger port settings (Section
10.4 on page 155).
• Use the D M Z screen to configure a default server (Section 10.5 on page 158).
• Use the ALG screen to enable and disable the NAT and SIP (VoIP) ALG in the Device (Section
10.6 on page 158).
• Use the Addr e ss M a pping screen to configure the Device's address mapping settings (Section
10.7 on page 159).
10.1.2 What You Need To Know
Inside/Outside
Inside/outside denotes where a host is located relative to the Device, for example, the computers
of your subscribers are the inside hosts, while the web servers on the Internet are the outside
hosts.
Global/Local
Global/local denotes the IP address of a host in a packet as the packet traverses a router, for
example, the local address refers to the IP address of a host when the packet is in the local
network, while the global address refers to the IP address of the host when the same packet is
traveling in the WAN side.
NAT
In the simplest form, NAT changes the source IP address in a packet received from a subscriber
(the inside local address) to another (the inside global address) before forwarding the packet to the
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
149
Chapter 10 Network Address Translation (NAT)
WAN side. When the response comes back, NAT translates the destination address (the inside
global address) back to the inside local address before forwarding it to the original inside host.
Port Forwarding
A port forwarding set is a list of inside (behind NAT on the LAN) servers, for example, web or FTP,
that you can make visible to the outside world even though NAT makes your whole inside network
appear as a single computer to the outside world.
Finding Out More
See Section 10.8 on page 161 for advanced technical information on NAT.
10.2 The Port Forwarding Screen
Use the Por t For w a r din g screen to forward incoming service requests to the server(s) on your
local network.
You may enter a single port number or a range of port numbers to be forwarded, and the local IP
address of the desired server. The port number identifies a service; for example, web service is on
port 80 and FTP on port 21. In some cases, such as for unknown services or where one server can
support more than one service (for example both FTP and web service), it might be better to
specify a range of port numbers. You can allocate a server IP address that corresponds to a port or
a range of ports.
Please refer to RFC 1700 for further information about port numbers.
Note: Many residential broadband ISP accounts do not allow you to run any server
processes (such as a Web or FTP server) from your location. Your ISP may
periodically check for servers and may suspend your account if it discovers any
active services at your location. If you are unsure, refer to your ISP.
Configuring Servers Behind Port Forwarding (Example)
Let's say you want to assign ports 21-25 to one FTP, Telnet and SMTP server (A in the example),
port 80 to another (B in the example) and assign a default server IP address of 192.168.1.35 to a
150
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
Chapter 10 Network Address Translation (NAT)
third (C in the example). You assign the LAN IP addresses and the ISP assigns the WAN IP address.
The NAT network appears as a single host on the Internet.
Figure 73 Multiple Servers Behind NAT Example
A=192.168.1.33
LAN
WAN
B=192.168.1.34
192.168.1.1
IP Address assigned by ISP
C=192.168.1.3
D=192.168.1.36
Click N e t w or k Se t t in g > N AT > Por t For w a r ding to open the following screen.
Figure 74 Network Setting > NAT > Port Forwarding
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 53 Network Setting > NAT > Port Forwarding
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Add new rule
Click this to add a new rule.
This is the index number of the entry.
Status
This field displays whether the NAT rule is active or not. A yellow bulb signifies that this rule
is active. A gray bulb signifies that this rule is not active.
Service Name
This shows the service’s name.
WAN Interface
This shows the WAN interface through which the service is forwarded.
WAN IP
This field displays the incoming packet’s destination IP address.
Server IP
Address
This is the server’s IP address.
Start Port
This is the first external port number that identifies a service.
End Port
This is the last external port number that identifies a service.
Translation
Start Port
This is the first internal port number that identifies a service.
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
151
Chapter 10 Network Address Translation (NAT)
Table 53 Network Setting > NAT > Port Forwarding (continued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Translation End
Port
This is the last internal port number that identifies a service.
Protocol
This shows the IP protocol supported by this virtual server, whether it is TCP, UD P, or TCP/
UD P.
Modify/Delete
Click the Edit icon to edit this rule.
Click the D e le t e icon to delete an existing rule.
10.2.1 Add/Edit Port Forwarding
Click Add ne w r u le in the Por t For w a r ding screen or click the Edit icon next to an existing rule to
open the following screen.
Figure 75 Port Forwarding: Add/Edit
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 54 Port Forwarding: Add/Edit
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Active
Clear the checkbox to disable the rule. Select the check box to enable it.
Service Name
Enter a name to identify this rule using keyboard characters (A-Z, a-z, 1-2 and so on).
WAN Interface
Select the WAN interface through which the service is forwarded.
You must have already configured a WAN connection with NAT enabled.
152
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
Chapter 10 Network Address Translation (NAT)
Table 54 Port Forwarding: Add/Edit (continued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
WAN IP
Enter the WAN IP address for which the incoming service is destined. If the packet’s
destination IP address doesn’t match the one specified here, the port forwarding rule will
not be applied.
Start Port
Enter the original destination port for the packets.
To forward only one port, enter the port number again in the En d Por t field.
To forward a series of ports, enter the start port number here and the end port number in
the En d Por t field.
End Port
Enter the last port of the original destination port range.
To forward only one port, enter the port number in the St a r t Por t field above and then
enter it again in this field.
To forward a series of ports, enter the last port number in a series that begins with the port
number in the St a r t Por t field above.
Translation
Start Port
This shows the port number to which you want the Device to translate the incoming port.
For a range of ports, enter the first number of the range to which you want the incoming
ports translated.
Translation End
Port
This shows the last port of the translated port range.
Server IP
Address
Enter the inside IP address of the virtual server here.
Protocol
Select the protocol supported by this virtual server. Choices are TCP, UD P, or TCP/ UD P.
OK
Click OK to save your changes.
Cancel
Click Ca n ce l to exit this screen without saving.
10.3 The Applications Screen
This screen provides a summary of all NAT applications and their configuration. In addition, this
screen allows you to create new applications and/or remove existing ones.
To access this screen, click N e t w or k Se t t ing > N AT > Applica t ions. The following screen
appears.
Figure 76 Network Setting > NAT > Applications
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
153
Chapter 10 Network Address Translation (NAT)
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 55 Network Setting > NAT > Applications
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Add new
application
Click this to add a new NAT application rule.
Application
Forwarded
This field shows the type of application that the service forwards.
WAN Interface
This field shows the WAN interface through which the service is forwarded.
Server IP
Address
This field displays the destination IP address for the service.
Delete
Click the D e le t e icon to delete the rule.
10.3.1 Add New Application
This screen lets you create new NAT application rules. Click Add ne w a pplica t ion in the
Applica t ions screen to open the following screen.
Figure 77 Applications: Add
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 56 Applications: Add
LABEL
154
DESCRIPTION
WAN Interface
Select the WAN interface that you want to apply this NAT rule to.
Server IP
Address
Enter the inside IP address of the application here.
Application
Category
Select the category of the application from the drop-down list box.
Application
Forwarded
Select a service from the drop-down list box and the Device automatically configures the
protocol, start, end, and map port number that define the service.
View Rule
Click this to display the configuration of the service that you have chosen in Applica t ion
Fow a r de d.
OK
Click OK to save your changes.
Cancel
Click Ca n ce l to exit this screen without saving.
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
Chapter 10 Network Address Translation (NAT)
10.4 The Port Triggering Screen
Some services use a dedicated range of ports on the client side and a dedicated range of ports on
the server side. With regular port forwarding you set a forwarding port in NAT to forward a service
(coming in from the server on the WAN) to the IP address of a computer on the client side (LAN).
The problem is that port forwarding only forwards a service to a single LAN IP address. In order to
use the same service on a different LAN computer, you have to manually replace the LAN
computer's IP address in the forwarding port with another LAN computer's IP address.
Trigger port forwarding solves this problem by allowing computers on the LAN to dynamically take
turns using the service. The Device records the IP address of a LAN computer that sends traffic to
the WAN to request a service with a specific port number and protocol (a "trigger" port). When the
Device's WAN port receives a response with a specific port number and protocol ("open" port), the
Device forwards the traffic to the LAN IP address of the computer that sent the request. After that
computer’s connection for that service closes, another computer on the LAN can use the service in
the same manner. This way you do not need to configure a new IP address each time you want a
different LAN computer to use the application.
For example:
Figure 78 Trigger Port Forwarding Process: Example
Jane requests a file from the Real Audio server (port 7070).
Port 7070 is a “trigger” port and causes the Device to record Jane’s computer IP address. The
Device associates Jane's computer IP address with the "open" port range of 6970-7170.
The Real Audio server responds using a port number ranging between 6970-7170.
The Device forwards the traffic to Jane’s computer IP address.
Only Jane can connect to the Real Audio server until the connection is closed or times out. The
Device times out in three minutes with UDP (User Datagram Protocol) or two hours with TCP/IP
(Transfer Control Protocol/Internet Protocol).
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
155
Chapter 10 Network Address Translation (NAT)
Click N e t w or k Se t t ing > N AT > Por t Tr igge r ing to open the following screen. Use this screen to
view your Device’s trigger port settings.
Figure 79 Network Setting > NAT > Port Triggering
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 57 Network Setting > NAT > Port Triggering
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Add new rule
Click this to create a new rule.
This is the index number of the entry.
Status
This field displays whether the port triggering rule is active or not. A yellow bulb signifies
that this rule is active. A gray bulb signifies that this rule is not active.
Service Name
This field displays the name of the service used by this rule.
WAN Interface
This field shows the WAN interface through which the service is forwarded.
Trigger Start
Port
The trigger port is a port (or a range of ports) that causes (or triggers) the Device to record
the IP address of the LAN computer that sent the traffic to a server on the WAN.
This is the first port number that identifies a service.
Trigger End
Port
This is the last port number that identifies a service.
Trigger Proto.
This is the trigger transport layer protocol.
Open Start Port
The open port is a port (or a range of ports) that a server on the WAN uses when it sends
out a particular service. The Device forwards the traffic with this port (or range of ports) to
the client computer on the LAN that requested the service.
This is the first port number that identifies a service.
Open End Port
This is the last port number that identifies a service.
Open Proto.
This is the open transport layer protocol.
Modify/Delete
Click the Edit icon to edit this rule.
Click the D e le t e icon to delete an existing rule.
156
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
Chapter 10 Network Address Translation (NAT)
10.4.1 Add/Edit Port Triggering Rule
This screen lets you create new port triggering rules. Click Add ne w r u le in the Por t Tr igge r ing
screen or click a rule’s Edit icon to open the following screen.
Figure 80 Port Triggering: Add/Edit
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 58 Port Triggering: Configuration Add/Edit
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Active
Select the check box to enable this rule.
Service Name
Enter a name to identify this rule using keyboard characters (A-Z, a-z, 1-2 and so on).
WAN Interface
Select a WAN interface for which you want to configure port triggering rules.
Trigger Start
Port
The trigger port is a port (or a range of ports) that causes (or triggers) the Device to record
the IP address of the LAN computer that sent the traffic to a server on the WAN.
Type a port number or the starting port number in a range of port numbers.
Trigger End
Port
Type a port number or the ending port number in a range of port numbers.
Trigger Protocol
Select the transport layer protocol from TCP, UD P, or TCP/ UD P.
Open Start Port
The open port is a port (or a range of ports) that a server on the WAN uses when it sends
out a particular service. The Device forwards the traffic with this port (or range of ports) to
the client computer on the LAN that requested the service.
Type a port number or the starting port number in a range of port numbers.
Open End Port
Type a port number or the ending port number in a range of port numbers.
Open Protocol
Select the transport layer protocol from TCP, UD P, or TCP/ UD P.
OK
Click OK to save your changes.
Cancel
Click Ca n ce l to exit this screen without saving.
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
157
Chapter 10 Network Address Translation (NAT)
10.5 The DMZ Screen
In addition to the servers for specified services, NAT supports a default server IP address. A default
server receives packets from ports that are not specified in the N AT Por t For w a r ding Se t up
screen.
Figure 81 Network Setting > NAT > DMZ
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 59 Network Setting > NAT > DMZ
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Default Server
Address
Enter the IP address of the default server which receives packets from ports that are not
specified in the N AT Por t For w a r din g screen.
Note: If you do not assign a Default Server Address, the Device discards all packets
received for ports that are not specified in the NAT Port Forwarding screen.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel
Click Ca n ce l to restore your previously saved settings.
10.6 The ALG Screen
Some NAT routers may include a SIP Application Layer Gateway (ALG). A SIP ALG allows SIP calls
to pass through NAT by examining and translating IP addresses embedded in the data stream.
When the Device registers with the SIP register server, the SIP ALG translates the Device’s private
IP address inside the SIP data stream to a public IP address. You do not need to use STUN or an
outbound proxy if your Device is behind a SIP ALG.
Use this screen to enable and disable the NAT and SIP (VoIP) ALG in the Device. To access this
screen, click N e t w or k Se t t in g > N AT > ALG.
Figure 82 Network Setting > NAT > ALG
158
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
Chapter 10 Network Address Translation (NAT)
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 60 Network Setting > NAT > ALG
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
NAT ALG
Enable this to make sure applications such as FTP and file transfer in IM applications work
correctly with port-forwarding and address-mapping rules.
SIP ALG
Enable this to make sure SIP (VoIP) works correctly with port-forwarding and addressmapping rules.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel
Click Ca n ce l to restore your previously saved settings.
10.7 The Address Mapping Screen
Ordering your rules is important because the Device applies the rules in the order that you specify.
When a rule matches the current packet, the Device takes the corresponding action and the
remaining rules are ignored.
Click N e t w or k Se t t in g > N AT > Addr e ss M a ppin g to display the following screen.
Figure 83 Network Setting > NAT > Address Mapping
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 61 Network Setting > NAT > Address Mapping
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Add new rule
Click this to create a new rule.
Set
This is the index number of the address mapping set.
Local Start IP
This is the starting Inside Local IP Address (ILA).
Local End IP
This is the ending Inside Local IP Address (ILA). If the rule is for all local IP addresses, then
this field displays 0.0.0.0 as the Local Start IP address and 255.255.255.255 as the Local
End IP address. This field is blank for On e - t o- On e mapping types.
Global Start IP
This is the starting Inside Global IP Address (IGA). Enter 0.0.0.0 here if you have a dynamic
IP address from your ISP. You can only do this for the M a n y- t o- On e mapping type.
Global End IP
This is the ending Inside Global IP Address (IGA). This field is blank for On e - t o- On e and
M a n y- t o- On e mapping types.
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
159
Chapter 10 Network Address Translation (NAT)
Table 61 Network Setting > NAT > Address Mapping (continued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Type
This is the address mapping type.
On e - t o- On e : This mode maps one local IP address to one global IP address. Note that port
numbers do not change for the One-to-one NAT mapping type.
M a n y- t o- On e : This mode maps multiple local IP addresses to one global IP address. This is
equivalent to SUA (i.e., PAT, port address translation), the Device's Single User Account
feature that previous routers supported only.
M a n y- t o- M a n y: This mode maps multiple local IP addresses to shared global IP addresses.
Modify/Delete
Click the Edit icon to go to the screen where you can edit the address mapping rule.
Click the D e le t e icon to delete an existing address mapping rule. Note that subsequent
address mapping rules move up by one when you take this action.
10.7.1 Add/Edit Address Mapping Rule
To add or edit an address mapping rule, click Add ne w r ule or the rule’s edit icon in the Addr e ss
M a pping screen to display the screen shown next.
Figure 84 Address Mapping: Add/Edit
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 62 Address Mapping: Add/Edit
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Type
Choose the IP/port mapping type from one of the following.
On e - t o- On e : This mode maps one local IP address to one global IP address. Note that port
numbers do not change for the One-to-one NAT mapping type.
M a n y- t o- On e : This mode maps multiple local IP addresses to one global IP address. This is
equivalent to SUA (i.e., PAT, port address translation), the Device's Single User Account
feature that previous routers supported only.
M a n y- t o- M a n y: This mode maps multiple local IP addresses to shared global IP addresses.
Local Start IP
160
Enter the starting Inside Local IP Address (ILA).
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
Chapter 10 Network Address Translation (NAT)
Table 62 Address Mapping: Add/Edit (continued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Local End IP
Enter the ending Inside Local IP Address (ILA). If the rule is for all local IP addresses, then
this field displays 0.0.0.0 as the Local Start IP address and 255.255.255.255 as the Local
End IP address. This field is blank for On e - t o- On e mapping types.
Global Start IP
Enter the starting Inside Global IP Address (IGA). Enter 0.0.0.0 here if you have a dynamic
IP address from your ISP. You can only do this for the M a n y- t o- On e mapping type.
Global End IP
Enter the ending Inside Global IP Address (IGA). This field is blank for On e - t o- On e and
M a n y- t o- On e mapping types.
Set
Select the number of the mapping set for which you want to configure.
OK
Click OK to save your changes.
Cancel
Click Ca n ce l to exit this screen without saving.
10.8 Technical Reference
This part contains more information regarding NAT.
10.8.1 NAT Definitions
Inside/outside denotes where a host is located relative to the Device, for example, the computers
of your subscribers are the inside hosts, while the web servers on the Internet are the outside
hosts.
Global/local denotes the IP address of a host in a packet as the packet traverses a router, for
example, the local address refers to the IP address of a host when the packet is in the local
network, while the global address refers to the IP address of the host when the same packet is
traveling in the WAN side.
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
161
Chapter 10 Network Address Translation (NAT)
Note that inside/outside refers to the location of a host, while global/local refers to the IP address
of a host used in a packet. Thus, an inside local address (ILA) is the IP address of an inside host in
a packet when the packet is still in the local network, while an inside global address (IGA) is the IP
address of the same inside host when the packet is on the WAN side. The following table
summarizes this information.
Table 63 NAT Definitions
ITEM
DESCRIPTION
Inside
This refers to the host on the LAN.
Outside
This refers to the host on the WAN.
Local
This refers to the packet address (source or destination) as the packet travels on the
LAN.
Global
This refers to the packet address (source or destination) as the packet travels on the
WAN.
NAT never changes the IP address (either local or global) of an outside host.
10.8.2 What NAT Does
In the simplest form, NAT changes the source IP address in a packet received from a subscriber
(the inside local address) to another (the inside global address) before forwarding the packet to the
WAN side. When the response comes back, NAT translates the destination address (the inside
global address) back to the inside local address before forwarding it to the original inside host. Note
that the IP address (either local or global) of an outside host is never changed.
The global IP addresses for the inside hosts can be either static or dynamically assigned by the ISP.
In addition, you can designate servers, for example, a web server and a telnet server, on your local
network and make them accessible to the outside world. If you do not define any servers (for Manyto-One and Many-to-Many Overload mapping), NAT offers the additional benefit of firewall
protection. With no servers defined, your Device filters out all incoming inquiries, thus preventing
intruders from probing your network. For more information on IP address translation, refer to RFC
1631, The I P Net work Address Translat or ( NAT) .
162
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
Chapter 10 Network Address Translation (NAT)
10.8.3 How NAT Works
Each packet has two addresses – a source address and a destination address. For outgoing packets,
the ILA (Inside Local Address) is the source address on the LAN, and the IGA (Inside Global
Address) is the source address on the WAN. For incoming packets, the ILA is the destination
address on the LAN, and the IGA is the destination address on the WAN. NAT maps private (local)
IP addresses to globally unique ones required for communication with hosts on other networks. It
replaces the original IP source address (and TCP or UDP source port numbers for Many-to-One and
Many-to-Many Overload NAT mapping) in each packet and then forwards it to the Internet. The
Device keeps track of the original addresses and port numbers so incoming reply packets can have
their original values restored. The following figure illustrates this.
Figure 85 How NAT Works
NAT Table
LAN
Inside Local
IP Address
192.168.1.10
192.168.1.11
192.168.1.12
192.168.1.13
192.168.1.13
192.168.1.12
SA
SA
192.168.1.10
IGA1
Inside Local
Address (ILA)
192.168.1.11
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
Inside Global
IP Address
IGA 1
IGA 2
IGA 3
IGA 4
WAN
Inside Global
Address (IGA)
192.168.1.10
163
Chapter 10 Network Address Translation (NAT)
10.8.4 NAT Application
The following figure illustrates a possible NAT application, where three inside LANs (logical LANs
using IP alias) behind the Device can communicate with three distinct WAN networks.
Figure 86 NAT Application With IP Alias
Port Forwarding: Services and Port Numbers
The most often used port numbers are shown in the following table. Please refer to RFC 1700 for
further information about port numbers. Please also refer to the Supporting CD for more examples
and details on port forwarding and NAT.
Table 64 Services and Port Numbers
164
SERVICES
PORT NUMBER
ECHO
FTP (File Transfer Protocol)
21
SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol)
25
DNS (Domain Name System)
53
Finger
79
HTTP (Hyper Text Transfer protocol or WWW, Web)
80
POP3 (Post Office Protocol)
110
NNTP (Network News Transport Protocol)
119
SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol)
161
SNMP trap
162
PPTP (Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol)
1723
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
Chapter 10 Network Address Translation (NAT)
Port Forwarding Example
Let's say you want to assign ports 21-25 to one FTP, Telnet and SMTP server (A in the example),
port 80 to another (B in the example) and assign a default server IP address of 192.168.1.35 to a
third (C in the example). You assign the LAN IP addresses and the ISP assigns the WAN IP address.
The NAT network appears as a single host on the Internet.
Figure 87 Multiple Servers Behind NAT Example
A=192.168.1.33
192.168.1.1
B=192.168.1.34
IP address assigned by ISP
C=192.168.1.35
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
D=192.168.1.36
165
Chapter 10 Network Address Translation (NAT)
166
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
C HAPTER
11
Dynamic DNS Setup
11.1 Overview
DNS
DNS (Domain Name System) is for mapping a domain name to its corresponding IP address and
vice versa. The DNS server is extremely important because without it, you must know the IP
address of a machine before you can access it.
In addition to the system DNS server(s), each WAN interface (service) is set to have its own static
or dynamic DNS server list. You can configure a DNS static route to forward DNS queries for certain
domain names through a specific WAN interface to its DNS server(s). The Device uses a system
DNS server (in the order you specify in the Br oa dba n d screen) to resolve domain names that do
not match any DNS routing entry. After the Device receives a DNS reply from a DNS server, it
creates a new entry for the resolved IP address in the routing table.
Dynamic DNS
Dynamic DNS allows you to update your current dynamic IP address with one or many dynamic
DNS services so that anyone can contact you (in NetMeeting, CU-SeeMe, etc.). You can also access
your FTP server or Web site on your own computer using a domain name (for instance
myhost.dhs.org, where myhost is a name of your choice) that will never change instead of using an
IP address that changes each time you reconnect. Your friends or relatives will always be able to
call you even if they don't know your IP address.
First of all, you need to have registered a dynamic DNS account with www.dyndns.org. This is for
people with a dynamic IP from their ISP or DHCP server that would still like to have a domain name.
The Dynamic DNS service provider will give you a password or key.
11.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
• Use the D N S En t r y screen to view, configure, or remove DNS routes (Section 11.2 on page
168).
• Use the D yn a m ic D N S screen to enable DDNS and configure the DDNS settings on the Device
(Section 11.3 on page 169).
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
167
Chapter 11 Dynamic DNS Setup
11.1.2 What You Need To Know
DYNDNS Wildcard
Enabling the wildcard feature for your host causes *.yourhost.dyndns.org to be aliased to the same
IP address as yourhost.dyndns.org. This feature is useful if you want to be able to use, for example,
www.yourhost.dyndns.org and still reach your hostname.
If you have a private WAN IP address, then you cannot use Dynamic DNS.
11.2 The DNS Entry Screen
Use this screen to view and configure DNS routes on the Device. Click N e t w or k Se t t ing > D N S to
open the D N S En t r y screen.
Figure 88 Network Setting > DNS > DNS Entry
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 65 Network Setting > DNS > DNS Entry
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Add new DNS
entry
Click this to create a new DNS entry.
This is the index number of the entry.
Hostname
This indicates the host name or domain name.
IP Address
This indicates the IP address assigned to this computer.
Modify/Delete
Click the Edit icon to edit the rule.
Click the D e le t e icon to delete an existing rule.
168
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
Chapter 11 Dynamic DNS Setup
11.2.1 Add/Edit DNS Entry
You can manually add or edit the Device’s DNS name and IP address entry. Click Add ne w D N S
e nt r y in the D N S En t r y screen or the Edit icon next to the entry you want to edit. The screen
shown next appears.
Figure 89 DNS Entry: Add/Edit
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 66 DNS Entry: Add/Edit
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Host Name
Enter the host name of the DNS entry.
IP Address
Enter the IP address of the DNS entry.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel
Click Ca n ce l to exit this screen without saving.
11.3 The Dynamic DNS Screen
Use this screen to change your Device’s DDNS. Click N e t w or k Se t t in g > D N S > D yn a m ic D N S.
The screen appears as shown.
Figure 90 Network Setting > DNS > Dynamic DNS
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
169
Chapter 11 Dynamic DNS Setup
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 67 Network Setting > DNS > > Dynamic DNS
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Dynamic DNS
Select En a ble to use dynamic DNS.
Service
Provider
Select your Dynamic DNS service provider from the drop-down list box.
Hostname
Type the domain name assigned to your Device by your Dynamic DNS provider.
You can specify up to two host names in the field separated by a comma (",").
170
Username
Type your user name.
Password
Type the password assigned to you.
Email
If you select TZO in the Se r vice Pr ovide r field, enter the user name you used to register
for this service.
Key
If you select TZO in the Se r vice Pr ovide r field, enter the password you used to register for
this service.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel
Click Ca n ce l to exit this screen without saving.
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
C HAPTER
12
Interface Group
12.1 Overview
By default, all LAN and WAN interfaces on the Device are in the same group and can communicate
with each other. Create interface groups to have the Device assign the IP addresses in different
domains to different groups. Each group acts as an independent network on the Device. This lets
devices connected to an interface group’s LAN interfaces communicate through the interface
group’s WAN or LAN interfaces but not other WAN or LAN interfaces.
12.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
The I nt e r fa ce Gr ou p screens let you create multiple networks on the Device (Section 12.2 on
page 171).
12.2 The Interface Group Screen
You can manually add a LAN interface to a new group. Alternatively, you can have the Device
automatically add the incoming traffic and the LAN interface on which traffic is received to an
interface group when its DHCP Vendor ID option information matches one listed for the interface
group.
Use the LAN screen to configure the private IP addresses the DHCP server on the Device assigns to
the clients in the default and/or user-defined groups. If you set the Device to assign IP addresses
based on the client’s DHCP Vendor ID option information, you must enable DHCP server and
configure LAN TCP/IP settings for both the default and user-defined groups. See Chapter 7 on page
101 for more information.
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
171
Chapter 12 Interface Group
In the following example, the client that sends packets with the DHCP Vendor ID option set to MSFT
5.0 (meaning it is a Windows 2000 DHCP client) is assigned the IP address 192.168.2.2 and uses
the WAN VDSL_PoE/ppp0.1 interface.
Figure 91 Interface Grouping Application
Default: ETH 2~4
192.168.1.x/24
eth10.0
Internet
VDSL_PoE/ppp0.1
192.168.2.x/24
DHCP Vendor ID option: MSFT 5.0
Click N e t w or k Se t t in g > I n t e r fa ce Gr ou p to open the following screen.
Figure 92 Network Setting > Interface Group
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 68 Network Setting > Interface Group
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Add New
Interface Group
Click this button to create a new interface group.
Group Name
This shows the descriptive name of the group.
WAN Interface
This shows the WAN interfaces in the group.
LAN Interfaces
This shows the LAN interfaces in the group.
Criteria
This shows the filtering criteria for the group.
Modify/Delete
Click the D e le t e icon to remove the group.
Add
Click this button to create a new group.
12.2.1 Interface Group Configuration
Click the Add N e w I nt e r fa ce Gr oup button in the I n t e r fa ce Gr ou p screen to open the following
screen. Use this screen to create a new interface group.
172
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
Chapter 12 Interface Group
Note: An interface can belong to only one group at a time.
Figure 93 Interface Group Configuration
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 69 Interface Group Configuration
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Group Name
Enter a name to identify this group. You can enter up to 30 characters. You can use letters,
numbers, hyphens (-) and underscores (_). Spaces are not allowed.
WAN Interface
used in the
grouping
Select the WAN interface this group uses. The group can have up to one PTM interface, up to
one ATM interface and up to one ETH interface.
Grouped LAN
Interfaces
Select one or more LAN interfaces (Ethernet LAN, HPNA or wireless LAN) in the Ava ila ble
LAN I n t e r fa ce s list and use the left arrow to move them to the Gr ou pe d LAN I n t e r fa ce s
list to add the interfaces to this group.
Available LAN
Interfaces
Select N on e to not add a WAN interface to this group.
To remove a LAN or wireless LAN interface from the Gr ou pe d LAN I n t e r fa ce s, use the
right-facing arrow.
Automatically
Add Clients
With the
following DHCP
Vendor IDs
Click Add to identify LAN hosts to add to the interface group by criteria such as the type of
the hardware or firmware. See Section 12.2.2 on page 174 for more information.
This shows the index number of the rule.
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
173
Chapter 12 Interface Group
Table 69 Interface Group Configuration (continued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Filter Criteria
This shows the filtering criteria. The LAN interface on which the matched traffic is received
will belong to this group automatically.
WildCard
Support
This shows if wildcard on DHCP option 60 is enabled.
Remove
Click the Re m ove icon to delete this rule from the Device.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes back to the Device.
Cancel
Click Ca n ce l to exit this screen without saving.
12.2.2 Interface Grouping Criteria
Click the Add button in the I n t e r fa ce Gr oupin g Con figu r a t ion screen to open the following
screen.
Figure 94 Interface Grouping Criteria
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 70 Interface Grouping Criteria
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Source MAC
Address
Enter the source MAC address of the packet.
DHCP Option
60
Select this option and enter the Vendor Class Identifier (Option 60) of the matched traffic,
such as the type of the hardware or firmware.
Enable
wildcard on
DHCP
option 60
option
DHCP Option
61
174
Select this option to be able to use wildcards in the Vendor Class Identifier configured for
DHCP option 60.
Select this and enter the device identity of the matched traffic.
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
Chapter 12 Interface Group
Table 70 Interface Grouping Criteria (continued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
IAID
Enter the Identity Association Identifier (IAID) of the device, for example, the WAN
connection index number.
DUID type
Select D UI D - LLT (DUID Based on Link-layer Address Plus Time) to enter the hardware
type, a time value and the MAC address of the device.
Select D UI D - EN (DUID Assigned by Vendor Based upon Enterprise Number) to enter the
vendor’s registered enterprise number.
Select D UI D - LL (DUID Based on Link-layer Address) to enter the device’s hardware type
and hardware address (MAC address) in the following fields.
Select Ot h e r to enter any string that identifies the device in the DUID field.
DHCP Option
125
Select this and enter vendor specific information of the matched traffic.
Enterprise
Number
Enter the vendor’s 32-bit enterprise number registered with the IANA (Internet Assigned
Numbers Authority).
Manufactur
er OUI
Specify the vendor’s OUI (Organization Unique Identifier). It is usually the first three bytes
of the MAC address.
Product
Class
Enter the product class of the device.
Model
Name
Enter the model name of the device.
Serial
Number
Enter the serial number of the device.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes back to the Device.
Cancel
Click Ca n ce l to exit this screen without saving.
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
175
Chapter 12 Interface Group
176
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
C HAPTER
13
USB Service
13.1 Overview
The Device has a USB port used to share files via a USB memory stick or a USB hard drive. In the
USB Se r vice screens, you can enable file-sharing server, media server, and printer server.
13.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
• Use the File Sh a r ing screen to enable file-sharing server (Section 13.2 on page 178).
• Use the M e dia Se r ve r screen to enable or disable the sharing of media files (Section 13.3 on
page 180).
• Use the Pr in t e r Se r ve r screen to enable the print server (Section 13.4 on page 181).
13.1.2 What You Need To Know
The following terms and concepts may help as you read this chapter.
13.1.2.1 About File Sharing
Workgroup name
This is the name given to a set of computers that are connected on a network and share resources
such as a printer or files. Windows automatically assigns the workgroup name when you set up a
network.
Shares
When settings are set to default, each USB device connected to the Device is given a folder, called
a “share”. If a USB hard drive connected to the Device has more than one partition, then each
partition will be allocated a share. You can also configure a “share” to be a sub-folder or file on the
USB device.
File Systems
A file system is a way of storing and organizing files on your hard drive and storage device. Often
different operating systems such as Windows or Linux have different file systems. The file sharing
feature on your Device supports File Allocation Table (FAT) and FAT32.
Common Internet File System
The Device uses Common Internet File System (CIFS) protocol for its file sharing functions. CIFS
compatible computers can access the USB file storage devices connected to the Device. CIFS
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
177
Chapter 13 USB Service
protocol is supported on Microsoft Windows, Linux Samba and other operating systems (refer to
your systems specifications for CIFS compatibility).
13.1.2.2 About Printer Server
Print Server
This is a computer or other device which manages one or more printers, and which sends print jobs
to each printer from the computer itself or other devices.
Operating System
An operating system (OS) is the interface which helps you manage a computer. Common examples
are Microsoft Windows, Mac OS or Linux.
TCP/IP
TCP/IP (Transmission Control Protocol/ Internet Protocol) is a set of communications protocols that
most of the Internet runs on.
Port
A port maps a network service such as http to a process running on your computer, such as a
process run by your web browser. When traffic from the Internet is received on your computer, the
port number is used to identify which process running on your computer it is intended for.
Supported OSs
Your operating system must support TCP/IP ports for printing and be compatible with the RAW (port
9100) protocol.
The following OSs support Device’s printer sharing feature.
• Microsoft Windows 95, Windows 98 SE (Second Edition), Windows Me, Windows NT 4.0, Windows
2000, Windows XP or Macintosh OS X.
13.2 The File Sharing Screen
You can share files on a USB memory stick or hard drive connected to your Device with users on
your network.
178
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
Chapter 13 USB Service
The following figure is an overview of the Device’s file server feature. Computers A and B can
access files on a USB device (C) which is connected to the Device.
Figure 95 File Sharing Overview
The Device will not be able to join the workgroup if your local area network has restrictions
set up that do not allow devices to join a workgroup. In this case, contact your network
administrator.
13.2.1 Before You Begin
Make sure the Device is connected to your network and turned on.
Connect the USB device to one of the Device’s USB port. Make sure the Device is connected to your
network.
The Device detects the USB device and makes its contents available for browsing. If you are
connecting a USB hard drive that comes with an external power supply, make sure it is connected
to an appropriate power source that is on.
Note: If your USB device cannot be detected by the Device, see the troubleshooting for
suggestions.
Use this screen to set up file sharing using the Device. To access this screen, click N e t w or k
Se t t in g > USB Se r vice > File Sh a r ing.
Figure 96 Network Setting > USB Service > File Sharing
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
179
Chapter 13 USB Service
Each field is described in the following table.
Table 71 Network Setting > Home Networking > File Sharing
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
File Sharing
Services
Select En a ble to activate file sharing through the Device.
Host Name
Enter the host name on the share.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel
Click Ca n ce l to restore your previously saved settings.
13.3 The Media Server Screen
The media server feature lets anyone on your network play video, music, and photos from the USB
storage device connected to your Device (without having to copy them to another computer). The
Device can function as a DLNA-compliant media server. The Device streams files to DLNA-compliant
media clients (like Windows Media Player). The Digital Living Network Alliance (DLNA) is a group of
personal computer and electronics companies that works to make products compatible in a home
network.
The Device media server enables you to:
• Publish all shares for everyone to play media files in the USB storage device connected to the
Device.
• Use hardware-based media clients like the DMA-2500 to play the files.
Note: Anyone on your network can play the media files in the published shares. No user
name and password or other form of security is used. The media server is enabled
by default with the video, photo, and music shares published.
To change your Device’s media server settings, click N e t w or k Se t t ing > USB Se r vice > M e dia
Se r ve r. The screen appears as shown.
Figure 97 Network Setting > USB Service > Media Server
180
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
Chapter 13 USB Service
The following table describes the labels in this menu.
Table 72 Network Setting > USB Service > Media Server
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Media Server
Select En a ble to have the Device function as a DLNA-compliant media server.
Enable the media server to let (DLNA-compliant) media clients on your network play media
files located in the shares.
Interface
Select the interface on which you want to enable the media server function.
Media Library
Path
Enter the path clients use to access the media files on a USB storage device connected to
the Device.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel
Click Ca nce l to restore your previously saved settings.
13.4 The Printer Server Screen
The Device allows you to share a USB printer on your LAN. You can do this by connecting a USB
printer to one of the USB ports on the Device and then configuring a TCP/IP port on the computers
connected to your network.
Figure 98 Sharing a USB Printer
13.4.1 Before You Begin
To configure the print server you need the following:
• Your Device must be connected to your computer and any other devices on your network. The
USB printer must be connected to your Device.
• A USB printer with the driver already installed on your computer.
• The computers on your network must have the printer software already installed before they can
create a TCP/IP port for printing via the network. Follow your printer manufacturers instructions
on how to install the printer software on your computer.
Note: Your printer’s installation instructions may ask that you connect the printer to your
computer. Connect your printer to the Device instead.
Use this screen to enable or disable sharing of a USB printer via your Device.
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
181
Chapter 13 USB Service
To access this screen, click N e t w or k Se t t in g > USB Se r vice > Pr int e r Se r ve r.
Figure 99 Network Setting > USB Service > Printer Server
The following table describes the labels in this menu.
Table 73 Network Setting > USB Service > Print Server
182
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Printer Server
Select En a ble to have the Device share a USB printer.
Printer Name
Enter the name of the printer.
Make and
model
Enter the manufacturer and model number of the printer.
Printer Name
This displays the system name for the printer.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel
Click Ca nce l to restore your previously saved settings.
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
C HAPTER
14
Firewall
14.1 Overview
This chapter shows you how to enable and configure the Device’s security settings. Use the firewall
to protect your Device and network from attacks by hackers on the Internet and control access to
it. By default the firewall:
• allows traffic that originates from your LAN computers to go to all other networks.
• blocks traffic that originates on other networks from going to the LAN.
The following figure illustrates the default firewall action. User A can initiate an IM (Instant
Messaging) session from the LAN to the WAN (1). Return traffic for this session is also allowed (2).
However other traffic initiated from the WAN is blocked (3 and 4).
Figure 100 Default Firewall Action
WAN
LAN
14.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
• Use the Ge n e r a l screen to configure the security level of the firewall on the Device (Section 14.2
on page 185).
• Use the Se r vice screen to add or remove predefined Internet services and configure firewall
rules (Section 14.3 on page 185).
• Use the Acce ss Cont r ol screen to view and configure incoming/outgoing filtering rules (Section
14.4 on page 188).
• Use the D oS screen to activate protection against Denial of Service (DoS) attacks (.Section 14.5
on page 190).
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
183
Chapter 14 Firewall
14.1.2 What You Need to Know
SYN Attack
A SYN attack floods a targeted system with a series of SYN packets. Each packet causes the
targeted system to issue a SYN-ACK response. While the targeted system waits for the ACK that
follows the SYN-ACK, it queues up all outstanding SYN-ACK responses on a backlog queue. SYNACKs are moved off the queue only when an ACK comes back or when an internal timer terminates
the three-way handshake. Once the queue is full, the system will ignore all incoming SYN requests,
making the system unavailable for legitimate users.
DoS
Denials of Service (DoS) attacks are aimed at devices and networks with a connection to the
Internet. Their goal is not to steal information, but to disable a device or network so users no longer
have access to network resources. The ZyXEL Device is pre-configured to automatically detect and
thwart all known DoS attacks.
DDoS
A DDoS attack is one in which multiple compromised systems attack a single target, thereby
causing denial of service for users of the targeted system.
LAND Attack
In a LAND attack, hackers flood SYN packets into the network with a spoofed source IP address of
the target system. This makes it appear as if the host computer sent the packets to itself, making
the system unavailable while the target system tries to respond to itself.
Ping of Death
Ping of Death uses a "ping" utility to create and send an IP packet that exceeds the maximum
65,536 bytes of data allowed by the IP specification. This may cause systems to crash, hang or
reboot.
SPI
Stateful Packet Inspection (SPI) tracks each connection crossing the firewall and makes sure it is
valid. Filtering decisions are based not only on rules but also context. For example, traffic from the
WAN may only be allowed to cross the firewall in response to a request from the LAN.
184
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
Chapter 14 Firewall
14.2 The Firewall Screen
Use this screen to set the security level of the firewall on the Device. Firewall rules are grouped
based on the direction of travel of packets to which they apply.
Click Se cur it y > Fir e w a ll to display the Ge ne r a l screen.
Figure 101 Security > Firewall > General
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 74 Security > Firewall > General
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Firewall
Select En a ble to activate the firewall feature on the Device.
Easy
Select Ea sy to allow LAN to WAN and WAN to LAN packet directions.
Medium
Select M e diu m to allow LAN to WAN but deny WAN to LAN packet directions.
High
Select H igh to deny LAN to WAN and WAN to LAN packet directions.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel
Click Ca n ce l to restore your previously saved settings.
14.3 The Service Screen
You can configure customized services and port numbers in the Se r vice screen. For a
comprehensive list of port numbers and services, visit the IANA (Internet Assigned Number
Authority) website.
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
185
Chapter 14 Firewall
Click Se cur it y > Fir e w a ll > Se r vice to display the following screen.
Figure 102 Security > Firewall > Service
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 75 Security > Firewall > Service
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Add new
service entry
Click this to add a new service.
Name
This is the name of your customized service.
Description
This is the description of your customized service.
Ports/Protocol
Number
This shows the IP protocol (TCP, UD P, I CM P, or TCP/ UD P) and the port number or range
of ports that defines your customized service. Ot h e r and the protocol number displays if the
service uses another IP protocol.
Modify/Delete
Click the Edit icon to edit the entry.
Click the D e le t e icon to remove this entry.
186
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
Chapter 14 Firewall
14.3.1 Add/Edit a Service
Use this screen to add a customized service rule that you can use in the firewall’s ACL rule
configuration. Click Add n e w se r vice e n t r y or the edit icon next to an existing service rule in the
Se r vice screen to display the following screen.
Figure 103 Service: Add/Edit
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 76 Service: Add/Edit
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Protocol
Choose the IP protocol (TCP, UD P, I CM P, or Ot h e r ) that defines your customized port from
the drop-down list box. Select Ot h e r to be able to enter a protocol number.
Source/
These fields are displayed if you select TCP or UD P as the IP port.
Destination Port
Select Sin gle to specify one port only or Ra n ge to specify a span of ports that define your
customized service. If you select An y, the service is applied to all ports.
Type a single port number or the range of port numbers that define your customized
service.
Protocol
Number
Add
This field is displayed if you select Ot h e r as the protocol.
Enter the protocol number of your customized port.
Click this to add the protocol to the Ru le List below.
Rule List
Protocol
This is the IP port (TCP, UD P, I CM P, or Ot h e r ) that defines your customized port.
Ports/Protocol
Number
For TCP, UD P, I CM P, or TCP/ UD P protocol rules this shows the port number or range that
defines the custom service. For other IP protocol rules this shows the protocol number.
Modify/Delete
Click the D e le t e icon to remove the rule.
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
187
Chapter 14 Firewall
Table 76 Service: Add/Edit (continued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Service Name
Enter a unique name (up to 32 printable English keyboard characters, including spaces) for
your customized port.
Service
Description
Enter a description for your customized port.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel
Click Ca n ce l to exit this screen without saving.
14.4 The Access Control Screen
Click Se cur it y > Fir e w a ll > Acce ss Cont r ol to display the following screen. This screen displays a
list of the configured incoming or outgoing filtering rules.
Figure 104 Security > Firewall > Access Control
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 77 Security > Firewall > Access Control
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Add new ACL
rule
Click this to go to add a filter rule for incoming or outgoing IP traffic.
This is the index number of the entry.
Name
This displays the name of the rule.
Src IP
This displays the source IP addresses to which this rule applies. Please note that a blank
source address is equivalent to An y.
Dst IP
This displays the destination IP addresses to which this rule applies. Please note that a
blank destination address is equivalent to An y.
Service
This displays the transport layer protocol that defines the service and the direction of traffic
to which this rule applies.
Action
This field displays whether the rule silently discards packets (D ROP), discards packets and
sends a TCP reset packet or an ICMP destination-unreachable message to the sender
(REJECT) or allows the passage of packets (ACCEPT).
Modify/Delete
Click the Edit icon to edit the rule.
Click the D e le t e icon to delete an existing rule. Note that subsequent rules move up by one
when you take this action.
Click the M ove To icon to change the order of the rule. Enter the number in the # field.
188
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
Chapter 14 Firewall
14.4.1 Add/Edit an ACL Rule
Click Add ne w ACL r ule or the Edit icon next to an existing ACL rule in the Acce ss Cont r ol
screen. The following screen displays.
Figure 105 Access Control: Add/Edit
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 78 Access Control: Add/Edit
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Filter Name
Enter a descriptive name of up to 16 alphanumeric characters, not including spaces,
underscores, and dashes.
You must enter the filter name to add an ACL rule. This field is read-only if you are editing
the ACL rule.
Order
Select the order of the ACL rule.
Select Source
Device
Select the source device to which the ACL rule applies. If you select Spe cific I P Addr e ss,
enter the source IP address in the field below.
Source IP
Address
Enter the source IP address.
Select
Destination
Device
Select the destination device to which the ACL rule applies. If you select Spe cific I P
Addr e ss, enter the destiniation IP address in the field below.
Destination IP
Address
Enter the destination IP address.
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
189
Chapter 14 Firewall
Table 78 Access Control: Add/Edit (continued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
IP Type
Select whether your IP type is I Pv4 or I Pv6 .
Select Protocol
Select the transport layer protocol that defines your customized port from the drop-down
list box. The specific protocol rule sets you add in the Se cu r it y > Fir e w a ll > Se r vice >
Add screen display in this list.
If you want to configure a customized protocol, select Spe cific Se r vice .
Protocol
This field is displayed only when you select Spe cific Pr ot ocol in Se le ct Pr ot ocol.
Choose the IP port (TCP/ UD P, TCP, UD P, I CM P, or I CM Pv6 ) that defines your customized
port from the drop-down list box.
Custom Source
Port
This field is displayed only when you select Spe cific Pr ot ocol in Se le ct Pr ot ocol.
Enter a single port number or the range of port numbers of the source.
Custom
This field is displayed only when you select Spe cific Pr ot ocol in Se le ct Pr ot ocol.
Destination Port
Enter a single port number or the range of port numbers of the destination.
Policy
Use the drop-down list box to select whether to discard (D ROP), deny and send an ICMP
destination-unreachable message to the sender of (REJECT) or allow the passage of
(ACCEPT) packets that match this rule.
Direction
Use the drop-down list box to select the direction of traffic to which this rule applies.
Enable Rate
Limit
Select this check box to set a limit on the upstream/downstream transmission rate for the
specified protocol.
Specify how many packets per minute or second the transmission rate is.
Scheduler Rules Select a schedule rule for this ACL rule form the drop-down list box. You can configure a
new schedule rule by click Add N e w Ru le . This will bring you to the Se cu r it y > Sch e du le r
Ru le s screen.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel
Click Ca n ce l to exit this screen without saving.
14.5 The DoS Screen
DoS (Denial of Service) attacks can flood your Internet connection with invalid packets and
connection requests, using so much bandwidth and so many resources that Internet access
becomes unavailable.
Use the D oS screen to activate protection against DoS attacks. Click Se cur it y > Fir e w a ll > D oS
to display the following screen.
Figure 106 Security > Firewall > DoS
190
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
Chapter 14 Firewall
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 79 Security > Firewall > DoS
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
DoS Protection
Blocking
Select En a ble to enable protection against DoS attacks.
Deny Ping
Response
Select Enable to block ping request packets.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel
Click Ca n ce l to exit this screen without saving.
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
191
Chapter 14 Firewall
192
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
C HAPTER
15
MAC Filter
15.1 Overview
You can configure the Device to permit access to clients based on their MAC addresses in the M AC
Filt e r screen. This applies to wired and wireless connections. Every Ethernet device has a unique
MAC (Media Access Control) address. The MAC address is assigned at the factory and consists of six
pairs of hexadecimal characters, for example, 00:A0:C5:00:00:02. You need to know the MAC
addresses of the devices to configure this screen.
15.2 The MAC Filter Screen
Use this screen to allow wireless and LAN clients access to the Device. Click Se cur it y > M AC Filt e r.
The screen appears as shown.
Figure 107 Security > MAC Filter
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
193
Chapter 15 MAC Filter
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 80 Security > MAC Filter
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
MAC Address Filter
Select En a ble to activate the MAC filter function.
Set
This is the index number of the MAC address.
Allow
Select Allow to permit access to the Device. MAC addresses not listed will be denied
access to the Device.
If you clear this, the MAC Address field for this set clears.
194
Host name
Enter the host name of the wireless or LAN clients that are allowed access to the
Device.
MAC Address
Enter the MAC addresses of the wireless or LAN clients that are allowed access to the
Device in these address fields. Enter the MAC addresses in a valid MAC address format,
that is, six hexadecimal character pairs, for example, 12:34:56:78:9a:bc.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel
Click Ca nce l to restore your previously saved settings.
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
C HAPTER
16
Parental Control
16.1 Overview
Parental control allows you to block web sites with the specific URL. You can also define time
periods and days during which the Device performs parental control on a specific user.
16.2 The Parental Control Screen
Use this screen to enable parental control, view the parental control rules and schedules.
Click Se cur it y > Pa r e nt a l Cont r ol to open the following screen.
Figure 108 Security > Parental Control
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 81 Security > Parental Control
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Parental
Control
Select En a ble to activate parental control.
Add new PCP
Click this if you want to configure a new parental control rule.
This shows the index number of the rule.
Status
This indicates whether the rule is active or not.
A yellow bulb signifies that this rule is active. A gray bulb signifies that this rule is not active.
PCP Name
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
This shows the name of the rule.
195
Chapter 16 Parental Control
Table 81 Security > Parental Control (continued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Home Network
User (MAC)
This shows the MAC address of the LAN user’s computer to which this rule applies.
Internet Access
Schedule
This shows the day(s) and time on which parental control is enabled.
Network
Service
This shows whether the network service is configured. If not, N on e will be shown.
Website Block
This shows whether the website block is configured. If not, N on e will be shown.
Modify/Delete
Click the Edit icon to go to the screen where you can edit the rule.
Click the D e le t e icon to delete an existing rule.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel
Click Ca n ce l to restore your previously saved settings.
16.2.1 Add/Edit a Parental Control Rule
Click Add n e w PCP in the Pa r e nt a l Cont r ol screen to add a new rule or click the Edit icon next to
an existing rule to edit it. Use this screen to configure a restricted access schedule and/or URL
filtering settings to block the users on your network from accessing certain web sites.
Figure 109 Parental Control Rule: Add/Edit
196
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
Chapter 16 Parental Control
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 82 Parental Control Rule: Add/Edit
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
General
Active
Select the checkbox to activate this parental control rule.
Parental
Control Profile
Name
Enter a descriptive name for the rule.
Home Network
User
Select the LAN user that you want to apply this rule to from the drop-down list box. If you
select Cu st om , enter the LAN user’s MAC address. If you select All, the rule applies to all
LAN users.
Internet Access Schedule
Day
Select check boxes for the days that you want the Device to perform parental control.
Time
Drag the time bar to define the time that the LAN user is allowed access.
Network Service
Network
Service Setting
If you select Block , the Device prohibits the users from viewing the Web sites with the URLs
listed below.
If you select Allow , the Device blocks access to all URLs except ones listed below.
Add new
service
Click this to show a screen in which you can add a new service rule. You can configure the
Se r vice N a m e , Pr ot ocol, and N a m e of the new rule.
This shows the index number of the rule. Select the checkbox next to the rule to activate it.
Service Name
This shows the name of the rule.
Protocol:Port
This shows the protocol and the port of the rule.
Modify/Delete
Click the Edit icon to go to the screen where you can edit the rule.
Click the D e le t e icon to delete an existing rule.
Blocked Site/
URL Keyword
Click Add to show a screen to enter the URL of web site or URL keyword to which the Device
blocks access. Click D e le t e to remove it.
Apply
Click this button to save your settings back to the Device.
Cancel
Click Ca n ce l to restore your previously saved settings.
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
197
Chapter 16 Parental Control
198
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
C HAPTER
17
Scheduler Rule
17.1 Overview
You can define time periods and days during which the Device performs scheduled rules of certain
features (such as Firewall Access Control) in the Scheduler Rule screen.
17.2 The Scheduler Rule Screen
Use this screen to view, add, or edit time schedule rules.
Click Se cur it y > Sche dule r Rule to open the following screen.
Figure 110 Security > Scheduler Rule
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 83 Security > Scheduler Rule
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Add new rule
Click this to create a new rule.
This is the index number of the entry.
Rule Name
This shows the name of the rule.
Day
This shows the day(s) on which this rule is enabled.
Time
This shows the period of time on which this rule is enabled.
Description
This shows the description of this rule.
Modify/Delete
Click the Edit icon to edit the schedule.
Click the D e le t e icon to delete a scheduler rule.
Note: You cannot delete a scheduler rule once it is applied to a certain feature.
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
199
Chapter 17 Scheduler Rule
17.2.1 Add/Edit a Schedule
Click the Add button in the Sche dule r Rule screen or click the Edit icon next to a schedule rule to
open the following screen. Use this screen to configure a restricted access schedule.
Figure 111 Scheduler Rule: Add/Edit
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 84 Scheduler Rule: Add/Edit
200
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Rule Name
Enter a name (up to 31 printable English keyboard characters, not including spaces) for this
schedule.
Day
Select check boxes for the days that you want the Device to perform this scheduler rule.
Time if Day
Range
Enter the time period of each day, in 24-hour format, during which the rule will be enforced.
Description
Enter a description for this scheduler rule.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel
Click Ca n ce l to exit this screen without saving.
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
C HAPTER
18
Certificates
18.1 Overview
The Device can use certificates (also called digital IDs) to authenticate users. Certificates are based
on public-private key pairs. A certificate contains the certificate owner’s identity and public key.
Certificates provide a way to exchange public keys for use in authentication.
18.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
• The Loca l Ce r t ifica t e s screen lets you generate certification requests and import the Device's
CA-signed certificates (Section 18.4 on page 205).
• The Tr u st e d CA screen lets you save the certificates of trusted CAs to the Device (Section 18.4
on page 205).
18.2 What You Need to Know
The following terms and concepts may help as you read through this chapter.
Certification Authority
A Certification Authority (CA) issues certificates and guarantees the identity of each certificate
owner. There are commercial certification authorities like CyberTrust or VeriSign and government
certification authorities. The certification authority uses its private key to sign certificates. Anyone
can then use the certification authority's public key to verify the certificates. You can use the Device
to generate certification requests that contain identifying information and public keys and then send
the certification requests to a certification authority.
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
201
Chapter 18 Certificates
18.3 The Local Certificates Screen
Click Se cur it y > Ce r t ifica t e s to open the Loca l Ce r t ifica t e s screen. This is the Device’s summary
list of certificates and certification requests.
Figure 112 Security > Certificates > Local Certificates
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 85 Security > Certificates > Local Certificates
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Private Key is
protected by a
password?
Select the check box and enter the private key into the text box to store it on the Device.
The private key should not exceed 63 ASCII characters (not including spaces).
Browse...
Click this to find the certificate file you want to upload.
Import Certificate
Click this button to save the certificate that you have enrolled from a certification
authority from your computer to the Device.
Create Certificate
Request
Click this button to go to the screen where you can have the Device generate a
certification request.
Current File
This field displays the name used to identify this certificate. It is recommended that you
give each certificate a unique name.
Subject
This field displays identifying information about the certificate’s owner, such as CN
(Common Name), OU (Organizational Unit or department), O (Organization or company)
and C (Country). It is recommended that each certificate have unique subject
information.
Issuer
This field displays identifying information about the certificate’s issuing certification
authority, such as a common name, organizational unit or department, organization or
company and country.
Valid From
This field displays the date that the certificate becomes applicable. The text displays in
red and includes a N ot Ye t V a lid! message if the certificate has not yet become
applicable.
Valid To
This field displays the date that the certificate expires. The text displays in red and
includes an Ex pir in g! or Ex pir e d! message if the certificate is about to expire or has
already expired.
Modify/Delete
Click the V ie w icon to open a screen with an in-depth list of information about the
certificate (or certification request).
For a certification request, click Loa d Sign e d to import the signed certificate.
Click the Re m ove icon to delete the certificate (or certification request). You cannot
delete a certificate that one or more features is configured to use.
202
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
Chapter 18 Certificates
18.3.1 Create Certificate Request
Click Se cur it y > Ce r t ifica t e s > Loca l Ce r t ifica t e s and then Cr e a t e Ce r t ifica t e Re que st to
open the following screen. Use this screen to have the Device generate a certification request.
Figure 113 Create Certificate Request
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 86 Create Certificate Request
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Certificate
Name
Type up to 63 ASCII characters (not including spaces) to identify this certificate.
Common Name
Select Au t o to have the Device configure this field automatically. Or select Cu st om ize to
enter it manually.
Type the IP address (in dotted decimal notation), domain name or e-mail address in the field
provided. The domain name or e-mail address can be up to 63 ASCII characters. The
domain name or e-mail address is for identification purposes only and can be any string.
Organization
Name
Type up to 63 characters to identify the company or group to which the certificate owner
belongs. You may use any character, including spaces, but the Device drops trailing spaces.
State/Province
Name
Type up to 32 characters to identify the state or province where the certificate owner is
located. You may use any character, including spaces, but the Device drops trailing spaces.
Country/Region
Name
Select a country to identify the nation where the certificate owner is located.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel
Click Ca n ce l to exit this screen without saving.
After you click Apply, the following screen displays to notify you that you need to get the certificate
request signed by a Certificate Authority. If you already have, click Loa d_ Signe d to import the
signed certificate into the Device. Otherwise click Ba ck to return to the Loca l Ce r t ifica t e s screen.
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
203
Chapter 18 Certificates
Figure 114 Certificate Request Created
18.3.2 Load Signed Certificate
After you create a certificate request and have it signed by a Certificate Authority, in the Loca l
Ce r t ifica t e s screen click the certificate request’s Loa d Sign e d icon to import the signed certificate
into the Device.
204
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
Chapter 18 Certificates
Note: You must remove any spaces from the certificate’s filename before you can import
it.
Figure 115 Load Signed Certificate
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 87 Load Signed Certificate
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Certificate
Name
This is the name of the signed certificate.
Certificate
Copy and paste the signed certificate into the text box to store it on the Device.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel
Click Ca n ce l to exit this screen without saving.
18.4 The Trusted CA Screen
Click Se cur it y > Ce r t ifica t e s > Tr u st e d CA to open the following screen. This screen displays a
summary list of certificates of the certification authorities that you have set the Device to accept as
trusted. The Device accepts any valid certificate signed by a certification authority on this list as
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
205
Chapter 18 Certificates
being trustworthy; thus you do not need to import any certificate that is signed by one of these
certification authorities.
Figure 116 Security > Certificates > Trusted CA
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 88 Security > Certificates > Trusted CA
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Import
Certificate
Click this button to open a screen where you can save the certificate of a certification
authority that you trust to the Device.
This is the index number of the entry.
Name
This field displays the name used to identify this certificate.
Subject
This field displays information that identifies the owner of the certificate, such as Common
Name (CN), OU (Organizational Unit or department), Organization (O), State (ST) and
Country (C). It is recommended that each certificate have unique subject information.
Type
This field displays general information about the certificate. ca means that a Certification
Authority signed the certificate.
Modify/Delete
Click the Vie w icon to open a screen with an in-depth list of information about the
certificate (or certification request).
Click the Re m ove button to delete the certificate (or certification request). You cannot
delete a certificate that one or more features is configured to use.
18.4.1 View Trusted CA Certificate
Click the Vie w icon in the Tr u st e d CA screen to open the following screen. Use this screen to view
in-depth information about the certification authority’s certificate.
Figure 117 Trusted CA: View
206
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
Chapter 18 Certificates
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 89 Trusted CA: View
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Name
This field displays the identifying name of this certificate.
The read-only text box displays the certificate in Privacy Enhanced Mail (PEM) format. PEM
uses base 64 to convert the binary certificate into a printable form.
You can copy and paste the certificate into an e-mail to send to friends or colleagues or you
can copy and paste the certificate into a text editor and save the file on a management
computer for later distribution (via floppy disk for example).
Back
Click Ba ck to return to the previous screen.
18.4.2 Import Trusted CA Certificate
Click the I m por t Ce r t ifica t e button in the Tr ust e d CA screen to open the following screen. The
Device trusts any valid certificate signed by any of the imported trusted CA certificates.
Figure 118 Trusted CA: Import Certificate
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 90 Trusted CA: Import Certificate
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Certificate File
Path
Type in the location of the certificate you want to upload in this field or click Br ow se ... to
find it.
Enable Trusted
CA for 802.1x
Authentication
If you select this check box, the trusted CA will be used for 802.1x authentication. The
selected trusted CA will be displayed in the N e t w or k Se t t in g > Br oa dba n d > 8 0 2 .1 x :
Edit screen.
Certificate
Copy and paste the certificate into the text box to store it on the Device.
OK
Click OK to save your changes.
Cancel
Click Ca n ce l to exit this screen without saving.
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
207
Chapter 18 Certificates
208
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
C HAPTER
19
VPN
19.1 Overview
A virtual private network (VPN) provides secure communications over the the Internet. Internet
Protocol Security (IPSec) is a standards-based VPN that provides confidentiality, data integrity, and
authentication. This chapter shows you how to configure the Device’s VPN settings.
19.2 IPSec VPN
19.2.1 The General Screen
Use this screen to view and manage your VPN tunnel policies. The following figure helps explain the
main fields in the web configurator.
Figure 119 IPSec Fields Summary
Remote Network
Local Network
VPN Tunnel
Click Se cur it y > VPN to open this screen as shown next.
Figure 120 IPSec VPN
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
209
Chapter 19 VPN
This screen contains the following fields:
Table 91 IPSec VPN
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Add new connection Click this button to add an item to the list.
Enable
This displays if the VPN policy is enabled.
Connection Name
The name of the VPN connection.
Remote Gateway
This is the IP address of the remote IPSec router in the IKE SA.
Local Addresses
This displays the IP address(es) on the LAN behind your Device.
Remote Addresses
This displays the IP address(es) on the LAN behind the remote IPSec’s router.
Delete
Click the D e le t e icon to delete an existing rule.
19.2.2 IPSec VPN: Add
Use these settings to add or edit VPN policies. Click Se cur it y > VPN > Add ne w conn e ct ion to
open this screen as shown next.
210
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
Chapter 19 VPN
Figure 121 IPSec VPN: Add
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
211
Chapter 19 VPN
This screen contains the following fields:
Table 92 IPSec VPN: Add
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
IPSec Setup
IPSec
Connection
Name
Enter the name of the VPN connection.
Tunnel Mode
Select which protocol you want to use in the IPSec SA. Choices are:
AH (RFC 2402) - provides integrity, authentication, sequence integrity (replay
resistance), and non-repudiation but not encryption. If you select AH , you must select
an Aut h e nt ica t ion algorithm.
ESP (RFC 2406) - provides encryption and the same services offered by AH , but its
authentication is weaker. If you select ESP, you must select an En cr ypt ion algorithm
and Authentication algorithm.
Both AH and ESP increase processing requirements and latency (delay). The Device
and remote IPSec router must use the same active protocol.
Remote IPSec
Gateway
Address
Enter the IP address of the remote IPSec router in the IKE SA.
Local
Local Address
Type
Select Sin gle to have only one local LAN IP address use the VPN tunnel. Select Subne t
to specify local LAN IP addresses by their subnet mask.
IP Address for
VPN
If Sin gle is selected, enter a (static) IP address on the LAN behind your Device.
IP Subnetmask
If Su bn e t is selected, enter the subnet mask to identify the network address.
If Su bn e t is selected, specify IP addresses on a network by their subnet mask by
entering a (static) IP address on the LAN behind your Device. Then enter the subnet
mask to identify the network address.
Remote
Remote Address
Type
Select Sin gle to have only one remote LAN IP address use the VPN tunnel. Select
Su bn e t to specify remote LAN IP addresses by their subnet mask.
IP Address for
VPN
If Sin gle is selected, enter a (static) IP address on the LAN behind the remote IPSec’s
router.
If Su bn e t is selected, specify IP addresses on a network by their subnet mask by
entering a (static) IP address on the LAN behind the remote IPSec’s router. Then enter
the subnet mask to identify the network address.
IP Subnetmask
If Su bn e t is selected, enter the subnet mask to identify the network address.
Security Protocol - Auto
Key Exchange
Method
Select the key exchange method:
Au t o( I KE) - Select this to use automatic IKE key management VPN connection policy.
M a n u a l - Select this option to configure a VPN connection policy that uses a manual key
instead of IKE key management. This may be useful if you have problems with IKE key
management.
Note: Only use manual key as a temporary solution, because it is not as secure as a
regular IPSec SA.
Authentication
Method
Select Pr e - Sh a r e d Ke y to use a pre-shared key for authentication, and type in your
pre-shared key. A pre-shared key identifies a communicating party during a phase 1 IKE
negotiation. It is called "pre-shared" because you have to share it with another party
before you can communicate with them over a secure connection.
Select Ce r t ifica t e to use a certificate for authentication.
212
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
Chapter 19 VPN
Table 92 IPSec VPN: Add
LABEL
Pre-Shared Key
DESCRIPTION
Type your pre-shared key in this field. A pre-shared key identifies a communicating
party during a phase 1 IKE negotiation.
Type from 8 to 31 case-sensitive ASCII characters or from 16 to 62 hexadecimal ("0-9",
"A-F") characters. You must precede a hexadecimal key with a "0x” (zero x), which is
not counted as part of the 16 to 62 character range for the key. For example, in
"0x0123456789ABCDEF", “0x” denotes that the key is hexadecimal and
“0123456789ABCDEF” is the key itself.
Certificates
If you use a certificate for authentication, select the certificates to use from the lists.
You can import certificates in the Se cu r it y > Ce r t ifica t e s screens.
Perfect Forward
Secrecy (PFS)
Select whether or not you want to enable Perfect Forward Secrecy (PFS)
PFS changes the root key that is used to generate encryption keys for each IPSec SA.
The longer the key, the more secure the encryption, but also the longer it takes to
encrypt and decrypt information. Both routers must use the same DH key group.
Choices are:
D iffie - H e llm a n Gr ou p2 - use a 1024-bit random number
D iffie - H e llm a n Gr ou p5 - use a 1536-bit random number
D iffie - H e llm a n Gr ou p1 4 - use a 2048-bit random number
Show Advanced
Settings
Click this to display advanced settings.
Advanced Setting - Phase 1
Mode
Select the negotiation mode to use to negotiate the IKE SA. Choices are:
M a in - this encrypts the Device’s and remote IPSec router’s identities but takes more
time to establish the IKE SA.
Aggr e ssive - this is faster but does not encrypt the identities.
The Device and the remote IPSec router must use the same negotiation mode.
Encryption
Algorithm
Select which key size and encryption algorithm to use in the IKE SA. Choices are:
D ES - a 56-bit key with the DES encryption algorithm
3 D ES - a 168-bit key with the DES encryption algorithm
AES1 2 8 - a 128-bit key with the AES encryption algorithm
AES1 9 6 - a 196-bit key with the AES encryption algorithm
AES2 5 6 - a 256-bit key with the AES encryption algorithm
The Device and the remote IPSec router must use the same key size and encryption
algorithm. Longer keys require more processing power, resulting in increased latency
and decreased throughput.
Integrity
Algorithm
Select which hash algorithm to use to authenticate packet data. Choices are M D 5 ,
SH A1 , SH A2 - 2 5 6 and SH A2 - 5 1 2 . SH A is generally considered stronger than M D 5 ,
but it is also slower.
Diffie-Hellman
Group for Key
Exchange
Select which Diffie-Hellman key group you want to use for encryption keys. Choices for
number of bits in the random number are: 768, 1024, 2048, 3072, 4096, 6144, 8192.
The longer the key, the more secure the encryption, but also the longer it takes to
encrypt and decrypt information. Both routers must use the same DH key group.
Key Life Time
Define the length of time before an IPSec SA automatically renegotiates in this field.
A short SA Life Time increases security by forcing the two VPN gateways to update the
encryption and authentication keys. However, every time the VPN tunnel renegotiates,
all users accessing remote resources are temporarily disconnected.
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
213
Chapter 19 VPN
Table 92 IPSec VPN: Add
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Phase 2
Encryption
Algorithm
Select which key size and encryption algorithm to use in the IKE SA. Choices are:
D ES - a 56-bit key with the DES encryption algorithm
3 D ES - a 168-bit key with the DES encryption algorithm
AES1 2 8 - a 128-bit key with the AES encryption algorithm
AES1 9 6 - a 196-bit key with the AES encryption algorithm
AES2 5 6 - a 256-bit key with the AES encryption algorithm
N ULL - no encryption key or algorithm
The Device and the remote IPSec router must use the same key size and encryption
algorithm. Longer keys require more processing power, resulting in increased latency
and decreased throughput.
Integrity
Algorithm
Select which hash algorithm to use to authenticate packet data. Choices are M D 5 ,
SH A1 . SH A is generally considered stronger than M D 5 , but it is also slower.
Diffie-Hellman
Group for Key
Exchange
Select which Diffie-Hellman key group you want to use for encryption keys. Choices for
number of bits in the random number are: 768, 1024, 2048, 3072, 4096, 6144, 8192.
Key Life Time
Define the length of time before an IPSec SA automatically renegotiates in this field.
A short SA Life Time increases security by forcing the two VPN gateways to update the
encryption and authentication keys. However, every time the VPN tunnel renegotiates,
all users accessing remote resources are temporarily disconnected.
DPD Active
Enable Dead Peer Detection (DPD) Active check box if you want the Device to make sure
the remote IPSec router is there before it transmits data through the IKE SA. The
remote IPSec router must support DPD. If the remote IPSec router does not respond,
the Device shuts down the IKE SA.
Security Protocol - Manual
Key Exchange
Method
Select the key exchange method:
Au t o( I KE) - Select this to use automatic IKE key management VPN connection policy.
M a n u a l - Select this option to configure a VPN connection policy that uses a manual key
instead of IKE key management. This may be useful if you have problems with IKE key
management.
Note: Only use manual key as a temporary solution, because it is not as secure as a
regular IPSec SA.
Encryption
Algorithm
Select which key size and encryption algorithm to use in the IKE SA. Choices are:
D ES - a 56-bit key with the DES encryption algorithm
3 D ES - a 168-bit key with the DES encryption algorithm
AES - AES encryption algorithm
Encryption Key
This field is applicable when you select an Encryption Algorithm.
Enter the encryption key, which depends on the encryption algorithm.
D ES - type a unique key 16 hexadecimal characters long
3 D ES - type a unique key 48 hexadecimal characters long
AES - type a unique key 32, 48 or 64 hexadecimal characters long
Authentication
Algorithm
214
Select which hash algorithm to use to authenticate packet data. Choices are M D 5 ,
SH A1 . SH A is generally considered stronger than M D 5 , but it is also slower.
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
Chapter 19 VPN
Table 92 IPSec VPN: Add
LABEL
Authentication
Key
DESCRIPTION
Enter the authentication key, which depends on the authentication algorithm.
M D 5 - type a unique key 32 hexadecimal characters long
SH A1 - type a unique key 40 hexadecimal characters long
SPI
Type a unique SPI (Security Parameter Index) in hexadecimal characters.
The SPI is used to identify the Device during authentication.
The Device and remote IPSec router must use the same SPI.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel
Click Ca nce l to restore your previously saved settings.
19.3 Technical Reference
This section provides some technical background information about the topics covered in this
section.
19.3.1 IPSec Architecture
The overall IPSec architecture is shown as follows.
Figure 122 IPSec Architecture
IPSec Algorithms
The ESP (Encapsulating Security Payload) Protocol (RFC 2406) and AH (Authentication Header)
protocol (RFC 2402) describe the packet formats and the default standards for packet structure
(including implementation algorithms).
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
215
Chapter 19 VPN
The Encryption Algorithm describes the use of encryption techniques such as DES (Data Encryption
Standard) and Triple DES algorithms.
The Authentication Algorithms, HMAC-MD5 (RFC 2403) and HMAC-SHA-1 (RFC 2404, provide an
authentication mechanism for the AH and ESP protocols.
Key Management
Key management allows you to determine whether to use IKE (ISAKMP) or manual key
configuration in order to set up a VPN.
19.3.2 Encapsulation
The two modes of operation for IPSec VPNs are Tr a n spor t mode and Tunne l mode. At the time of
writing, the Device supports Tun n e l mode only.
Figure 123 Transport and Tunnel Mode IPSec Encapsulation
Transport Mode
Tr a nspor t mode is used to protect upper layer protocols and only affects the data in the IP packet.
In Tr a n spor t mode, the IP packet contains the security protocol (AH or ESP) located after the
original IP header and options, but before any upper layer protocols contained in the packet (such
as TCP and UDP).
With ESP, protection is applied only to the upper layer protocols contained in the packet. The IP
header information and options are not used in the authentication process. Therefore, the
originating IP address cannot be verified for integrity against the data.
With the use of AH as the security protocol, protection is extended forward into the IP header to
verify the integrity of the entire packet by use of portions of the original IP header in the hashing
process.
Tunnel Mode
Tunne l mode encapsulates the entire IP packet to transmit it securely. A Tunne l mode is required
for gateway services to provide access to internal systems. Tunne l mode is fundamentally an IP
tunnel with authentication and encryption. This is the most common mode of operation. Tu n ne l
mode is required for gateway to gateway and host to gateway communications. Tunne l mode
communications have two sets of IP headers:
• Out side he a de r : The outside IP header contains the destination IP address of the VPN gateway.
216
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
Chapter 19 VPN
• I nside he a de r : The inside IP header contains the destination IP address of the final system
behind the VPN gateway. The security protocol appears after the outer IP header and before the
inside IP header.
19.3.3 IKE Phases
There are two phases to every IKE (Internet Key Exchange) negotiation – phase 1 (Authentication)
and phase 2 (Key Exchange). A phase 1 exchange establishes an IKE SA and the second one uses
that SA to negotiate SAs for IPSec.
Figure 124 Two Phases to Set Up the IPSec SA
In phase 1 you must:
• Choose a negotiation mode.
• Authenticate the connection by entering a pre-shared key.
• Choose an encryption algorithm.
• Choose an authentication algorithm.
• Choose a Diffie-Hellman public-key cryptography key group.
• Set the IKE SA lifetime. This field allows you to determine how long an IKE SA should stay up
before it times out. An IKE SA times out when the IKE SA lifetime period expires. If an IKE SA
times out when an IPSec SA is already established, the IPSec SA stays connected.
In phase 2 you must:
• Choose an encryption algorithm.
• Choose an authentication algorithm
• Choose a Diffie-Hellman public-key cryptography key group.
• Set the IPSec SA lifetime. This field allows you to determine how long the IPSec SA should stay
up before it times out. The Device automatically renegotiates the IPSec SA if there is traffic when
the IPSec SA lifetime period expires. If an IPSec SA times out, then the IPSec router must
renegotiate the SA the next time someone attempts to send traffic.
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
217
Chapter 19 VPN
19.3.4 Negotiation Mode
The phase 1 N e got ia t ion M ode you select determines how the Security Association (SA) will be
established for each connection through IKE negotiations.
• M a in M ode ensures the highest level of security when the communicating parties are
negotiating authentication (phase 1). It uses 6 messages in three round trips: SA negotiation,
Diffie-Hellman exchange and an exchange of nonces (a nonce is a random number). This mode
features identity protection (your identity is not revealed in the negotiation).
• Aggr e ssive M ode is quicker than M a in M ode because it eliminates several steps when the
communicating parties are negotiating authentication (phase 1). However the trade-off is that
faster speed limits its negotiating power and it also does not provide identity protection. It is
useful in remote access situations where the address of the initiator is not know by the responder
and both parties want to use pre-shared key authentication.
19.3.5 IPSec and NAT
Read this section if you are running IPSec on a host computer behind the Device.
NAT is incompatible with the AH protocol in both Tr a nspor t and Tu n n e l mode. An IPSec VPN using
the AH protocol digitally signs the outbound packet, both data payload and headers, with a hash
value appended to the packet. When using AH protocol, packet contents (the data payload) are not
encrypted.
A NAT device in between the IPSec endpoints will rewrite either the source or destination address
with one of its own choosing. The VPN device at the receiving end will verify the integrity of the
incoming packet by computing its own hash value, and complain that the hash value appended to
the received packet doesn't match. The VPN device at the receiving end doesn't know about the
NAT in the middle, so it assumes that the data has been maliciously altered.
IPSec using ESP in Tu n ne l mode encapsulates the entire original packet (including headers) in a
new IP packet. The new IP packet's source address is the outbound address of the sending VPN
gateway, and its destination address is the inbound address of the VPN device at the receiving end.
When using ESP protocol with authentication, the packet contents (in this case, the entire original
packet) are encrypted. The encrypted contents, but not the new headers, are signed with a hash
value appended to the packet.
Tunne l mode ESP with authentication is compatible with NAT because integrity checks are
performed over the combination of the "original header plus original payload," which is unchanged
by a NAT device.
Tr a nspor t mode ESP with authentication is not compatible with NAT.
Table 93 VPN and NAT
218
SECURITY PROTOCOL
MODE
NAT
AH
Transport
AH
Tunnel
ESP
Transport
ESP
Tunnel
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
Chapter 19 VPN
19.3.6 VPN, NAT, and NAT Traversal
NAT is incompatible with the AH protocol in both transport and tunnel mode. An IPSec VPN using
the AH protocol digitally signs the outbound packet, both data payload and headers, with a hash
value appended to the packet, but a NAT device between the IPSec endpoints rewrites the source or
destination address. As a result, the VPN device at the receiving end finds a mismatch between the
hash value and the data and assumes that the data has been maliciously altered.
NAT is not normally compatible with ESP in transport mode either, but the Device’s N AT Tr a ve r sa l
feature provides a way to handle this. NAT traversal allows you to set up an IKE SA when there are
NAT routers between the two IPSec routers.
Figure 125 NAT Router Between IPSec Routers
Normally you cannot set up an IKE SA with a NAT router between the two IPSec routers because
the NAT router changes the header of the IPSec packet. NAT traversal solves the problem by adding
a UDP port 500 header to the IPSec packet. The NAT router forwards the IPSec packet with the UDP
port 500 header unchanged. In the above figure, when IPSec router A tries to establish an IKE SA,
IPSec router B checks the UDP port 500 header, and IPSec routers A and B build the IKE SA.
For NAT traversal to work, you must:
• Use ESP security protocol (in either transport or tunnel mode).
• Use IKE keying mode.
• Enable NAT traversal on both IPSec endpoints.
• Set the NAT router to forward UDP port 500 to IPSec router A.
Finally, NAT is compatible with ESP in tunnel mode because integrity checks are performed over the
combination of the "original header plus original payload," which is unchanged by a NAT device. The
compatibility of AH and ESP with NAT in tunnel and transport modes is summarized in the following
table.
Table 94 VPN and NAT
SECURITY PROTOCOL
MODE
NAT
AH
Transport
AH
Tunnel
ESP
Transport
Y*
ESP
Tunnel
Y* - This is supported in the Device if you enable NAT traversal.
19.3.7 Pre-Shared Key
A pre-shared key identifies a communicating party during a phase 1 IKE negotiation (see Section
19.3.3 on page 217 for more on IKE phases). It is called “pre-shared” because you have to share it
with another party before you can communicate with them over a secure connection.
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
219
Chapter 19 VPN
19.3.8 Diffie-Hellman (DH) Key Groups
Diffie-Hellman (DH) is a public-key cryptography protocol that allows two parties to establish a
shared secret over an unsecured communications channel. Diffie-Hellman is used within IKE SA
setup to establish session keys. Upon completion of the Diffie-Hellman exchange, the two peers
have a shared secret, but the IKE SA is not authenticated. For authentication, use pre-shared keys.
220
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
C HAPTER
20
Log
20.1 Overview
The web configurator allows you to choose which categories of events and/or alerts to have the
Device log and then display the logs or have the Device send them to an administrator (as e-mail)
or to a syslog server.
20.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
• Use the Syst e m Log screen to see the system logs (Section 20.2 on page 222).
• Use the Se cu r it y Log screen to see the security-related logs for the categories that you select
(Section 20.3 on page 223).
20.1.2 What You Need To Know
The following terms and concepts may help as you read this chapter.
Alerts and Logs
An alert is a type of log that warrants more serious attention. They include system errors, attacks
(access control) and attempted access to blocked web sites. Some categories such as Syst e m
Er r or s consist of both logs and alerts. You may differentiate them by their color in the Vie w Log
screen. Alerts display in red and logs display in black.
Syslog Overview
The syslog protocol allows devices to send event notification messages across an IP network to
syslog servers that collect the event messages. A syslog-enabled device can generate a syslog
message and send it to a syslog server.
Syslog is defined in RFC 3164. The RFC defines the packet format, content and system log related
information of syslog messages. Each syslog message has a facility and severity level. The syslog
facility identifies a file in the syslog server. Refer to the documentation of your syslog program for
details. The following table describes the syslog severity levels.
Table 95 Syslog Severity Levels
CODE
SEVERITY
Emergency: The system is unusable.
Alert: Action must be taken immediately.
Critical: The system condition is critical.
Error: There is an error condition on the system.
Warning: There is a warning condition on the system.
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
221
Chapter 20 Log
Table 95 Syslog Severity Levels
CODE
SEVERITY
Notice: There is a normal but significant condition on the system.
Informational: The syslog contains an informational message.
Debug: The message is intended for debug-level purposes.
20.2 The System Log Screen
Use the Syst e m Log screen to see the system logs. Click Syst e m M onit or > Log to open the
Syst e m Log screen.
Figure 126 System Monitor > Log > System Log
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 96 System Monitor > Log > System Log
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Level
Select a severity level from the drop-down list box. This filters search results according to
the severity level you have selected. When you select a severity, the Device searches
through all logs of that severity or higher.
Category
Select the type of logs to display.
Clear Log
Click this to delete all the logs.
Refresh
Click this to renew the log screen.
Export Log
Click this to export the selected log(s).
Email Log Now
Click this to send the log file(s) to the E-mail address you specify in the M a in t e n a n ce >
Logs Se t t in g screen.
System Log
222
This field is a sequential value and is not associated with a specific entry.
Time
This field displays the time the log was recorded.
Facility
The log facility allows you to send logs to different files in the syslog server. Refer to the
documentation of your syslog program for more details.
Level
This field displays the severity level of the logs that the device is to send to this syslog
server.
Messages
This field states the reason for the log.
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
Chapter 20 Log
20.3 The Security Log Screen
Use the Se cu r it y Log screen to see the security-related logs for the categories that you select.
Click Syst e m M onit or > Log > Se cur it y Log to open the following screen.
Figure 127 System Monitor > Log > Security Log
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 97 System Monitor > Log > Security Log
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Level
Select a severity level from the drop-down list box. This filters search results according to
the severity level you have selected. When you select a severity, the Device searches
through all logs of that severity or higher.
Category
Select the type of logs to display.
Clear Log
Click this to delete all the logs.
Refresh
Click this to renew the log screen.
Export Log
Click this to export the selected log(s).
Email Log Now
Click this to send the log file(s) to the E-mail address you specify in the M a in t e n a n ce >
Logs Se t t in g screen.
This field is a sequential value and is not associated with a specific entry.
Time
This field displays the time the log was recorded.
Facility
The log facility allows you to send logs to different files in the syslog server. Refer to the
documentation of your syslog program for more details.
Level
This field displays the severity level of the logs that the device is to send to this syslog
server.
Messages
This field states the reason for the log.
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
223
Chapter 20 Log
224
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
C HAPTER
21
Traffic Status
21.1 Overview
Use the Tr a ffic St a t us screens to look at network traffic status and statistics of the WAN and LAN
interfaces.
21.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
• Use the W AN screen to view the WAN traffic statistics (Section 21.2 on page 225).
• Use the LAN screen to view the LAN traffic statistics (Section 21.3 on page 227).
21.2 The WAN Status Screen
Click Syst e m M onit or > Tr a ffic St a t us to open the W AN screen. The figure in this screen shows
the number of bytes received and sent on the Device.
Figure 128 System Monitor > Traffic Status > WAN
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
225
Chapter 21 Traffic Status
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 98 System Monitor > Traffic Status > WAN
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Connected
Interface
This shows the name of the WAN interface that is currently connected.
Packets Sent
Data
This indicates the number of transmitted packets on this interface.
Error
This indicates the number of frames with errors transmitted on this interface.
Drop
This indicates the number of outgoing packets dropped on this interface.
Packets Received
Data
This indicates the number of received packets on this interface.
Error
This indicates the number of frames with errors received on this interface.
Drop
This indicates the number of received packets dropped on this interface.
more...hide
more
Click m or e ... to show more information. Click h ide m or e to hide them.
Disabled
Interface
This shows the name of the WAN interface that is currently disconnected.
Packets Sent
Data
This indicates the number of transmitted packets on this interface.
Error
This indicates the number of frames with errors transmitted on this interface.
Drop
This indicates the number of outgoing packets dropped on this interface.
Packets Received
226
Data
This indicates the number of received packets on this interface.
Error
This indicates the number of frames with errors received on this interface.
Drop
This indicates the number of received packets dropped on this interface.
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
Chapter 21 Traffic Status
21.3 The LAN Status Screen
Click Syst e m M onit or > Tr a ffic St a t us > LAN to open the following screen. The figure in this
screen shows the interface that is currently connected on the Device.
Figure 129 System Monitor > Traffic Status > LAN
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 99 System Monitor > Traffic Status > LAN
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Refresh Interval
Select how often you want the Device to update this screen.
Interface
This shows the LAN or WLAN interface.
Bytes Sent
This indicates the number of bytes transmitted on this interface.
Bytes Received
This indicates the number of bytes received on this interface.
more...hide more
Click m or e ... to show more information. Click hide m or e to hide them.
Interface
This shows the LAN or WLAN interface.
Sent (Packets)
Data
This indicates the number of transmitted packets on this interface.
Error
This indicates the number of frames with errors transmitted on this interface.
Drop
This indicates the number of outgoing packets dropped on this interface.
Received (Packets)
Data
This indicates the number of received packets on this interface.
Error
This indicates the number of frames with errors received on this interface.
Drop
This indicates the number of received packets dropped on this interface.
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
227
Chapter 21 Traffic Status
21.4 The NAT Status Screen
Click Syst e m M onit or > Tr a ffic St a t us > N AT to open the following screen. The figure in this
screen shows the NAT statistics for hosts that are currently connected on the Device.
Figure 130 System Monitor > Traffic Status > NAT
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 100 System Monitor > Traffic Status > NAT
228
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Refresh Interval
Select how often you want the Device to update this screen.
Device Name
This displays the name of the connected host.
IP Address
This displays the IP address of the connected host.
MAC Address
This displays the MAC address of the connected host.
No. of Open
Session
This displays the number of open NAT sessions for the connected host.
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
C HAPTER
22
ARP Table
22.1 Overview
Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) is a protocol for mapping an Internet Protocol address (IP
address) to a physical machine address, also known as a Media Access Control or MAC address, on
the local area network.
An IP (version 4) address is 32 bits long. In an Ethernet LAN, MAC addresses are 48 bits long. The
ARP Table maintains an association between each MAC address and its corresponding IP address.
22.1.1 How ARP Works
When an incoming packet destined for a host device on a local area network arrives at the device,
the device's ARP program looks in the ARP Table and, if it finds the address, sends it to the device.
If no entry is found for the IP address, ARP broadcasts the request to all the devices on the LAN.
The device fills in its own MAC and IP address in the sender address fields, and puts the known IP
address of the target in the target IP address field. In addition, the device puts all ones in the target
MAC field (FF.FF.FF.FF.FF.FF is the Ethernet broadcast address). The replying device (which is either
the IP address of the device being sought or the router that knows the way) replaces the broadcast
address with the target's MAC address, swaps the sender and target pairs, and unicasts the answer
directly back to the requesting machine. ARP updates the ARP Table for future reference and then
sends the packet to the MAC address that replied.
22.2 ARP Table Screen
Use the ARP table to view IP-to-MAC address mapping(s). To open this screen, click Syst e m
M onit or > ARP Ta ble .
Figure 131 System Monitor > ARP Table
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 101 System Monitor > ARP Table
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
This is the ARP table entry number.
IP Address
This is the learned IP address of a device connected to a port.
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
229
Chapter 22 ARP Table
Table 101 System Monitor > ARP Table (continued)
LABEL
230
DESCRIPTION
MAC Address
This is the MAC address of the device with the listed IP address.
Device
This is the type of interface used by the device. You can click on the device type to go to its
configuration screen.
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
C HAPTER
23
Routing Table
23.1 Overview
Routing is based on the destination address only and the Device takes the shortest path to forward
a packet.
23.2 The Routing Table Screen
Click Syst e m M onit or > Rou t in g Ta ble to open the following screen.
Figure 132 System Monitor > Routing Table
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 102 System Monitor > Routing Table
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Destination
This indicates the destination IP address of this route.
Gateway
This indicates the IP address of the gateway that helps forward this route’s traffic.
Subnet Mask
This indicates the destination subnet mask of this route.
Flag
This indicates the route status.
U- Up: The route is up.
!- Re j e ct : The route is blocked and will force a route lookup to fail.
G- Ga t e w a y: The route uses a gateway to forward traffic.
H - H ost : The target of the route is a host.
R- Re in st a t e : The route is reinstated for dynamic routing.
D - D yn a m ic ( r e dir e ct ) : The route is dynamically installed by a routing daemon or redirect.
M - M odifie d ( r e dir e ct ) : The route is modified from a routing daemon or redirect.
Metric
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
The metric represents the "cost of transmission". A router determines the best route for
transmission by choosing a path with the lowest "cost". The smaller the number, the lower
the "cost".
231
Chapter 23 Routing Table
Table 102 System Monitor > Routing Table (continued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Service
This indicates the name of the service used to forward the route.
Interface
This indicates the name of the interface through which the route is forwarded.
br 0 indicates the LAN interface.
pt m 0 indicates the WAN interface using IPoE or in bridge mode.
ppp0 indicates the WAN interface using PPPoE.
232
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
C HAPTER
24
IGMP Status
24.1 Overview
Use the I GM P St a t us screens to look at IGMP group status and traffic statistics.
24.2 The IGMP Group Status Screen
Use this screen to look at the current list of multicast groups the Device has joined and which ports
have joined it. To open this screen, click Syst e m M onit or > I GM P Gr oup St a t us.
Figure 133 System Monitor > IGMP Group Status
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 103 System Monitor > IGMP Group Status
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Interface
This field displays the name of an interface on the Device that belongs to an IGMP multicast
group.
Multicast Group
This field displays the name of the IGMP multicast group to which the interface belongs.
Filter Mode
I N CLUD E means that only the IP addresses in the Sou r ce List get to receive the multicast
group’s traffic.
EXCLUD E means that the IP addresses in the Sour ce List are not allowed to receive the
multicast group’s traffic but other IP addresses can.
Source List
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
This is the list of IP addresses that are allowed or not allowed to receive the multicast
group’s traffic depending on the filter mode.
233
Chapter 24 IGMP Status
234
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
C HAPTER
25
xDSL Statistics
25.1 The xDSL Statistics Screen
Use this screen to view detailed DSL statistics. Click Syst e m M on it or > x D SL St a t ist ics to open
the following screen.
Figure 134 System Monitor > xDSL Statistics
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
235
Chapter 25 xDSL Statistics
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 104 Status > xDSL Statistics
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Refresh Interval
Select the time interval for refreshing statistics.
Line
Select which DSL line’s statistics you want to display.
xDSL Training
Status
This displays the current state of setting up the DSL connection.
Mode
This displays the ITU standard used for this connection.
Traffic Type
This displays the type of traffic the DSL port is sending and receiving. I na ct ive displays if
the DSL port is not currently sending or receiving traffic.
Link Uptime
This displays how long the port has been running (or connected) since the last time it was
started.
xDSL Port Details
Upstream
These are the statistics for the traffic direction going out from the port to the service
provider.
Downstream
These are the statistics for the traffic direction coming into the port from the service
provider.
Line Rate
These are the data transfer rates at which the port is sending and receiving data.
Actual Net Data
Rate
These are the rates at which the port is sending and receiving the payload data without
transport layer protocol headers and traffic.
Trellis Coding
This displays whether or not the port is using Trellis coding for traffic it is sending and
receiving. Trellis coding helps to reduce the noise in ADSL transmissions. Trellis may reduce
throughput but it makes the connection more stable.
SNR Margin
This is the upstream and downstream Signal-to-Noise Ratio margin (in dB). A DMT subcarrier’s SNR is the ratio between the received signal power and the received noise power.
The signal-to-noise ratio margin is the maximum that the received noise power could
increase with the system still being able to meet its transmission targets.
Actual Delay
This is the upstream and downstream interleave delay. It is the wait (in milliseconds) that
determines the size of a single block of data to be interleaved (assembled) and then
transmitted. Interleave delay is used when transmission error correction (Reed- Solomon)
is necessary due to a less than ideal telephone line. The bigger the delay, the bigger the
data block size, allowing better error correction to be performed.
Transmit Power
This is the upstream and downstream far end actual aggregate transmit power (in dBm).
Upstream is how much power the port is using to transmit to the service provider.
Downstream is how much port the service provider is using to transmit to the port.
Receive Power
Upstream is how much power the service provider is receiving from the port. Downstream
is how much power the port is receiving from the service provider.
Actual INP
Sudden spikes in the line’s level of external noise (impulse noise) can cause errors and
result in lost packets. This could especially impact the quality of multimedia traffic such as
voice or video. Impulse noise protection (INP) provides a buffer to allow for correction of
errors caused by error correction to deal with this. The number of DMT (Discrete MultiTone) symbols shows the level of impulse noise protection for the upstream and
downstream traffic. A higher symbol value provides higher error correction capability, but it
causes overhead and higher delay which may increase error rates in received multimedia
data.
Total Attenuation
This is the upstream and downstream line attenuation, measured in decibels (dB). This
attenuation is the difference between the power transmitted at the near-end and the power
received at the far-end. Attenuation is affected by the channel characteristics (wire gauge,
quality, condition and length of the physical line).
Attainable Net
Data Rate
These are the highest theoretically possible transfer rates at which the port could send and
receive payload data without transport layer protocol headers and traffic.
xDSL Counters
236
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
Chapter 25 xDSL Statistics
Table 104 Status > xDSL Statistics (continued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Downstream
These are the statistics for the traffic direction coming into the port from the service
provider.
Upstream
These are the statistics for the traffic direction going out from the port to the service
provider.
FEC
This is the number of Far End Corrected blocks.
CRC
This is the number of Cyclic Redundancy Checks.
ES
This is the number of Errored Seconds meaning the number of seconds containing at least
one errored block or at least one defect.
SES
This is the number of Severely Errored Seconds meaning the number of seconds containing
30% or more errored blocks or at least one defect. This is a subset of ES.
UAS
This is the number of UnAvailable Seconds.
LOS
This is the number of Loss Of Signal seconds.
LOF
This is the number of Loss Of Frame seconds.
LOM
This is the number of Loss of Margin seconds.
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
237
Chapter 25 xDSL Statistics
238
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
C HAPTER
26
3G Statistics
26.1 Overview
Use the 3 G St a t ist ics screens to look at 3G Internet connection status.
26.2 The 3G Statistics Screen
To open this screen, click Syst e m M onit or > 3 G St a t ist ics.
Figure 135 System Monitor > 3G Statistics
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 105 System Monitor > 3G Statistics
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Refresh
Interval
Select how often you want the Device to update this screen. Select N o Re fr e sh to stop
refreshing.
3G Status
This field displays the status of the 3G Internet connection. This field can display:
GSM - Global System for Mobile Communications, 2G
GPRS - General Packet Radio Service, 2.5G
ED GE - Enhanced Data rates for GSM Evolution, 2.75G
W CD M A - Wideband Code Division Multiple Access, 3G
H SD PA - High-Speed Downlink Packet Access, 3.5G
H SUPA - High-Speed Uplink Packet Access, 3.75G
H SPA - HSDPA+HSUPA, 3.75G
Service
Provider
This field displays the name of the service provider.
Signal Strength
This field displays the strength of the signal in dBm.
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
239
Chapter 26 3G Statistics
Table 105 System Monitor > 3G Statistics (continued)
240
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Connection
Uptime
This field displays the time the connection has been up.
3G Card
Manufacturer
This field displays the manufacturer of the 3G card.
3G Card Model
This field displays the model name of the 3G card.
3G Card F/W
Version
This field displays the firmware version of the 3G card.
SIM Card IMSI
The International Mobile Subscriber Identity or IMSI is a unique identification number
associated with all cellular networks. This number is provisioned in the SIM card.
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
C HAPTER
27
User Account
27.1 Overview
In the Use r s Account screen, you can change the password of the user account that you used to
log in the Device.
27.2 The User Account Screen
Click M a in t e na n ce > Use r Accoun t to open the following screen.
Figure 136 Maintenance > User Account
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 106 Maintenance > User Account
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
User Name
This field displays the name of the account that you used to log in the system.
Old Password
Type the default password or the existing password you use to access the system in this
field.
New Password
Type your new system password (up to 256 characters). Note that as you type a password,
the screen displays a (*) for each character you type. After you change the password, use
the new password to access the Device.
Retype to
confirm
Type the new password again for confirmation.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel
Click Ca n ce l to restore your previously saved settings.
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
241
Chapter 27 User Account
242
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
C HAPTER
28
Remote Management
28.1 Overview
Remote Management allows you to manage your Device from a remote location through the
following interfaces:
• LAN
• WAN
• Trust Domain
Note: The Device is managed using the Web Configurator.
28.2 The Remote MGMT Screen
Use this screen to configure through which interface(s) users can use which service(s) to manage
the Device.
Click M a in t e n a n ce > Re m ot e M GM T to open the following screen.
Figure 137 Maintenance > Remote MGMT
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
243
Chapter 28 Remote Management
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 107 Maintenance > Remote MGMT
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Trust Domain
Status
This field displays whether the Trust Domain is active or not.
IP Address
Enter the Trust Domain IP address.
Services
This is the service you may use to access the Device.
LAN/WLAN
Select the En a ble check box for the corresponding services that you want to allow access to
the Device from the LAN/WLAN.
WAN
Select the En a ble check box for the corresponding services that you want to allow access to
the Device from the WAN.
Trust Domain
Select the En a ble check box for the corresponding services that you want to allow access to
the Device from the Trust Domain.
Port
You may change the server port number for a service if needed, however you must use the
same port number in order to use that service for remote management.
Certificate
244
HTTPS
Certificate
Select a certificate the HTTPS server (the Device) uses to authenticate itself to the HTTPS
client. You must have certificates already configured in the Ce r t ifica t e s screen.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes back to the Device.
Cancel
Click Ca n ce l to restore your previously saved settings.
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
C HAPTER
29
TR-069 Client
29.1 Overview
This chapter explains how to configure the Device’s TR-069 auto-configuration settings.
29.2 The TR-069 Client Screen
TR-069 defines how Customer Premise Equipment (CPE), for example your Device, can be managed
over the WAN by an Auto Configuration Server (ACS). TR-069 is based on sending Remote
Procedure Calls (RPCs) between an ACS and a client device. RPCs are sent in Extensible Markup
Language (XML) format over HTTP or HTTPS.
An administrator can use an ACS to remotely set up the Device, modify settings, perform firmware
upgrades as well as monitor and diagnose the Device. You have to enable the device to be managed
by the ACS and specify the ACS IP address or domain name and username and password.
Click M a in t e n a n ce > TR- 0 6 9 Clie n t to open the following screen. Use this screen to configure
your Device to be managed by an ACS.
Figure 138 Maintenance > TR-069 Client
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
245
Chapter 29 TR-069 Client
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 108 Maintenance > TR-069 Client
246
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Inform
Select En a ble for the Device to send periodic inform via TR-069 on the WAN. Otherwise,
select D isa ble .
Inform Interval
Enter the time interval (in seconds) at which the Device sends information to the autoconfiguration server.
ACS URL
Enter the URL or IP address of the auto-configuration server.
ACS User Name
Enter the TR-069 user name for authentication with the auto-configuration server.
ACS Password
Enter the TR-069 password for authentication with the auto-configuration server.
WAN Interface
used by TR-069
client
Select a WAN interface through which the TR-069 traffic passes.
Display SOAP
messages on
serial console
Select En a ble to show the SOAP messages on the console.
Connection
Request
Authentication
Select this option to enable authentication when there is a connection request from the ACS.
Connection
Request User
Name
Enter the connection request user name.
Connection
Request
Password
Enter the connection request password.
Connection
Request URL
This shows the connection request URL.
Local certificate
used by TR-069
client
You can choose a local certificate used by TR-069 client. The local certificate should be
imported in the Se cu r it y > Ce r t ifica t e s > Loca l Ce r t ifica t e s screen.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel
Click Ca n ce l to exit this screen without saving.
If you select An y_ W AN , you should also select the pre-configured WAN connection(s).
When the ACS makes a connection request to the Device, this user name is used to
authenticate the ACS.
When the ACS makes a connection request to the Device, this password is used to
authenticate the ACS.
The ACS can use this URL to make a connection request to the Device.
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
C HAPTER
30
TR-064
30.1 Overview
This chapter explains how to configure the Device’s TR-064 auto-configuration settings.
30.2 The TR-064 Screen
TR-064 is a LAN-Side DSL CPE Configuration protocol defined by the DSL Forum. TR-064 is built on
top of UPnP. It allows the users to use a TR-064 compliant CPE management application on their
computers from the LAN to discover the CPE and configure user-specific parameters, such as the
username and password.
Click M a in t e na n ce > TR- 0 6 4 to open the following screen.
Figure 139 Maintenance > TR-064
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 109 Maintenance > TR-064
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
State
Select En a ble to activate management via TR-064 on the LAN.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel
Click Ca n ce l to exit this screen without saving.
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
247
Chapter 30 TR-064
248
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
C HAPTER
31
Time Settings
31.1 Overview
This chapter shows you how to configure system related settings, such as system time, password,
name, the domain name and the inactivity timeout interval.
31.2 The Time Screen
To change your Device’s time and date, click M a int e na nce > Tim e . The screen appears as shown.
Use this screen to configure the Device’s time based on your local time zone.
Figure 140 Maintenance > Time Setting
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
249
Chapter 31 Time Settings
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 110 Maintenance > Time Setting
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Current Date/Time
Current Time
This field displays the time of your Device.
Each time you reload this page, the Device synchronizes the time with the time server.
Current Date
This field displays the date of your Device.
Each time you reload this page, the Device synchronizes the date with the time server.
NTP Time Server
First ~ Fifth NTP
time server
Select an NTP time server from the drop-down list box.
Otherwise, select Ot h e r and enter the IP address or URL (up to 29 extended ASCII
characters in length) of your time server.
Select N on e if you don’t want to configure the time server.
Check with your ISP/network administrator if you are unsure of this information.
Time Zone
Time zone offset
Choose the time zone of your location. This will set the time difference between your time
zone and Greenwich Mean Time (GMT).
Daylight Saving
Daylight Saving Time is a period from late spring to early fall when many countries set
their clocks ahead of normal local time by one hour to give more daytime light in the
evening.
State
Select En a ble if you use Daylight Saving Time.
Start rule:
Configure the day and time when Daylight Saving Time starts if you enabled Daylight
Saving. You can select a specific date in a particular month or a specific day of a specific
week in a particular month. The Tim e field uses the 24 hour format. Here are a couple of
examples:
Daylight Saving Time starts in most parts of the United States on the second Sunday of
March. Each time zone in the United States starts using Daylight Saving Time at 2 A.M.
local time. So in the United States, set the day to Se con d, Su n da y, the month to M a r ch
and the time to 2 in the H ou r field.
Daylight Saving Time starts in the European Union on the last Sunday of March. All of the
time zones in the European Union start using Daylight Saving Time at the same moment
(1 A.M. GMT or UTC). So in the European Union you would set the day to La st , Sun da y
and the month to M a r ch . The time you select in the o'clock field depends on your time
zone. In Germany for instance, you would select 2 in the H ou r field because Germany's
time zone is one hour ahead of GMT or UTC (GMT+1).
End rule
Configure the day and time when Daylight Saving Time ends if you enabled Daylight
Saving. You can select a specific date in a particular month or a specific day of a specific
week in a particular month. The Tim e field uses the 24 hour format. Here are a couple of
examples:
Daylight Saving Time ends in the United States on the first Sunday of November. Each
time zone in the United States stops using Daylight Saving Time at 2 A.M. local time. So
in the United States you would set the day to Fir st , Su n da y, the month to N ove m be r
and the time to 2 in the H ou r field.
Daylight Saving Time ends in the European Union on the last Sunday of October. All of the
time zones in the European Union stop using Daylight Saving Time at the same moment
(1 A.M. GMT or UTC). So in the European Union you would set the day to La st , Su nda y,
and the month to Oct obe r. The time you select in the o'clock field depends on your time
zone. In Germany for instance, you would select 2 in the H ou r field because Germany's
time zone is one hour ahead of GMT or UTC (GMT+1).
250
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
Chapter 31 Time Settings
Table 110 Maintenance > Time Setting (continued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel
Click Ca n ce l to exit this screen without saving.
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
251
Chapter 31 Time Settings
252
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
C HAPTER
32
E-mail Notification
32.1 Overview
A mail server is an application or a computer that runs such an application to receive, forward and
deliver e-mail messages.
To have the Device send reports, logs or notifications via e-mail, you must specify an e-mail server
and the e-mail addresses of the sender and receiver.
32.2 The Email Notification Screen
Click M a int e n a n ce > Em a il N ot ifica t ion to open the Em a il N ot ifica t ion screen. Use this screen
to view, remove and add mail server information on the Device.
Figure 141 Maintenance > Email Notification
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 111 Maintenance > Email Notification
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Add New Email
Click this button to create a new entry.
Mail Server
Address
This field displays the server name or the IP address of the mail server.
Username
This field displays the user name of the sender’s mail account.
Password
This field displays the password of the sender’s mail account.
Email Address
This field displays the e-mail address that you want to be in the from/sender line of the email that the Device sends.
Delete
Click this button to delete the selected entries.
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
253
Chapter 32 E-mail Notification
32.2.1 Email Notification Edit
Click the Add button in the Em a il N ot ifica t ion screen. Use this screen to configure the required
information for sending e-mail via a mail server.
Figure 142 Email Notification > Add
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 112 Email Notification > Add
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Mail Server
Address
Enter the server name or the IP address of the mail server for the e-mail address specified
in the Accou n t Em a il Addr e ss field.
If this field is left blank, reports, logs or notifications will not be sent via e-mail.
Authentication
Username
Enter the user name (up to 32 characters). This is usually the user name of a mail account
you specified in the Accou n t Em a il Addr e ss field.
Authentication
Password
Enter the password associated with the user name above.
Account Email
Address
Enter the e-mail address that you want to be in the from/sender line of the e-mail
notification that the Device sends.
If you activate SSL/TLS authentication, the e-mail address must be able to be authenticated
by the mail server as well.
254
Apply
Click this button to save your changes and return to the previous screen.
Cancel
Click this button to begin configuring this screen afresh.
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
C HAPTER
33
Logs Setting
33.1 Overview
You can configure where the Device sends logs and which logs and/or immediate alerts the Device
records in the Logs Se t t ing screen.
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
255
Chapter 33 Logs Setting
33.2 The Log Settings Screen
To change your Device’s log settings, click M a int e na nce > Logs Se t t in g. The screen appears as
shown.
Figure 143 Maintenance > Logs Setting
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 113 Maintenance > Logs Setting
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Syslog Setting
Syslog Logging
The Device sends a log to an external syslog server. Select En a ble to enable syslog logging.
Mode
Select the syslog destination from the drop-down list box.
If you select Re m ot e , the log(s) will be sent to a remote syslog server. If you select Loca l
File , the log(s) will be saved in a local file. If you want to send the log(s) to a remote syslog
server and save it in a local file, select Loca l File a n d Re m ot e .
256
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
Chapter 33 Logs Setting
Table 113 Maintenance > Logs Setting (continued)
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Syslog Server
Enter the server name or IP address of the syslog server that will log the selected categories
of logs.
UDP Port
Enter the port number used by the syslog server.
E-mail Log Settings
Mail Server
Enter the server name or the IP address of the mail server for the e-mail addresses
specified below. If this field is left blank, logs and alert messages will not be sent via E-mail.
System Log
Mail Subject
Type a title that you want to be in the subject line of the system log e-mail message that
the Device sends.
Security Log
Mail Subject
Type a title that you want to be in the subject line of the security log e-mail message that
the Device sends.
Send Log to
The Device sends logs to the e-mail address specified in this field. If this field is left blank,
the Device does not send logs via E-mail.
Send Alarm to
Alerts are real-time notifications that are sent as soon as an event, such as a DoS attack,
system error, or forbidden web access attempt occurs. Enter the E-mail address where the
alert messages will be sent. Alerts include system errors, attacks and attempted access to
blocked web sites. If this field is left blank, alert messages will not be sent via E-mail.
Alarm Interval
Specify how often the alarm should be updated.
Allowed
Capacity Before
Email
Set what percent of the Device’s log storage space can be filled before the Device sends a
log e-mail.
Clear log after
sending mail
Select this to delete all the logs after the Device sends an E-mail of the logs.
Active Log and Alert
System Log
Select the categories of system logs that you want to record.
Security Log
Select the categories of security logs that you want to record.
Send
immediate alert
Select log categories for which you want the Device to send E-mail alerts immediately.
Apply
Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel
Click Ca n ce l to restore your previously saved settings.
33.2.1 Example E-mail Log
An "End of Log" message displays for each mail in which a complete log has been sent. The
following is an example of a log sent by e-mail.
• You may edit the subject title.
• The date format here is Day-Month-Year.
• The date format here is Month-Day-Year. The time format is Hour-Minute-Second.
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
257
Chapter 33 Logs Setting
• "End of Log" message shows that a complete log has been sent.
Figure 144 E-mail Log Example
Subject:
Firewall Alert From
Date:
Fri, 07 Apr 2000 10:05:42
From:
user@zyxel.com
To:
user@zyxel.com
1|Apr 7 00 |From:192.168.1.1
To:192.168.1.255
|default policy |forward
| 09:54:03 |UDP
src port:00520 dest port:00520 |<1,00>
2|Apr 7 00 |From:192.168.1.131
To:192.168.1.255
|default policy |forward
| 09:54:17 |UDP
src port:00520 dest port:00520 |<1,00>
3|Apr 7 00 |From:192.168.1.6
To:10.10.10.10 |match
|forward
| 09:54:19 |UDP
src port:03516 dest port:00053 |<1,01>
……………………………..{snip}…………………………………..
……………………………..{snip}…………………………………..
126|Apr 7 00 |From:192.168.1.1
To:192.168.1.255
|match
|forward
| 10:05:00 |UDP
src port:00520 dest port:00520 |<1,02>
127|Apr 7 00 |From:192.168.1.131
To:192.168.1.255
|match
|forward
| 10:05:17 |UDP
src port:00520 dest port:00520 |<1,02>
128|Apr 7 00 |From:192.168.1.1
To:192.168.1.255
|match
|forward
| 10:05:30 |UDP
src port:00520 dest port:00520 |<1,02>
End of Firewall Log
258
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
C HAPTER
34
Firmware Upgrade
34.1 Overview
This chapter explains how to upload new firmware to your Device. You can download new firmware
releases from your nearest ZyXEL FTP site (or www.zyxel.com) to use to upgrade your device’s
performance.
Only use firmware for your device’s specific model. Refer to the label on
the bottom of your Device.
34.2 The Firmware Screen
Click M a int e na nce > Fir m w a r e Upgr a de to open the following screen. The upload process uses
HTTP (Hypertext Transfer Protocol) and may take up to two minutes. After a successful upload, the
system will reboot.
Do NOT turn off the Device while firmware upload is in progress!
Figure 145 Maintenance > Firmware Upgrade
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 114 Maintenance > Firmware Upgrade
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Current
Firmware
Version
This is the present Firmware version and the date created.
File Path
Type in the location of the file you want to upload in this field or click Br ow se ... to find it.
Browse...
Click this to find the .bin file you want to upload. Remember that you must decompress
compressed (.zip) files before you can upload them.
Upload
Click this to begin the upload process. This process may take up to two minutes.
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
259
Chapter 34 Firmware Upgrade
After you see the firmware updating screen, wait two minutes before logging into the Device again.
Figure 146 Firmware Uploading
The Device automatically restarts in this time causing a temporary network disconnect. In some
operating systems, you may see the following icon on your desktop.
Figure 147 Network Temporarily Disconnected
After two minutes, log in again and check your new firmware version in the St a t us screen.
If the upload was not successful, the following screen will appear. Click OK to go back to the
Fir m w a r e Upgr a de screen.
Figure 148 Error Message
260
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
C HAPTER
35
Configuration
35.1 Overview
The Con figu r a t ion screen allows you to backup and restore device configurations. You can also
reset your device settings back to the factory default.
35.2 The Configuration Screen
Click M a int e na nce > Configur a t ion . Information related to factory defaults, backup
configuration, and restoring configuration appears in this screen, as shown next.
Figure 149 Maintenance > Configuration
Backup Configuration
Backup Configuration allows you to back up (save) the Device’s current configuration to a file on
your computer. Once your Device is configured and functioning properly, it is highly recommended
that you back up your configuration file before making configuration changes. The backup
configuration file will be useful in case you need to return to your previous settings.
Click Ba ck up to save the Device’s current configuration to your computer.
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
261
Chapter 35 Configuration
Restore Configuration
Restore Configuration allows you to upload a new or previously saved configuration file from your
computer to your Device.
Table 115 Restore Configuration
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
File Path
Type in the location of the file you want to upload in this field or click Br ow se ... to find it.
Browse...
Click this to find the file you want to upload. Remember that you must decompress
compressed (.ZIP) files before you can upload them.
Upload
Click this to begin the upload process.
Do not turn off the Device while configuration file upload is in progress.
After the Device configuration has been restored successfully, the login screen appears. Login again
to restart the Device.
The Device automatically restarts in this time causing a temporary network disconnect. In some
operating systems, you may see the following icon on your desktop.
Figure 150 Network Temporarily Disconnected
If you uploaded the default configuration file you may need to change the IP address of your
computer to be in the same subnet as that of the default device IP address (192.168.1.1).
If the upload was not successful, the following screen will appear. Click OK to go back to the
Con figu r a t ion screen.
Figure 151 Configuration Upload Error
262
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
Chapter 35 Configuration
Reset to Factory Defaults
Click the Re se t button to clear all user-entered configuration information and return the Device to
its factory defaults. The following warning screen appears.
Figure 152 Reset Warning Message
Figure 153 Reset In Process Message
You can also press the RESET button on the rear panel to reset the factory defaults of your Device.
Refer to Section 1.6 on page 20 for more information on the RESET button.
35.3 The Reboot Screen
System restart allows you to reboot the Device remotely without turning the power off. You may
need to do this if the Device hangs, for example.
Click M a in t e n a n ce > Re boot . Click Re boot to have the Device reboot. This does not affect the
Device's configuration.
Figure 154 Maintenance > Reboot
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
263
Chapter 35 Configuration
264
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
C HAPTER
36
Diagnostic
36.1 Overview
The D ia gnost ic screens display information to help you identify problems with the Device.
The route between a CO VDSL switch and one of its CPE may go through switches owned by
independent organizations. A connectivity fault point generally takes time to discover and impacts
subscriber’s network access. In order to eliminate the management and maintenance efforts, IEEE
802.1ag is a Connectivity Fault Management (CFM) specification which allows network
administrators to identify and manage connection faults. Through discovery and verification of the
path, CFM can detect, analyze and isolate connectivity faults in bridged LANs.
36.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
• The Pin g & Tr a ce Rou t e & N sLook up screen lets you ping an IP address or trace the route
packets take to a host (Section 36.3 on page 266).
• The 8 0 2 .1 a g screen lets you perform CFM actions (Section 36.5 on page 268).
• The OAM Ping screen lets you send an ATM OAM (Operation, Administration and Maintenance)
packet to verify the connectivity of a specific PVC. (Section 36.5 on page 268).
36.2 What You Need to Know
The following terms and concepts may help as you read through this chapter.
How CFM Works
A Maintenance Association (MA) defines a VLAN and associated Maintenance End Point (MEP) ports
on the device under a Maintenance Domain (MD) level. An MEP port has the ability to send
Connectivity Check Messages (CCMs) and get other MEP ports information from neighbor devices’
CCMs within an MA.
CFM provides two tests to discover connectivity faults.
• Loopback test - checks if the MEP port receives its Loop Back Response (LBR) from its target
after it sends the Loop Back Message (LBM). If no response is received, there might be a
connectivity fault between them.
• Link trace test - provides additional connectivity fault analysis to get more information on where
the fault is. If an MEP port does not respond to the source MEP, this may indicate a fault.
Administrators can take further action to check and resume services from the fault according to
the line connectivity status report.
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
265
Chapter 36 Diagnostic
36.3 Ping & TraceRoute & NsLookup
Use this screen to ping, traceroute, or nslookup an IP address. Click M a int e na nce > D ia gnost ic >
Pin g & Tr a ce Rou t e & N sLook up to open the screen shown next.
Figure 155 Maintenance > Diagnostic > Ping & TraceRoute & NsLookup
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 116 Maintenance > Diagnostic > Ping & TraceRoute & NsLookup
266
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
URL or IP
Address
Type the IP address of a computer that you want to perform ping, traceroute, or nslookup in
order to test a connection.
Ping
Click this to ping the IP address that you entered.
TraceRoute
Click this button to perform the traceroute function. This determines the path a packet
takes to the specified computer.
Nslookup
Click this button to perform a DNS lookup on the IP address of a computer you enter.
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
Chapter 36 Diagnostic
36.4 802.1ag
Click M a in t e n a n ce > D ia gn ost ic > 8 .2 .1 a g to open the following screen. Use this screen to
perform CFM actions.
Figure 156 Maintenance > Diagnostic > 802.1ag
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 117 Maintenance > Diagnostic > 802.1ag
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
802.1ag Connectivity Fault Management
Maintenance
Domain (MD)
Level
Select a level (0-7) under which you want to create an MA.
Destination
MAC Address
Enter the target device’s MAC address to which the Device performs a CFM loopback test.
802.1Q VLAN
ID
Type a VLAN ID (0-4095) for this MA.
VDSL Traffic
Type
This shows whether the VDSL traffic is activated.
Loopback
Message (LBM)
This shows how many Loop Back Messages (LBMs) are sent and if there is any inorder or
outorder Loop Back Response (LBR) received from a remote MEP.
Linktrace
Message (LTM)
This shows the destination MAC address in the Link Trace Response (LTR).
Set MD Level
Click this button to configure the MD (Maintenance Domain) level.
Send Loopback
Click this button to have the selected MEP send the LBM (Loop Back Message) to a specified
remote end point.
Send Linktrace
Click this button to have the selected MEP send the LTMs (Link Trace Messages) to a
specified remote end point.
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
267
Chapter 36 Diagnostic
36.5 OAM Ping
Click M a in t e n a nce > D ia gn ost ic > OAM Pin g to open the screen shown next. Use this screen to
perform an OAM (Operation, Administration and Maintenance) F4 or F5 loopback test on a PVC. The
Device sends an OAM F4 or F5 packet to the DSLAM or ATM switch and then returns it to the
Device. The test result then displays in the text box.
ATM sets up virtual circuits over which end systems communicate. The terminology for virtual
circuits is as follows:
•
Virtual Channel (VC)
Logical connections between ATM devices
•
Virtual Path (VP)
A bundle of virtual channels
•
Virtual Circuits
A series of virtual paths between circuit end points
Figure 157 Virtual Circuit Topology
Think of a virtual path as a cable that contains a bundle of wires. The cable connects two points and
wires within the cable provide individual circuits between the two points. In an ATM cell header, a
VPI (Virtual Path Identifier) identifies a link formed by a virtual path; a VCI (Virtual Channel
Identifier) identifies a channel within a virtual path. A series of virtual paths make up a virtual
circuit.
F4 cells operate at the virtual path (VP) level, while F5 cells operate at the virtual channel (VC)
level. F4 cells use the same VPI as the user data cells on VP connections, but use different
predefined VCI values. F5 cells use the same VPI and VCI as the user data cells on the VC
connections, and are distinguished from data cells by a predefined Payload Type Identifier (PTI) in
the cell header. Both F4 flows and F5 flows are bidirectional and have two types.
• segment F4 flows (VCI=3)
• end-to-end F4 flows (VCI=4)
• segment F5 flows (PTI=100)
• end-to-end F5 flows (PTI=101)
OAM F4 or F5 tests are used to check virtual path or virtual channel availability between two DSL
devices. Segment flows are terminated at the connecting point which terminates a VP or VC
segment. End-to-end flows are terminated at the end point of a VP or VC connection, where an ATM
link is terminated. Segment loopback tests allow you to verify integrity of a PVC to the nearest
neighboring ATM device. End-to-end loopback tests allow you to verify integrity of an end-to-end
PVC.
Note: The DSLAM to which the Device is connected must also support ATM F4 and/or F5
to use this test.
268
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
Chapter 36 Diagnostic
Note: This screen is available only when you configure an ATM layer-2 interface.
Figure 158 Maintenance > Diagnostic > OAM Ping
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 118 Maintenance > Diagnostic > OAM Ping
LABEL
DESCRIPTION
Select a PVC on which you want to perform the loopback test.
F4 segment
Press this to perform an OAM F4 segment loopback test.
F4 end-end
Press this to perform an OAM F4 end-to-end loopback test.
F5 segment
Press this to perform an OAM F5 segment loopback test.
F5 end-end
Press this to perform an OAM F5 end-to-end loopback test.
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
269
Chapter 36 Diagnostic
270
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
C HAPTER
37
Troubleshooting
This chapter offers some suggestions to solve problems you might encounter. The potential
problems are divided into the following categories.
• Power, Hardware Connections, and LEDs
• Device Access and Login
• Internet Access
• Wireless Internet Access
• USB Device Connection
• UPnP
37.1 Power, Hardware Connections, and LEDs
The Device does not turn on. None of the LEDs turn on.
Make sure the Device is turned on.
Make sure you are using the power adaptor or cord included with the Device.
Make sure the power adaptor or cord is connected to the Device and plugged in to an appropriate
power source. Make sure the power source is turned on.
Turn the Device off and on.
If the problem continues, contact the vendor.
One of the LEDs does not behave as expected.
Make sure you understand the normal behavior of the LED. See Section 1.5 on page 20.
Check the hardware connections.
Inspect your cables for damage. Contact the vendor to replace any damaged cables.
Turn the Device off and on.
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
271
Chapter 37 Troubleshooting
If the problem continues, contact the vendor.
37.2 Device Access and Login
I forgot the IP address for the Device.
The default LAN IP address is 192.168.1.1.
If you changed the IP address and have forgotten it, you might get the IP address of the Device by
looking up the IP address of the default gateway for your computer. To do this in most Windows
computers, click St a r t > Run , enter cm d, and then enter ipconfig. The IP address of the D e fa ult
Ga t e w a y might be the IP address of the Device (it depends on the network), so enter this IP
address in your Internet browser.
If this does not work, you have to reset the device to its factory defaults. See Section 1.6 on page
20.
I forgot the password.
The default admin password is 1 2 3 4 .
If this does not work, you have to reset the device to its factory defaults. See Section 1.6 on page
20.
I cannot see or access the Login screen in the web configurator.
Make sure you are using the correct IP address.
• The default IP address is 192.168.1.1.
• If you changed the IP address (Section 7.2 on page 103), use the new IP address.
• If you changed the IP address and have forgotten it, see the troubleshooting suggestions for I
forgot the IP address for the Device.
272
Check the hardware connections, and make sure the LEDs are behaving as expected. See Section
1.5 on page 20.
Make sure your Internet browser does not block pop-up windows and has JavaScripts and Java
enabled.
If it is possible to log in from another interface, check the service control settings for HTTP and
HTTPS (M a int e n a n ce > Re m ot e M GM T).
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
Chapter 37 Troubleshooting
Reset the device to its factory defaults, and try to access the Device with the default IP address.
See Section 1.6 on page 20.
If the problem continues, contact the network administrator or vendor, or try one of the advanced
suggestions.
Adva n ce d Sugge st ions
• Make sure you have logged out of any earlier management sessions using the same user account
even if they were through a different interface or using a different browser.
• Try to access the Device using another service, such as Telnet. If you can access the Device,
check the remote management settings and firewall rules to find out why the Device does not
respond to HTTP.
I can see the Login screen, but I cannot log in to the Device.
Make sure you have entered the password correctly. The default admin password is 1 2 3 4 . The field
is case-sensitive, so make sure [Caps Lock] is not on.
You cannot log in to the web configurator while someone is using Telnet to access the Device. Log
out of the Device in the other session, or ask the person who is logged in to log out.
Turn the Device off and on.
If this does not work, you have to reset the device to its factory defaults. See Section 37.1 on page
271.
I cannot Telnet to the Device.
See the troubleshooting suggestions for I cannot see or access the Login screen in the web
configurator. Ignore the suggestions about your browser.
I cannot use FTP to upload / download the configuration file. / I cannot use FTP to upload
new firmware.
See the troubleshooting suggestions for I cannot see or access the Login screen in the web
configurator. Ignore the suggestions about your browser.
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
273
Chapter 37 Troubleshooting
37.3 Internet Access
I cannot access the Internet.
Check the hardware connections, and make sure the LEDs are behaving as expected. See the
Quick St a r t Guide and Section 1.5 on page 20.
Make sure you entered your ISP account information correctly in the N e t w or k Se t t in g >
Br oa dba n d screen. These fields are case-sensitive, so make sure [Caps Lock] is not on.
If you are trying to access the Internet wirelessly, make sure that you enabled the wireless LAN in
the Device and your wireless client and that the wireless settings in the wireless client are the same
as the settings in the Device.
Disconnect all the cables from your device and reconnect them.
If the problem continues, contact your ISP.
I cannot access the Internet through a DSL connection.
Make sure you have the D SL W AN port connected to a telephone jack (or the DSL or modem jack
on a splitter if you have one).
Make sure you configured a proper DSL WAN interface (N e t w or k Se t t in g > Br oa dba n d screen)
with the Internet account information provided by your ISP and that it is enabled.
Check that the LAN interface you are connected to is in the same interface group as the DSL
connection (N e t w or k Se t t ing > I nt e r fa ce Gr oup).
If you set up a WAN connection using bridging service, make sure you turn off the DHCP feature in
the LAN screen to have the clients get WAN IP addresses directly from your ISP’s DHCP server.
I cannot connect to the Internet using a second DSL connection.
ADSL and VDSL connections cannot work at the same time. You can only use one type of DSL
connection, either ADSL or VDSL connection at one time.
I cannot access the Internet anymore. I had access to the Internet (with the Device), but my
Internet connection is not available anymore.
274
Your session with the Device may have expired. Try logging into the Device again.
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
Chapter 37 Troubleshooting
Check the hardware connections, and make sure the LEDs are behaving as expected. See the
Quick St a r t Guide and Section 1.5 on page 20.
Turn the Device off and on.
If the problem continues, contact your ISP.
37.4 Wireless Internet Access
What factors may cause intermittent or unstabled wireless connection? How can I solve this
problem?
The following factors may cause interference:
• Obstacles: walls, ceilings, furniture, and so on.
• Building Materials: metal doors, aluminum studs.
• Electrical devices: microwaves, monitors, electric motors, cordless phones, and other wireless
devices.
To optimize the speed and quality of your wireless connection, you can:
• Move your wireless device closer to the AP if the signal strength is low.
• Reduce wireless interference that may be caused by other wireless networks or surrounding
wireless electronics such as cordless phones.
• Place the AP where there are minimum obstacles (such as walls and ceilings) between the AP and
the wireless client.
• Reduce the number of wireless clients connecting to the same AP simultaneously, or add
additional APs if necessary.
• Try closing some programs that use the Internet, especially peer-to-peer applications. If the
wireless client is sending or receiving a lot of information, it may have too many programs open
that use the Internet.
What is a Server Set ID (SSID)?
An SSID is a name that uniquely identifies a wireless network. The AP and all the clients within a
wireless network must use the same SSID.
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
275
Chapter 37 Troubleshooting
37.5 USB Device Connection
The Device fails to detect my USB device.
Disconnect the USB device.
Reboot the Device.
If you are connecting a USB hard drive that comes with an external power supply, make sure it is
connected to an appropriate power source that is on.
Re-connect your USB device to the Device.
37.6 UPnP
When using UPnP and the Device reboots, my computer cannot detect UPnP and refresh M y
N e t w or k Pla ce s > Loca l N e t w or k .
Disconnect the Ethernet cable from the Device’s LAN port or from your computer.
Re-connect the Ethernet cable.
The Loca l Ar e a Con n e ct ion icon for UPnP disappears in the screen.
Restart your computer.
I cannot open special applications such as white board, file transfer and video when I use the
MSN messenger.
276
Wait more than three minutes.
Restart the applications.
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
A PPENDIX
Customer Support
In the event of problems that cannot be solved by using this manual, you should contact your
vendor. If you cannot contact your vendor, then contact a ZyXEL office for the region in which you
bought the device. Regional websites are listed below (see also http://www.zyxel.com/
about_zyxel/zyxel_worldwide.shtml). Please have the following information ready when you
contact an office.
Required Information
• Product model and serial number.
• Warranty Information.
• Date that you received your device.
• Brief description of the problem and the steps you took to solve it.
Corporate Headquarters (Worldwide)
Taiwan
• ZyXEL Communications Corporation
• http://www.zyxel.com
Asia
China
• ZyXEL Communications (Shanghai) Corp.
ZyXEL Communications (Beijing) Corp.
ZyXEL Communications (Tianjin) Corp.
• http://www.zyxel.cn
India
• ZyXEL Technology India Pvt Ltd
• http://www.zyxel.in
Kazakhstan
• ZyXEL Kazakhstan
• http://www.zyxel.kz
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
277
Appendix A Customer Support
Korea
• ZyXEL Korea Corp.
• http://www.zyxel.kr
Malaysia
• ZyXEL Malaysia Sdn Bhd.
• http://www.zyxel.com.my
Pakistan
• ZyXEL Pakistan (Pvt.) Ltd.
• http://www.zyxel.com.pk
Philippines
• ZyXEL Philippines
• http://www.zyxel.com.ph
Singapore
• ZyXEL Singapore Pte Ltd.
• http://www.zyxel.com.sg
Taiwan
• ZyXEL Communications Corporation
• http://www.zyxel.com
Thailand
• ZyXEL Thailand Co., Ltd
• http://www.zyxel.co.th
Vietnam
• ZyXEL Communications Corporation-Vietnam Office
• http://www.zyxel.com/vn/vi
Europe
Austria
• ZyXEL Deutschland GmbH
• http://www.zyxel.de
Belarus
• ZyXEL BY
• http://www.zyxel.by
278
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
Appendix A Customer Support
Belgium
• ZyXEL Communications B.V.
• http://www.zyxel.com/be/nl/
Bulgaria
• ZyXEL България
• http://www.zyxel.com/bg/bg/
Czech
• ZyXEL Communications Czech s.r.o
• http://www.zyxel.cz
Denmark
• ZyXEL Communications A/S
• http://www.zyxel.dk
Estonia
• ZyXEL Estonia
• http://www.zyxel.com/ee/et/
Finland
• ZyXEL Communications
• http://www.zyxel.fi
France
• ZyXEL France
• http://www.zyxel.fr
Germany
• ZyXEL Deutschland GmbH
• http://www.zyxel.de
Hungary
• ZyXEL Hungary & SEE
• http://www.zyxel.hu
Latvia
• ZyXEL Latvia
• http://www.zyxel.com/lv/lv/homepage.shtml
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
279
Appendix A Customer Support
Lithuania
• ZyXEL Lithuania
• http://www.zyxel.com/lt/lt/homepage.shtml
Netherlands
• ZyXEL Benelux
• http://www.zyxel.nl
Norway
• ZyXEL Communications
• http://www.zyxel.no
Poland
• ZyXEL Communications Poland
• http://www.zyxel.pl
Romania
• ZyXEL Romania
• http://www.zyxel.com/ro/ro
Russia
• ZyXEL Russia
• http://www.zyxel.ru
Slovakia
• ZyXEL Communications Czech s.r.o. organizacna zlozka
• http://www.zyxel.sk
Spain
• ZyXEL Spain
• http://www.zyxel.es
Sweden
• ZyXEL Communications
• http://www.zyxel.se
Switzerland
• Studerus AG
• http://www.zyxel.ch/
280
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
Appendix A Customer Support
Turkey
• ZyXEL Turkey A.S.
• http://www.zyxel.com.tr
UK
• ZyXEL Communications UK Ltd.
• http://www.zyxel.co.uk
Ukraine
• ZyXEL Ukraine
• http://www.ua.zyxel.com
Latin America
Argentina
• ZyXEL Communication Corporation
• http://www.zyxel.com/ec/es/
Ecuador
• ZyXEL Communication Corporation
• http://www.zyxel.com/ec/es/
Middle East
Egypt
• ZyXEL Communication Corporation
• http://www.zyxel.com/homepage.shtml
Middle East
• ZyXEL Communication Corporation
• http://www.zyxel.com/homepage.shtml
North America
USA
• ZyXEL Communications, Inc. - North America Headquarters
• http://www.us.zyxel.com/
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
281
Appendix A Customer Support
Oceania
Australia
• ZyXEL Communications Corporation
• http://www.zyxel.com/au/en/
Africa
South Africa
• Nology (Pty) Ltd.
• http://www.zyxel.co.za
282
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
A PPENDIX
Legal Information
Copyright
Copyright © 2014 by ZyXEL Communications Corporation.
The contents of this publication may not be reproduced in any part or as a whole, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, translated into
any language, or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, magnetic, optical, chemical, photocopying, manual, or
otherwise, without the prior written permission of ZyXEL Communications Corporation.
Published by ZyXEL Communications Corporation. All rights reserved.
Disclaimer
ZyXEL does not assume any liability arising out of the application or use of any products, or software described herein. Neither does it
convey any license under its patent rights nor the patent rights of others. ZyXEL further reserves the right to make changes in any
products described herein without notice. This publication is subject to change without notice.
Your use of the Device is subject to the terms and conditions of any related service providers.
Trademarks
ZyNOS (ZyXEL Network Operating System) is a registered trademark of ZyXEL Communications, Inc. Other trademarks mentioned in this
publication are used for identification purposes only and may be properties of their respective owners.
Trademarks mentioned in this publication are used for identification purposes only and may be properties of their respective owners.
Certifications
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Interference Statement
The device complies with Part 15 of FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operations.
This device has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These
limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This device generates, uses,
and can radiate radio frequency energy, and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference
to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation.
If this device does cause harmful interference to radio/television reception, which can be determined by turning the device off and on, the
user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
Increase the separation between the equipment and the receiver.
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
FCC Caution: Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority
to operate this equipment.
FCC Radiation Exposure Statement
•
•
•
•
This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.
IEEE 802.11b, 802.11g or 802.11n (20MHz) operation of this product in the U.S.A. is firmware-limited to channels 1 through 11. IEEE
802.11n (40MHz) operation of this product in the U.S.A. is firmware-limited to channels 3 through 9.
IEEE 802.11b or 802.11g operation of this product in the U.S.A. is firmware-limited to channels 1 through 11.
To comply with FCC RF exposure compliance requirements, a separation distance of at least 20 cm must be maintained between the
antenna of this device and all persons.
IC Radiation Exposure Statement
This equipment complies with IC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. End users must follow the specific
operating instructions for satisfying RF exposure compliance.
Notices
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the
equipment.
This device is designed for the WLAN 2.4 GHz networks throughout the EC region and Switzerland, with restrictions in France.
Ce produit est conçu pour les bandes de fréquences 2,4 GHz conformément à la législation Européenne. En France métropolitaine, suivant
les décisions n°03-908 et 03-909 de l’ARCEP, la puissance d’émission ne devra pas dépasser 10 mW (10 dB) dans le cadre d’une
installation WiFi en extérieur pour les fréquences comprises entre 2454 MHz et 2483,5 MHz.
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
283
Appendix B Legal Information
Viewing Certifications
Go to http://www.zyxel.com to view this product’s documentation and certifications.
ZyXEL Limited Warranty
ZyXEL warrants to the original end user (purchaser) that this product is free from any defects in material or workmanship for a specific
period (the Warranty Period) from the date of purchase. The Warranty Period varies by region. Check with your vendor and/or the
authorized ZyXEL local distributor for details about the Warranty Period of this product. During the warranty period, and upon proof of
purchase, should the product have indications of failure due to faulty workmanship and/or materials, ZyXEL will, at its discretion, repair or
replace the defective products or components without charge for either parts or labor, and to whatever extent it shall deem necessary to
restore the product or components to proper operating condition. Any replacement will consist of a new or re-manufactured functionally
equivalent product of equal or higher value, and will be solely at the discretion of ZyXEL. This warranty shall not apply if the product has
been modified, misused, tampered with, damaged by an act of God, or subjected to abnormal working conditions.
Note
Repair or replacement, as provided under this warranty, is the exclusive remedy of the purchaser. This warranty is in lieu of all other
warranties, express or implied, including any implied warranty of merchantability or fitness for a particular use or purpose. ZyXEL shall in
no event be held liable for indirect or consequential damages of any kind to the purchaser.
To obtain the services of this warranty, contact your vendor. You may also refer to the warranty policy for the region in which you bought
the device at http://www.zyxel.com/web/support_warranty_info.php.
Registration
Register your product online to receive e-mail notices of firmware upgrades and information at www.zyxel.com for global products, or at
www.us.zyxel.com for North American products.
Open Source Licenses
This product contains in part some free software distributed under GPL license terms and/or GPL like licenses. Open source licenses are
provided with the firmware package. You can download the latest firmware at www.zyxel.com. If you cannot find it there, contact your
vendor or ZyXEL Technical Support at support@zyxel.com.tw. To obtain the source code covered under those Licenses, please contact
your vendor or ZyXEL Technical Support at support@zyxel.com.tw.
Regulatory Information
European Union
The following information applies if you use the product within the European Union.
Declaration of Conformity with Regard to EU Directive 1999/5/EC (R&TTE Directive)
Compliance Information for Wireless Products Relevant to the EU and Other Countries Following the EU Directive 1999/5/EC (R&TTE Directive)
[Czech]
ZyXEL tímto prohlašuje, že tento zařízení je ve shodě se základními požadavky a dalšími příslušnými ustanoveními
směrnice 1999/5/EC.
[Danish]
Undertegnede ZyXEL erklærer herved, at følgende udstyr udstyr overholder de væsentlige krav og øvrige relevante
krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF.
[German]
Hiermit erklärt ZyXEL, dass sich das Gerät Ausstattung in Übereinstimmung mit den grundlegenden Anforderungen
und den übrigen einschlägigen Bestimmungen der Richtlinie 1999/5/EU befindet.
[Estonian]
Käesolevaga kinnitab ZyXEL seadme seadmed vastavust direktiivi 1999/5/EÜ põhinõuetele ja nimetatud direktiivist
tulenevatele teistele asjakohastele sätetele.
[English]
Hereby, ZyXEL declares that this equipment is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant
provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC.
[Spanish]
Por medio de la presente ZyXEL declara que el equipo cumple con los requisitos esenciales y cualesquiera otras
disposiciones aplicables o exigibles de la Directiva 1999/5/CE.
[Greek]
284
Ε Η
Ε
Α
ΧΕ
Α ZyXEL ∆Η Ω Ε
Ε ∆ Α Α Ε
Η
ε π ισ ός
∆ΗΓ Α 1999/5/ΕC.
ΦΩ Ε Α
Ω∆Ε
Α Α
Η Ε
Α
[French]
Par la présente ZyXEL déclare que l'appareil équipements est conforme aux exigences essentielles et aux autres
dispositions pertinentes de la directive 1999/5/EC.
[Italian]
Con la presente ZyXEL dichiara che questo attrezzatura è conforme ai requisiti essenziali ed alle altre disposizioni
pertinenti stabilite dalla direttiva 1999/5/CE.
[Latvian]
Ar šo ZyXEL deklarē, ka iekārtas atbilst Direktīvas 1999/5/EK būtiskajām prasībām un citiem ar to saistītajiem
noteikumiem.
[Lithuanian]
Šiuo ZyXEL deklaruoja, kad šis įranga atitinka esminius reikalavimus ir kitas 1999/5/EB Direktyvos nuostatas.
[Dutch]
Hierbij verklaart ZyXEL dat het toestel uitrusting in overeenstemming is met de essentiële eisen en de andere
relevante bepalingen van richtlijn 1999/5/EC.
[Maltese]
Hawnhekk, ZyXEL, jiddikjara li dan tagħmir jikkonforma mal-ħtiġijiet essenzjali u ma provvedimenti oħrajn relevanti li
hemm fid-Dirrettiva 1999/5/EC.
[Hungarian]
Alulírott, ZyXEL nyilatkozom, hogy a berendezés megfelel a vonatkozó alapvetõ követelményeknek és az 1999/5/EK
irányelv egyéb elõírásainak.
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
Appendix B Legal Information
[Polish]
Niniejszym ZyXEL oświadcza, że sprzęt jest zgodny z zasadniczymi wymogami oraz pozostałymi stosownymi
postanowieniami Dyrektywy 1999/5/EC.
[Portuguese]
ZyXEL declara que este equipamento está conforme com os requisitos essenciais e outras disposições da Directiva
1999/5/EC.
[Slovenian]
ZyXEL izjavlja, da je ta oprema v skladu z bistvenimi zahtevami in ostalimi relevantnimi določili direktive 1999/5/EC.
[Slovak]
ZyXEL týmto vyhlasuje, že zariadenia spĺňa základné požiadavky a všetky príslušné ustanovenia Smernice 1999/5/EC.
[Finnish]
ZyXEL vakuuttaa täten että laitteet tyyppinen laite on direktiivin 1999/5/EY oleellisten vaatimusten ja sitä koskevien
direktiivin muiden ehtojen mukainen.
[Swedish]
Härmed intygar ZyXEL att denna utrustning står I överensstämmelse med de väsentliga egenskapskrav och övriga
relevanta bestämmelser som framgår av direktiv 1999/5/EC.
[Bulgarian]
С
[Icelandic]
Hér með lýsir, ZyXEL því yfir að þessi búnaður er í samræmi við grunnkröfur og önnur viðeigandi ákvæði tilskipunar
1999/5/EC.
[Norwegian]
Erklærer herved ZyXEL at dette utstyret er I samsvar med de grunnleggende kravene og andre relevante
bestemmelser I direktiv 1999/5/EF.
[Romanian]
Prin prezenta, ZyXEL declară că acest echipament este în conformitate cu cerinţele esenţiale şi alte prevederi
relevante ale Directivei 1999/5/EC.
я
ZyXEL
,ч
1999/5/ C.
я
National Restrictions
This product may be used in all EU countries (and other countries following the EU directive 1999/5/EC) without any limitation except for
the countries mentioned below:
Ce produit peut être utilisé dans tous les pays de l’UE (et dans tous les pays ayant transposés la directive 1999/5/CE) sans aucune
limitation, excepté pour les pays mentionnés ci-dessous:
Questo prodotto è utilizzabile in tutte i paesi EU (ed in tutti gli altri paesi che seguono le direttive EU 1999/5/EC) senza nessuna
limitazione, eccetto per i paesii menzionati di seguito:
Das Produkt kann in allen EU Staaten ohne Einschränkungen eingesetzt werden (sowie in anderen Staaten die der EU Direktive 1995/5/CE
folgen) mit Außnahme der folgenden aufgeführten Staaten:
In the majority of the EU and other European countries, the 2,4-GHz band has been made available for the use of wireless local area
networks (LANs). Later in this document you will find an overview of countries inwhich additional restrictions or requirements or both are
applicable.
The requirements for any country may evolve. ZyXEL recommends that you check with the local authorities for the latest status of their
national regulations for 2,4-GHz wireless LANs.
The following countries have restrictions and/or requirements in addition to those given in the table labeled “Overview of Regulat ory
Requirem ent s for Wireless LANs”:.
Belgium
The Belgian Institute for Postal Services and Telecommunications (BIPT) must be notified of any outdoor wireless link having a range
exceeding 300 meters. Please check http://www.bipt.be for more details.
Draadloze verbindingen voor buitengebruik en met een reikwijdte van meer dan 300 meter dienen aangemeld te worden bij het Belgisch
Instituut voor postdiensten en telecommunicatie (BIPT). Zie http://www.bipt.be voor meer gegevens.
Les liaisons sans fil pour une utilisation en extérieur d’une distance supérieure à 300 mètres doivent être notifiées à l’Institut Belge des
services Postaux et des Télécommunications (IBPT). Visitez http://www.ibpt.be pour de plus amples détails.
France
For 2.4 GHz, the output power is restricted to 10 mW EIRP when the product is used outdoors in the band 2454 - 2483.5 MHz. There are
no restrictions when used indoors or in other parts of the 2.4 GHz band. Check http://www.arcep.fr/ for more details.
Pour la bande 2.4 GHz, la puissance est limitée à 10 mW en p.i.r.e. pour les équipements utilisés en extérieur dans la bande 2454 2483.5 MHz. Il n'y a pas de restrictions pour des utilisations en intérieur ou dans d'autres parties de la bande 2.4 GHz. Consultez http://
www.arcep.fr/ pour de plus amples détails.
R&TTE 1999/5/EC
WLAN 2.4 – 2.4835 GHz
IEEE 802.11 b/g/n
Location
Frequency Range (GHz)
Indoor (No restrictions)
2.4 – 2.4835
Outdoor
2.4 – 2.454
2.454 – 2.4835
Italy
This product meets the National Radio Interface and the requirements specified in the National Frequency Allocation Table for Italy. Unless
this wireless LAN product is operating within the boundaries of the owner's property, its use requires a “general authorization.” Please
check http://www.sviluppoeconomico.gov.it/ for more details.
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
285
Appendix B Legal Information
Questo prodotto è conforme alla specifiche di Interfaccia Radio Nazionali e rispetta il Piano Nazionale di ripartizione delle frequenze in
Italia. Se non viene installato all 'interno del proprio fondo, l'utilizzo di prodotti Wireless LAN richiede una “Autorizzazione Generale”.
Consultare http://www.sviluppoeconomico.gov.it/ per maggiori dettagli.
Latvia
The outdoor usage of the 2.4 GHz band requires an authorization from the Electronic Communications Office. Please check http://
www.esd.lv for more details.
2.4 GHz frekvenèu joslas izmantoðanai ârpus telpâm nepiecieðama atïauja no Elektronisko sakaru direkcijas. Vairâk informâcijas: http://www.esd.lv.
Notes:
1. Although Norway, Switzerland and Liechtenstein are not EU member states, the EU Directive 1999/5/EC has also been implemented in
those countries.
2. The regulatory limits for maximum output power are specified in EIRP. The EIRP level (in dBm) of a device can be calculated by adding
the gain of the antenna used(specified in dBi) to the output power available at the connector (specified in dBm).
List of national codes
COUNTRY
ISO 3166 2 LETTER CODE
COUNTRY
ISO 3166 2 LETTER CODE
Austria
AT
Malta
MT
Belgium
BE
Netherlands
NL
Cyprus
CY
Poland
PL
Czech Republic
CR
Portugal
PT
Denmark
DK
Slovakia
SK
Estonia
EE
Slovenia
SI
Finland
FI
Spain
ES
France
FR
Sweden
SE
Germany
DE
United Kingdom
GB
Greece
GR
Iceland
IS
Hungary
HU
Liechtenstein
LI
Ireland
IE
Norway
NO
Italy
IT
Switzerland
CH
Latvia
LV
Bulgaria
BG
Lithuania
LT
Romania
RO
Luxembourg
LU
Turkey
TR
Safety Warnings
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
286
Do NOT use this product near water, for example, in a wet basement or near a swimming pool.
Do NOT expose your device to dampness, dust or corrosive liquids.
Do NOT store things on the device.
Do NOT install, use, or service this device during a thunderstorm. There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning.
Connect ONLY suitable accessories to the device.
Do NOT open the device or unit. Opening or removing covers can expose you to dangerous high voltage points or other risks. ONLY
qualified service personnel should service or disassemble this device. Please contact your vendor for further information.
Make sure to connect the cables to the correct ports.
Place connecting cables carefully so that no one will step on them or stumble over them.
Always disconnect all cables from this device before servicing or disassembling.
Use ONLY an appropriate power adaptor or cord for your device. Connect it to the right supply voltage (for example, 110V AC in North
America or 230V AC in Europe).
Do NOT allow anything to rest on the power adaptor or cord and do NOT place the product where anyone can walk on the power
adaptor or cord.
Do NOT use the device if the power adaptor or cord is damaged as it might cause electrocution.
If the power adaptor or cord is damaged, remove it from the device and the power source.
Do NOT attempt to repair the power adaptor or cord. Contact your local vendor to order a new one.
Do not use the device outside, and make sure all the connections are indoors. There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning.
Do NOT obstruct the device ventilation slots, as insufficient airflow may harm your device.
Use only No. 26 AWG (American Wire Gauge) or larger telecommunication line cord.
Antenna Warning! This device meets ETSI and FCC certification requirements when using the included antenna(s). Only use the
included antenna(s).
If you wall mount your device, make sure that no electrical lines, gas or water pipes will be damaged.
This product is for indoor use only (utilisation intérieure exclusivement).
Do not use this product near water for example, near a bathtub, washbowl, kitchen sink or laundry tub, in a wet basement or near a
swimming pool.
Avoid using a telephone (other than a cordless type) during an electrical storm. There may be a remote risk of electric shock from
lightning.
Do not use the telephone to report a gas leak in the vicinity of the leak.
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
Appendix B Legal Information
Your product is marked with this symbol, which is known as the WEEE mark. WEEE stands for Waste Electronics and
Electrical Equipment. It means that used electrical and electronic products should not be mixed with general waste. Used
electrical and electronic equipment should be treated separately.
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
287
Appendix B Legal Information
288
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
Index
Index
Canonical Format Indicator See CFI
ACL rule 189
certificate
factory default 202
ACS 245
activation
firewalls 185
media server 181
SIP ALG 159
SSID 76
Address Resolution Protocol 229
administrator password 24
AH 215
algorithms 215
applications
Internet access 18
media server 180
activation 181
iTunes server 180
applications, NAT 164
ARP Table 229, 231
authentication 88, 89
RADIUS server 90
Auto Configuration Server, see ACS 245
CCMs 265
certificates 201
authentication 201
CA
creating 203
public key 201
replacing 202
storage space 202
Certification Authority 201
Certification Authority. see CA
certifications 283
notices 283
viewing 284
CFI 61
CFM 265
CCMs 265
link trace test 265
loopback test 265
MA 265
MD 265
MEP 265
MIP 265
channel, wireless LAN 88
client list 107
backup
configuration 261
configuration
backup 261
firewalls 185
reset 263
restoring 262
static route 57, 127, 169
Basic Service Set, see BSS
blinking LEDs 20
Broadband 39
broadcast 62
BSS 91
example 91
compatibility, WDS 82
Connectivity Check Messages, see CCMs
contact information 277
copyright 283
CoS 145
CA 201
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
CoS technologies 132
creating certificates 203
CTS threshold 84, 88
289
Index
customer support 277
encapsulation 40, 216
RFC 1483 59
encryption 90
ESP 215
Extended Service Set IDentification 68, 78
data fragment threshold 84, 88
DDoS 184
default server address 158
Denials of Service, see DoS
DH 220
FCC interference statement 283
DHCP 102, 121
File Sharing 178
Differentiated Services, see DiffServ 145
file sharing 19
Diffie-Hellman key groups 220
filters
MAC address 78, 89
DiffServ 145
marking rule 145
digital IDs 201
disclaimer 283
DLNA 180
DMZ 158
DNS 102, 121
DNS server address assignment 62
documentation
related 2
Finger 164
firewalls 183
add protocols 185
configuration 185
DDoS 184
DoS 184
LAND attack 184
Ping of Death 184
SYN attack 184
Domain Name 164
firmware 259
version 37
Domain Name System, see DNS
forwarding ports 150
Domain Name System. See DNS.
fragmentation threshold 84, 88
DoS 184
FTP 150, 164
DS field 145
DS, dee differentiated services
DSCP 145
dynamic DNS 167
wildcard 168
General wireless LAN screen 66
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol, see DHCP
DYNDNS wildcard 168
Guide
Quick Start 2
ECHO 164
HTTP 164
e-mail
log example 257
Encapsulation 58
MER 58
PPP over Ethernet 59
290
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
Index
IEEE 802.1Q 61
IGA 162
IGMP 62
multicast group list 233
version 62
IKE phases 217
ILA 162
Inside Global Address, see IGA
client list 107
DHCP 102, 121
DNS 102, 121
IP address 102, 103, 122
MAC address 107
status 37
subnet mask 102, 103, 122
LAND attack 184
LAN-Side DSL CPE Configuration 247
LBR 265
Inside Local Address, see ILA
limitations
wireless LAN 91
WPS 98
interface group 171
link trace 265
Internet
wizard setup 31
Link Trace Message, see LTM
Internet access 18
wizard setup 31
login 23
passwords 23, 24
Internet Key Exchange 217
logs 221, 225, 233, 239, 255
Internet Protocol version 6 41
Loop Back Response, see LBR
Internet Service Provider, see ISP
loopback 265
IP address 102, 122
ping 266
private 122
WAN 40
LTM 265
inside header 217
Link Trace Response, see LTR
LTR 265
IP Address Assignment 61
IP alias
NAT applications 164
IPSec
algorithms 215
architecture 215
NAT 218
MA 265
MAC authentication 78
IPSec VPN 209
Mac filter 193
IPv6 41
addressing 41, 62
prefix 41, 63
prefix delegation 42
prefix length 41, 63
Maintenance Association, see MA
ISP 40
iTunes server 180
MAC address 79, 107
filter 78, 89
Maintenance Domain, see MD
Maintenance End Point, see MEP
managing the device
good habits 17
Maximum Burst Size (MBS) 60
MBSSID 91
MD 265
media server 180
activation 181
iTunes server 180
LAN 101
and USB printer 181
MEP 265
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
MTU (Multi-Tenant Unit) 61
291
Index
multicast 62
Peak Cell Rate (PCR) 60
Multiple BSS, see MBSSID
Per-Hop Behavior, see PHB 145
multiplexing 59
LLC-based 59
VC-based 59
PHB 145
multiprotocol encapsulation 59
Ping of Death 184
PIN, WPS 94
example 95
Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol 164
POP3 164
port forwarding 150
ports 20
NAT 149, 151, 161, 162
applications 164
IP alias 164
example 163
global 162
IGA 162
ILA 162
inside 162
IPSec 218
local 162
outside 162
port forwarding 150
port number 164
services 164
SIP ALG 158
activation 159
traversal 219
PPP over Ethernet, see PPPoE
PPPoE 40, 59
Benefits 59
PPTP 164
preamble 85, 88
preamble mode 92
prefix delegation 42
pre-shared key 219
Printer Server 181
printer sharing
and LAN 181
requirements 181
private IP address 122
product registration 284
protocol 40
NAT example 165
push button 21
negotiation mode 218
Push Button Configuration, see PBC
Network Address Translation, see NAT
push button, WPS 93
Network Map 35
network map 27
NNTP 164
other documentation 2
QoS 131, 145
marking 132
setup 131
tagging 132
versus CoS 132
outside header 216
Quality of Service, see QoS
Quick Start Guide 2
passwords 23, 24
PBC 93
292
RADIUS server 90
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
Index
registration
product 284
configuration 57, 127, 169
example 125
related documentation 2
static VLAN
remote management
TR-069 245
status 35
firmware version 37
LAN 37
WAN 37
wireless LAN 37
Remote Procedure Calls, see RPCs 245
reset 20, 263
restart 263
restoring configuration 262
RFC 1058. See RIP.
RFC 1389. See RIP.
RFC 1483 59
RFC 3164 221
RIP 129
router features 18
Routing Information Protocol. See RIP
RPPCs 245
RTS threshold 84, 88
security
wireless LAN 88
status indicators 20
subnet mask 102, 122
Sustained Cell Rate (SCR) 60
SYN attack 184
syslog
protocol 221
severity levels 221
system
firmware 259
version 37
passwords 23, 24
reset 20
status 35
LAN 37
WAN 37
wireless LAN 37
time 249
Security Log 223
Security Parameter Index, see SPI
service access control 243
Service Set 68, 78
Tag Control Information See TCI
Services 164
Tag Protocol Identifier See TPID
setup
firewalls 185
static route 57, 127, 169
TCI
Single Rate Three Color Marker, see srTCM
SIP ALG 158
activation 159
SMTP 164
SNMP 164
SNMP trap 164
SPI 184
srTCM 147
SSID 89
activation 76
MBSSID 91
static route 125, 129, 253
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
The 40
thresholds
data fragment 84, 88
RTS/CTS 84, 88
time 249
TPID 61
TR-064 247
TR-069 245
ACS setup 245
authentication 246
trademarks 283
traffic shaping 59
transport mode 216
trTCM 147
293
Index
tunnel mode 216
WEP 90
Two Rate Three Color Marker, see trTCM
WEP Encryption 70, 72, 73
WEP encryption 70
WEP key 70
unicast 62
Universal Plug and Play, see UPnP
upgrading firmware 259
UPnP 108
cautions 103
example 109
installation 109
NAT traversal 102
USB features 19
VID
Virtual Circuit (VC) 59
Virtual Local Area Network See VLAN
VLAN 61
Introduction 61
number of possible VIDs
priority frame
static
VLAN ID 61
VLAN Identifier See VID
VLAN tag 61
Wireless Distribution System, see WDS
wireless LAN 65, 86
authentication 88, 89
BSS 91
example 91
channel 88
encryption 90
example 87
fragmentation threshold 84, 88
limitations 91
MAC address filter 78, 89
MBSSID 91
preamble 85, 88
RADIUS server 90
RTS/CTS threshold 84, 88
security 88
SSID 89
activation 76
status 37
WDS 82, 92
compatibility 82
example 92
WEP 90
WPA 90
WPA-PSK 90
WPS 93, 95
example 96
limitations 98
PIN 94
push button 21, 93
wizard setup
Internet 31
WPA 90
WAN
status 37
Wide Area Network, see WAN 39
warranty 284
note 284
WDS 82, 92
compatibility 82
example 92
WPA-PSK 90
WPS 93, 95
example 96
limitations 98
PIN 94
example 95
push button 21, 93
web configurator 23
login 23
passwords 23, 24
294
VMG1312-B10C User’s Guide
Source Exif Data: 
File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.6
Linearized                      : Yes
Encryption                      : Standard V4.4 (128-bit)
User Access                     : Print, Annotate, Fill forms, Extract, Print high-res
Create Date                     : 2014:10:17 10:50:42Z
Modify Date                     : 2014:10:17 11:27:01+08:00
XMP Toolkit                     : Adobe XMP Core 4.2.1-c043 52.372728, 2009/01/18-15:08:04
Format                          : application/pdf
Creator                         : 
Title                           : 
Creator Tool                    : FrameMaker 9.0
Metadata Date                   : 2014:10:17 11:27:01+08:00
Producer                        : Acrobat Distiller 9.5.5 (Windows)
Document ID                     : uuid:8302358a-2516-4dfc-8f75-f95bd21d7505
Instance ID                     : uuid:6ad6a822-aec4-4b2f-b818-d9ef472d834d
Page Layout                     : OneColumn
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines
Page Count                      : 294
EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools
FCC ID Filing: I88VMG1312B10C

Navigation menu